Home

Pinnacle Studio 18 User Guide

1. ac3 m4a mp2 mp3 mpa wav wma Hovering over the Audio files option brings up a list of file types from which audio import is supported Zoom slider A final tool for managing screen real estate is the zoom slider at the bottom right of the browser Move the slider leftwards to reduce or rightwards to increase the size of the preview images in the file browser There are three ways of moving this slider with the mouse Click on the slider knob and drag to the left or right Click beside the slider knob to nudge it in the appropriate direction Click the minus plus buttons at the ends of the slider scale to move the knob by a larger amount Full screen photo To preview a selected photo on the full monitor screen click the rightmost button Set preview volume To set the playback volume of audio and video clips for previewing hover the mouse pointer in the area of the audio mute button in the bottom bar of the file browser A volume slider will appear beside the button Drag the knob up and down to control the volume Click the audio mute button itself to toggle audio muting Chapter 10 The Importer 319 h Adjusting the import file date and time The internal clocks of the recording devices are often set incorrectly resulting in incorrectly timestamped media files The Importer can correct this kind of problem by setting the date and time of the imported files according to your specification
2. If your system has a Blu ray recorder you can record onto any recordable media supported by the device Your standard DVD discs can be played back e Onany DVD player that can handle the recordable DVD format your burner creates Most players can handle the common formats e Ona computer with a DVD drive and suitable playback software e Onany HD DVD player Your Blu ray disc or DVD disc in AVCHD format can be played back Onthe Panasonic DMP BD10 the PlayStation 3 and other Blu ray players not all players support the AVCHD format but most do Chapter 11 The Exporter 341 Ona computer with a Blu ray drive and suitable playback software SD card Memory Stick and Built In Media AVCHD 2 0 disc structures can be written to flash memory cards such as SD cards or Memory Sticks or even to devices with built in media support e g camcorders with AVCHD 2 0 support Creating 3D discs If your project is in stereoscopic 3D you can easily create 3D discs in DVD AVCHD and AVCHD 2 0 formats On the Settings panel the S3D dropdown menu lets you choose the correct mode Use Anaglyph Anaglyph Crossed Eyed or Side by side 5096 to create the disc Settings Type AVCHD Preset Fitto disc S3D Anaglyph Anaglyph Anaglyph Crossed Eyed Side by side 50 None 2D Stereoscopic 3D choices for AVCHD A multistream 3D project can be exported in AVCHD 2 0 format to flash memory such as an SD card Memory Stick
3. Select preset Choose from a number of static and animated presets Zoom Horizontal and Vertical display the numerical values of the current frame Double click the sliders to reset the values Low pass filters out small scale movements to achieve a smooth optimized animation 178 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Chapter 6 Montage Pinnacle Studio s Montage is a method of enhancing your movies with off the shelf slideshow animation and multitrack editing effects Numerous professionally designed sequences called templates are available to give your productions instant impact The templates are grouped into matching themes so that along with the technical sophistication of the templates you will also find it easy to maintain a consistent look v amp Montage 50s Modem Aerodynamic h ULE SOs Modern Album 2 Antique Joumal Baby Comic Downtown Lights Extreme But the prepared templates are only half the magic of Montage The other half is customization Montage templates have slots that can contain several types of custom data including video text captions photos and more You can fill in a slot just by dragging a suitable asset to the corresponding displayed drop zone Montage in the Library Templates are grouped by theme in the Montage section of the Library Each theme consists of a set of templates that can be added to your Chapter 6 Montage 179 project as Montage clips You can create attra
4. By default the length of this template clip is 14 00 The embedded video clip starts at a fixed offset of 7 03 and runs to the end its length is therefore 6 27 If your video subclip is long enough you can lengthen the overall clip extending the full frame video portion This capability is indicated in the diagram above by the arrow at the end of the Video bar Segue A Segue templates connect two full frame video sequences by means of some kind of animation This first Segue example begins with two seconds of full frame video then zooms out to reveal a formation of multiple video panels running simultaneously Zooming in on the final subclip leads to an expandable section of full frame video 188 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Animation Segue A integrates multiple video sources Segue B This Segue achieves the basic aim of connecting two video clips more simply than the previous one The first subclip starts at full frame then zooms out while rotating away from the viewer When the reverse side of its rotating panel comes into view the second subclip is seen to have replaced the first The panel zooms in to fill the frame towards the end of the clip Animation Seque B creates a simpler transition Once again the full screen segment of the second subclip can be extended by expanding the template clip on the timeline Segue C This is similar to Segue B except that the flying video panel takes an extra spi
5. After logging in to your YouTube account you can enter a new Title Description or new Tags Choose your Format and Privacy settings from dropdown menus 360 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Upload to YouTube the sky is the limit Description Created with Corel Pinnacle Studio Tags Island Vacation 2014 Privacy Public Format Fastest 360p Adding tags When the settings are to your satisfaction click the Start button at the bottom of the window to render and upload your file After uploading When the upload is finished you have the option of opening a web browser to view your creation or returning to Studio For Facebook YouTube and Vimeo your file must be processed before it can be viewed online and so may not be immediately available Chapter 11 The Exporter 361 Output toa device Studio can create movie files that are compatible with the following list of devices Apple Microsoft Xbox and Xbox One e Nintendo Wii Sony PS3 and PS4 Sony PSP If you are exporting a stereoscopic 3D project you will be offered the 3D formats compatible with the selected device Apple Studio supports exporting files that are compatible with popular Apple devices like iPod iPhone and iPad and Apple TV as well Settings Type Apple M Preset iPod iPhone High Quality S3D Pod iPhone High Quality iPod iPhone Good Quality iPod iPhone Small File Size Apple TV 1st Generation Apple TV 2nd
6. Chapter 8 Sound and music 241 The waveform and frequency buttons at the lower right of the Audio Editor let you switch between these complementary displays at will The frequency spectrum breaks down the audio signals by frequency bands showing the sound level in each band Lower frequencies are on the left Peak levels are shown as a small box above each main bar for which a peak has been detected in the past few seconds Controls for synchronous video If you are editing video that has a synchronous audio track both video and audio editing facilities are available through the Video and Audio buttons at the top of the window While you are in the Audio Editor a video monitor panel is also available Video audio switch If video is available a tab is provided at the top left of the screen for switching to the Video Editor For details on the controls available when the Video tab is selected please see Correcting video on page 145 242 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Video monitor If synchronous video exists for the currently selected audio a small video preview panel opens at the upper left of the Audio Editor While you are previewing the sound the video monitor lets you follow the action visually as well If you switch to the Video Editor you will see a waveform display panel at the same screen location See Correcting video on page 145 Audio corrections The correction facilities in the Audio Editor
7. Default 1 1 Routing Stereo To Left k Stereo To Right Swap Channels Left To Dual Mono Right To Dual Mono Selecting a Channel Routing option in the Channel Mixer Just above the list is the Level Adjustment slider at the default setting of OdB To the right of the list is the Normalize button Normalize button The normalize button examines the audio samples in the loaded sound to determine the amount of uniform increase that 240 Pinnacle Studio User Guide can be applied without overmodulation harsh digital clipping of any sample Unlike compression and limiting which modify the dynamics of audio material normalization preserves dynamics by uniformly increasing or decreasing amplitude Waveform graph and frequency spectrum The waveform The waveform graph of the audio is shown in the central display It shows statically how the amplitude of the sound changes with time If you zoom in on the sound as far as possible the vertical lines on the graph indicate individual sound samples The waveform graph is also seen in the Library source Player when an asset is selected The waveform graph shows the change in audio levels over time For stereo recordings the graph is horizontally divided as shown here with the left channel uppermost An alternative dynamic view of the same audio material is given by the frequency spectrum display which shows the changing spectral composition of the sound as it plays back
8. Function buttons Some buttons in the final group at the bottom of the Player appear only with particular asset types A video file uses all four types in the order shown and described here Scenes view This button activates a mode in which the Browser displays a separate icon or text record for each scene in the video file As explained under Video scene detection a scene in the most general sense is just any portion of a video file When Scenes view is active the neighboring Open in corrections editor button is removed and a Split scene button takes its place This allows you to define your own scenes instead of or as well as relying on the automatic scene detection feature For more information about video scenes in the Library see Video scene detection on page 54 Open in media editor The media file is opened for editing in the applicable media editor so that corrections settings can be adjusted Full screen The preview is shown in a special full screen window with its own basic set of transport controls To close the full screen display click the close button in the top right corner of the window or press Esc Info This button switches between the Player s information and playback views The information view can be opened directly by Chapter 2 The Library 43 clicking the info button on a media asset icon in the Browser Audio assets have no separate playback view instead full scrubbing controls are s
9. LI A white fade bar on the time ruler below the media editor preview controls the duration of an incoming transition at the left end of the scale or an outgoing one at the right Only a transition currently being edited is active as determined by whether the Transition In or the Transition Out tab is selected Click the Play button to preview the selected transition or grab the scrubber to preview the transition at your own speed 00 00 36 00 00 00 40 00 Pan and zoom The pan and zoom tool is available for photos and images when they have been opened in the Photo Editor from the timeline Access the tool by clicking the Pan and zoom tab at the top of the screen With pan and zoom an area from within the picture is used to fill the whole video frame The area can be of any size and shape On playback it will be enlarged sufficiently to fill the video frame without empty areas If you define two or more areas pan and zoom animates your presentation of the image by zooming in and out while traversing it 174 Pinnacle Studio User Guide with simulated camera movements as it moves smoothly from one area to another The pan and zoom tool utilizes the full available resolution of your original photo so if the picture is large enough you will not forfeit detail by zooming in Adding pan and zoom To apply pan and zoom to a photo clip on the timeline double click it to open the Photo Editor Because you are opening f
10. To activate editing for an existing text layer click anywhere inside the control frame Text edit mode becomes active and to save you an often required step all existing text in the layer is automatically selected As usual selected text is indicated by highlighting Chapter 7 The Title Editor 217 DN 5r Clarendon Cn BT A72 Ies E a amp LI A text layer with all text selected From left to right the text editing controls in the header bar above govern letter styling bold italic underline text alignment and text flow and font name and size In text edit mode the mouse pointer over the layer has the I beam shape as shown here To modify the text itself simply start typing The highlighted text disappears and the text you type takes its place As you type the current insertion point the place in the text where new letters are inserted is indicated by a vertical line If you want to add new text without losing what was already there click at the desired insertion point after putting the layer in text edit mode or use the arrow keys to maneuver the insertion point as desired You can also highlight and thus replace only part of the text before typing drag across the letters with the mouse or hold down Shift while using the arrow keys You may also triple click to select all of the text in the layer or double click on a word to select just that word Lastly if you want to select all the text in the laye
11. listening space For the purposes of timeline editing all panning occurs in surround mode so you only have to deal with a single version of the Panner controls The surround panned clips can be mixed down to other output configurations after editing of the project has been completed This lets you work with a single set of panning decisions for all formats you might eventually produce Changes made with this tool apply to the current clip only They stay with the clip even if you move or copy it to another track To open the Panner click its access button in the track header mixer panel This button is grayed if there is no clip on the track at the scrubber position The sound source is denoted by a blue spot on a Chapter 8 Sound and music 257 two dimensional grid The listener is situated in the center facing forward PANNER A V Track 1 Dialog Mode LP Positioning the clip audio using the Panner in Dialog mode Note that the icons for the front corner speakers are translucent indicating that they are not used in this mode As adjusted here the audio for the track will be heard coming from the right Selection list The dropdown list at the top of the Panner window provides three methods for distributing the sound across the set of six surround speakers 258 Pinnacle Studio User Guide 5 1 is the best general purpose setting for natural sound reproduction Use it for general atmospheric sounds such as
12. Publish Settings are chosen after logging in to the service provider After selecting a sharing provider click the Start Publishing button at the bottom of the Studio Exporter window If you are not already logged in to the provider s site a log in page will appear After logging in select a format for uploading your project The choices provided in the Format dropdown are Fastest 360p Standard 480p HD 720p and HD 1080p Each specifies a different combination of frame size and video data rate Facebook After logging in to your Facebook account you can enter a new Title or Description for your movie and select Format and Privacy settings from the dropdown menus 358 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Upload to facebook the sky is the limit Created with Corel Pinnacle Studio Corel Pinnacte Studio Privacy settings Use the Start button at the bottom of the Studio Exporter window to render and upload your project Vimeo After logging in to your Vimeo account you can modify the movie s Title Description and Tags Choose the Format you prefer from the dropdown menu Chapter 11 The Exporter 359 Upload to the sky is the limit Created with Corel Pinnacle Studio Corel Pinnacle Studio Anyone HD 1080p Fastest 360p Standard 480p HD 720p Setting the quality to HD 1080p When ready click the Start button at the bottom of the window to render and upload your project YouTube
13. Source Timeline With Menu selected as the Player input mode top the Player provides interactive zones on the preview screen for assigning chapter links Here C1 shows a chapter link has been assigned to the Play Movie button the over the Scene Selection button shows that it is not currently assigned Show Link Numbers checkbox kali Check this box to cause link numbers to be displayed in the preview over every button in the menu The link numbers match the format and color of the timeline chapter flags Disc Simulator button This button invokes the Disc Simulator window where you can preview your project with full interactivity to make sure your menus are behaving as expected Burn Disc button a When you are ready to test your project on an actual disc click this button or Export at the top of the screen to invoke the Exporter which will guide you through the process of burning your movie onto an optical disc 276 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Link indicators As seen in the illustration above when a menu with unlinked chapter buttons is previewed those buttons are indicated by red question marks rather than a chapter number Except perhaps for an unused subset on the final page of a multipage menu all the chapter buttons on your menus should link to your movie Menu editing on the timeline Developing a project for optical disc such as DVD in Pinnacle Studio s Disc Editor gives you lots of oppo
14. Start the playback device just before the point at which you would like capture to begin Video and audio previewing should now be active If not check the cabling and the converter installation Click the Start Capture button to start recording The button caption changes to Stop Capture At the end of the segment click the button again The captured material is stored in the Library Halt the source device To capture for a specified duration 1 2 Verify that the correct input is connected e g Video S Video Enter the desired capture duration in the Duration time counter control below the video preview Start the playback device just before the point at which you would like capture to begin Video and audio previewing should now be active If not check the cabling and the converter installation Click the Start Capture button to start recording The button caption changes to Stop Capture The capture operation will stop automatically after the desired duration has been captured You may also stop the capture manually by clicking the Stop Capture button Import from DVD or Blu ray Disc The Importer can import video and audio data from DVDs and BDs Blu ray discs 328 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Note Blu ray authoring is not activated by default To activate it choose Help gt Enable Blu ray authoring User Manual Register duc Enable Blu ray authoring To begin insert
15. Studio allows you to export files which are compatible with the popular Sony PlayStation Portable devices Output files are based on MPEG 4 video compression technology Settings Type Sony PSP Preset High Quality High Quality Good Qualty Small File Size As with the iPod compatible type the combination of powerful compression with a small 320x240 frame size produces very small output files relative to other formats 364 Pinnacle Studio User Guide ar Fy Chapter 12 Setup Pinnacle Studio s central configuration window is called the Control Panel Note that it is for Pinnacle Studio settings only The Microsoft Windows Control Panel is unrelated To begin select Setup gt Control Panel on the Pinnacle Studio main menu When the Control Panel appears choose a page from the directory on the left side of the window Control Panel E Waichioiders Audio Device Event Log Export and Preview Import C Users Public Pictures C Users Public Videos Keyboard C Users Public Music Project Settings D Family Vacations Storage Locations The Pinnacle Studio Control Panel is a central configuration window for the application The eight pages of Control Panel settings are described here in turn Chapter 12 Setup 365 Watchfolders Watchfolders are folders on a hard drive or other storage medium that are monitored by Pinnacle Studio When the contents of a watchfolder change the Library is au
16. When unpacking is finished the unpacked project is added to the Library and opened on the project editor timeline where it can be edited as usual Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 89 To open a Studio project Choose File gt Import previous Pinnacle Studio projects Please note that some features of projects created with a previous version of Studio may not be supported in the current version To import a Studio for iPad project Choose File gt Import Studio for iPad App projects Timeline settings To start editing a new project verify that the video format settings of your project aspect ratio 2D or 3D frame size and playback speed are as you want them You can choose in the Project settings tab of the application settings to set the values of these properties automatically by matching the first clip added to the project You can also set them manually See Project settings on page 374 for configuring the automatic feature and The timeline toolbar on page 77 for instructions on entering project settings manually Depending on your timeline settings clips in some formats might not be instantly playable Such content will automatically be rendered in an appropriate format Establishing tracks With only minor exceptions timeline tracks in Pinnacle Studio do not have specialized roles Any clip can be placed on any track As your projects become more complex however you will find it increasingly helpful to
17. 392 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Case 3 Pinnacle Studio crashes repeatedly when you perform some specific combination of steps Case 1 Studio crashes randomly Here are some troubleshooting steps to try You can work through them in order until you get a result Get the latest version Make sure that you have the latest version of Pinnacle Studio installed Optimize settings Check these Preview settings in Pinnacle Studio that may be adjusted to get better results Quality Select Fastest Playback and see if your results improve Optimization threshold Turning this setting off will let you discover whether it helps your crashing problem However poor preview playback may result if the threshold is not used or is not properly adjusted Render while play Try turning off this option if you notice that the crash tends to occur while you are previewing End background tasks It is important with this type of problem to unload any background processes before using Pinnacle Studio Many tasks software programs run in the background on every Windows system usually without drawing attention to themselves Appendix A Troublehooting 393 Occasionally however one of these may be the cause of instability in a particular application In Windows 7 or Windows 8 the Ctrl Alt Delete key combination leads to the Task Manager The Processes tab will show you what is running See knowledge base document 229157 Ho
18. Image files To select or unselect files for import click the checkbox in the top right corner of one or more icons In the illustration four files have been selected Previewing media and project files Previewing audio and video The file browser includes built in previewing for all supported asset types Click the play button in the center of video audio and project file icons in the Library to preview the assets they represent For quick viewing video files play back within the icon frame itself Click anywhere on the icon to halt playback otherwise the entire file is previewed Horses mp4 Full screen photo preview To view a digital photo or other picture file at full screen resolution double click its icon or click the full screen button in the toolbar beneath the browser or press the F11 key Chapter 10 The Importer 315 Scrub preview Audio video and project file icons provide a scrubber control immediately below the file icon Click and drag the scrubber knob to manually review any part of the file The mouse pointer changes to a two headed horizontal arrow when it is correctly positioned for scrubbing Cp Horses mp4 Marking files for import To mark asset files one at a time for importing click the checkbox at the top right corner of the file icon This box is checked automatically when you browse to a new folder for all the files on display Snow scene jpg Snow scene jpg Click the checkbox
19. Monitoring trim points When you are trimming with multiple trim points it is helpful to switch the preview from one trim location to another to make sure that each is properly set Selecting a trim point for monitoring makes it the source for audio and video during preview Monitoring is enabled for a trim point when it is created When multiple trim points are created in succession you can fine tune each one as you go To select an existing trim point for monitoring Ctrl click it While trim mode is active use Tab or Shift Tab to cycle through the open points After using Ctrl click to monitor a trim point trimming can be controlled with the Left and Right arrow keys Trim one frame using the keys unshifted add the Shift key to trim in 10 frame steps 110 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Moving and copying To move a selection of one or more clips place the mouse pointer on any selected clip and watch for it to change to a hand symbol When it does start dragging the clip to the desired position Move can be thought of as a two step process First the selection is deleted from the current timeline according to the rules of the current edit mode Second the selection is moved to the desired end position where it is inserted in a left to right fashion per track The relative position of all selected clips on all tracks is retained Moving a sparse selection a selection in which some clips per track are selected while oth
20. S3D Anaglyph Advanced A Click the Advanced button to configure your output with the Advanced Settings panel Windows Media The Windows Media file format is also designed for streaming Internet playback The files can be played on any computer where the Windows Media player a free program from Microsoft is installed Settings Type Windows Media Preset High Quality NTSC 3D None 2D Anaglyph Anaglyph Crossed Eyed k Side by side 5096 Top and Bottom 5096 None 2D Click the Advanced button to configure your output with the Advanced Settings panel 356 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Output to cloud The Pinnacle Studio Exporter lets you share your movie creations with your social network on Facebook with your professional peers on Vimeo and with potentially the entire world on YouTube Settings Destination Facebook Action Facebook Vimeo Details YouTube Publish the content as a file to selected provider Storing your media and projects on the Cloud means they are also accessible from your smart phone or tablet and can easily be transferred between computers for collaboration and convenient access Chapter 11 The Exporter 357 Settings Destination Vimeo Action Publish Publish Details Publish the content as a file to selected provider When uploading to the Cloud whether to Facebook Vimeo or YouTube the only action available within the Exporter itself Is
21. Text stylings cannot be applied to a permanent group Aligning layers in temporary groups The final type of group operation one that applies to temporary groups only is provided by the group align button on the Layer List toolbar The commands of which there are three for horizontal and three for vertical alignment affect all the members of the group except for the first selected which sets the position for the others 234 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Chapter 8 Sound and music Video may be thought of as primarily a visual medium but the role of sound in your movies is often no less important than that of the images on the screen Feature film and television productions include numerous types of audio beginning with the dialog and other sounds created during live action In your movies that raw soundtrack the original or synchronous audio is imported along with the video and remains bound to it unless you explicitly separate them Most commercial productions also require sound effects slamming doors crashing cars barking dogs and incidental music which may consist of music created especially for the production songs taken from recordings or both With the ScoreFitter tool you can even create a full length musical background track at the press of a button Voice overs and other types of customized audio are also often needed Audio features of Pinnacle Studio On the timeline of your movie or disc proje
22. Viewers will be unable to follow the events 404 Pinnacle Studio User Guide unless the story line is logical Capture viewer interest from the very beginning with a fast paced or spectacular start and maintain that interest until the very end Viewers can lose interest or become disoriented if scenes are strung together in a manner that is illogical or chronologically false or if scenes are too hectic or short under three seconds There should be some continuity of motif from one scene to the next Bridging the gaps Make an effort to bridge the gaps from one filming location to another You can use close ups for example to bridge chronological jumps zooming in on the face then back out after a few seconds onto a different scene Maintain continuity Continuity consistency of detail from one scene to the next is vital in providing a satisfying viewing experience Sunny weather does not fit with spectators who opened their umbrellas Tempo of cuts The tempo at which a film cuts from one scene to the next often influences the message and mood of the film The absence of an expected shot and the duration of a shot are both ways of manipulating the message of the film Avoid visual disjunctions Stringing together similar shots in succession may result in visual disjunctions A person may be in the left half of the frame one moment and in the right half of the frame the next or may appear first with and then without eyegl
23. Zoom Horizontal Vertical Low Pass Animated mode When Animated mode is set the image is automatically analyzed and an initial size and position both for the start and end is automatically set The generated animation begins zoomed in slightly on the image subject then pulls back to the full size available If the image has a different aspect ratio than the video frame enough zoom is applied throughout to prevent blank areas from appearing 176 Pinnacle Studio User Guide To support the extra functionality of Animated mode the color of the selection frame is used to indicate its place in the animated sequence The start frame is green and the end frame is red Frames at any intermediate point are drawn in white When multiple frames are visible you can drag the frames as needed by positioning your mouse over either the edge of the frame or the center dot Moving the white frame will automatically add a keyframe at the current position Keyframing pan and zoom With keyframing you can create a customized pan and zoom animation of arbitrary complexity though simple sequences of a few steps may be all you ever need Switch to Animated mode as described above and note that two frames have been added to the preview These special start and end keyframes which as mentioned above are drawn in green and red respectively They can be dragged in space but not time If you don t require intermediate keyframes positioning the
24. a control handle should appear on the clip From now on each change to the clip volume either creates a new keyframe if there is not one at the current position or updates the value of one that is already present To allow keyframe editing with the mouse activate the volume keyframe editing button in the group of buttons at the right hand end of the timeline toolbar Now when you position the mouse pointer over the green volume contour on an audio clip you will see that the contour responds by highlighting in white To activate clip volume keyframe editing click the button in the right hand group on the timeline toolbar A number of mouse based keyframe editing functions are now available Before taking on any serious keyframe editing take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the commands in this set They enable you to manipulate keyframes quickly without having to repetitiously move to a chosen keyframe and operate the clip level knob The default style of editing operations for volume keyframes favors maintaining sections of constant clip level rather than continuously 254 Pinnacle Studio User Guide wandering up and down along ramps in the contour line In cases where this does not produce the editing result you desire try again while holding the Alt key This turns off any automatic adjustments that might otherwise be made Insert a new keyframe by clicking the contour line Instantly create a keyframed fad
25. allowing for example the brief attack of a piano note to remain distinct while applying compression as usual for sustained sounds Release controls the speed with which compression is switched off when the signal falls back below the threshold Gain It is best to make adjustments to the gain after it has already been compressed Knee A higher knee value causes compression to take hold gradually as the threshold sound level is approached and departed from rather than switching on all at once This changes the tonal qualities of the compressed sound Expander The Expander decreases the gain of signals that fall below a chosen threshold Expanders provide a gentler way of reducing noisy low level signals than the abrupt cut off of a gate Ratio Threshold Attack Release These parameters have the same meanings as in the Compressor see above Range This controls the maximum gain reduction attenuation Hold This determines how long the expander remains active after the initial attack Increasing this value is useful when between louder signals there are small pauses or much quieter passages that should not be amplified In this use the expander works like a noise gate 246 Pinnacle Studio User Guide De esser This audio filter inconspicuously removes distracting sibilance from recorded speech The available parameters allow individualized fine adjustment of the effect Frequency This knob sets the frequency above
26. an orange frame around the clip indicates selection The timeline scrubber will jump to the beginning of the selected clip and a connecting band of color will link the Storyboard clip with its timeline counterpart If the timeline position of the selected clip is currently off screen it will be brought into view You can select multiple clips using the Shift and Ctrl keys according to the usual Windows conventions 76 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Reordering clips To pick up a clip and move it click on it until it is selected and then drag it to its new location If necessary the Storyboard will scroll until you reach the desired position Resizing The height of the timeline along with the relative proportions of the Library and the Player can be adjusted with the sizing grip in the form of an inverted T in the middle of the screen To adjust the height of individual timeline tracks grab and adjust the separator lines between the track headers on the left If the vertical size of all tracks exceeds the available viewing area a scroll bar at the right will allow you to select which tracks are in view Set the height of the Storyboard when it is visible by vertically dragging the horizontal separator along the Storyboard s bottom edge For more information see Navigation tool selector on page 80 The timeline toolbar The toolbar above the Movie Editor timeline offers various settings tools and functions that apply to th
27. automatically saved in a Collection named Latest Smart Creation If you expect to make further use of this grouping of assets rename the Collection to prevent it being overwritten the next time you look at a SmartMovie preview The Edit button brings your production to the Movie Editor timeline for detailed editing It s a good idea to check that the timeline video settings match your requirements for the show The video settings button on the settings panel below provides access to these Also see The Project Timeline on page 70 Preview Edit Export k 58 Pinnacle Studio User Guide When the presentation is the way you want it click Export to burn a disc or create a file for upload The storage area The photos in the upper bin are displayed as icons while the music and sound files in the lower bin appear as text lines giving the file name and duration of each asset Both bins support multiple selection drag and drop reordering and a context menu with just two commands Delete selected The selected media are removed from the SmartMovie production They remain available in the Library for other uses Shortcut Delete Open editor This command opens the Corrections tool of the Photo or Audio Editor Any modifications you make to the media apply only within this SmartMovie production Shortcut double click Settings The settings on this subpanel customize the SmartMovie production Settings Title Clip
28. just to clips on the timeline When corrections have been applied in the Library their benefit is passed on to any project that uses the improved assets Please see Chapter 4 Corrections on page 127 for details about Corrections and how to use them About effects Effects is an umbrella term taking in a wide range of software tools for manipulating your media It includes presentational tools like 2D Editor atmospheric transformations like Old film and some theatrical touches like Fractal fire that you may find are too much fun not to use Like Corrections you can apply effects to clips on the timeline of a project Just double click the clip to open the appropriate media editor with its Effects tab already open Effect compositions Achieving a desired look behavior or sound can take a combination of several effects applied in a particular order Both video and audio 154 Pinnacle Studio User Guide effects may be needed For each effect parameters must be adjusted to get the results you are looking for Once you have found the right combination the set of effects can be saved as a special type of asset an effect composition With effect compositions even complex manipulations of your media can be readily achieved Effect compositions can be created in the media editor using the save button at the top of the Effects setting panel or on the timeline using the Effect gt Save As FX Composition context menu comm
29. keys General shortcuts Ctrl 1 Open Main Library tab Ctrl 2 Open Movie tab Ctrl 3 Open Disc tab Ctrl 4 Close focused window Ctrl 5 Open Title Editor from Movie Editor Ctrl 6 Open Exporter Ctrl Open Importer Ctrl S Save project title or menu Alt F4 Close application Shift F10 Access context menu Ctrl Z Undo Ctrl Y Redo Ctrl A Select all Shift Ctrl A Deselect all Appendix D Keyboard shortcuts 427 General shortcuts Ctrl C Copy to clipboard Ctrl V Paste from clipboard Ctrl X Cut to clipboard End Go to end Home Go to beginning Alt Enter Play using full screen Esc Exit full screen viewing or close panel Delete Delete without copying to clipboard Double click Open appropriate editor Media Titler Project Montage etc F1 Open context sensitive help Library Ctrl N New collection Alt Click Play in thumbnail Numbers 1 5 Rate selected clip s Number 0 Remove rating from selected clip s Page Up Scroll up a page Page Down Scroll down a page Right Expand folder in tree Left Collapse folder in tree Arrow keys Navigate up down left right Delete Delete selected clip and or media F7 Show hide tagging interface 428 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Playing and transport Spacebar Play and pause Shift Spacebar Loop playback Alt Enter Pl
30. on page 251 for details The overall interface for audio effects is exactly the same as that for video effects The common features are not covered here See Chapter 5 Effects on page 153 A few audio effects such as the Equalizer and the De esser double as correction tools These are covered under Audio corrections on page 243 Let s now take a look at the other audio effects Channel tool The basic action of this effect is to route your stereo audio signal It allows you to connect either or both of the left and right input channels to either or both of the output channels In addition channel tool offers special purpose presets including phase reverse and voice removal the karaoke effect Chorus The Chorus effect creates a richer sound by repeatedly reintroducing echoes into the audio stream By controlling properties such as the frequency with which the echoes recur and the decay in Chapter 8 Sound and music 249 volume from one repetition to the next a variety of results is possible including flanger like sounds and other special effects Grungelizer The Grungelizer adds noise and static to your recordings It can make your clips sound as though you were hearing them on a radio with bad reception or a worn and scratched vinyl record Leveler This effect helps compensate for a common problem in recording audio for video productions the imbalance in the recorded volume of different elements in the original
31. progressive with the letter p and interlaced with the letter i HDV A format for the recording and playback of high definition video on a DV cassette tape has been established as the HDV format Instead of the DV codec HDV uses a flavor of MPEG 2 There are two varieties of HDV HDV1 and HDV2 HDV1 is 1280x720 resolution with progressive frames 720p The MPEG transport stream is 19 7 Mbps s HDV2 is 1440x1080 resolution with interlaced frames 10801 The MPEG transport stream is 25 Mbps s Hi8 Improved version of Video8 using S Video recorded on metal particle or metal evaporated tape Because of higher luminance resolution and wider bandwidth the result is sharper pictures than Videos HiColor For images this normally means a 16 bit 5 6 5 data type that can contain up to 65 536 colors TGA file formats support images of this type Other file formats require prior conversion of a HiColor image into TrueColor For displays HiColor normally refers to 15 bit 5 5 5 display adapters that can display up to 32 768 colors See Bit Huffman coding Technique used in JPEG and other data compression methods in which seldom occurring values receive a long code while frequently occurring values receive a short code 418 Pinnacle Studio User Guide IDE Integrated Device Electronics a hard drive interface that combines all drive control electronics on the drive itself rather than on the adapter connecting the driv
32. tape events from more than one camera angle first the clown in the circus ring but then also the laughing spectator from the clown s point of view Interesting events can also take place behind the protagonists or the protagonists may be seen in a reverse angle This can be helpful later when trying to establish a sense of balance in the movie Close ups Don t be stingy with close ups of important things or persons Close ups usually look better and more interesting than long shots do on a television screen and they work well in post production effects Long shots Semi long shots Long shots provide the viewer with an overview and establish the scene of the action However these shots can also be used to tighten longer scenes When you cut from a close up to a long shot the viewer no longer sees the details and it is thus easier to make a chronological jump Showing a spectator in a semi long shot can also provide visual relief from the main action and the opportunity of a transition away from the action if desired Complete actions Always shoot complete actions with a beginning and an end This makes editing easier Transitions Cinematic timing requires some practice It is not always possible to film long events in their entirety and in movies they often have to be represented in severely abbreviated form Nonetheless the plot should Appendix B Videography 403 remain logical and cuts should almost never call attenti
33. Chapter Track This unlinked chapter can be manually linked by drag and drop to another button on the Menu Preview or it may remain as an unlinked chapter in which case during playback it will work to jump through your disc using the jump button on your remote control You may also right click on one or more chapter markers and choose Remove Selected Link Button cycle By clicking on the left and right arrows 4 jay Movic ld of this control you can scroll through available buttons and make them active for editing Click on the button caption to edit it Buttons also may be selected by clicking the button links in the Player when a menu is previewed Set thumbnail Clicking this button generates a thumbnail image El of the frame at the timeline scrubber position and displays it on the menu button selected in the button cycle control if it is of the Thumbnail type For more information about menu button types please see Menu buttons on page 285 Chapter 9 Disc projects 279 Create unlinked chapter Unless the timeline scrubber is exactly L positioned at a chapter or return marker clicking this button will add a chapter marker to the Chapter Track but will not link it to any menu An unlinked chapter can also be created by double clicking in the Chapter Track area just above the other timeline tracks The unlinked chapter can later be manually linked by drag and drop to a button on the Menu Preview if that s what you want How
34. Some of these are included in the product itself A few of the third party content packages require a paid upgrade to work with 382 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Pinnacle Studio For some others no compatible version has been released Content support chart Pinnacle Studio content Support HFX Plus Pro Mega Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio RTFX 1 Supported RTFX 2 Supported Hollywood FX Volume 1 Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio Hollywood FX Volume 2 Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio Hollywood FX Volume 3 Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio Premium Pack Volume 1 Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio Premium Pack Volume 2 Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio Creative Pack Volume 1 Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio Creative Pack Volume 2 Supported Creative Pack Volume 3 Supported NewBlue Film Effects Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio NewBlue Stabilizer Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio NewBlue Video Essentials II Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio Appendix A Troublehooting 383 NewBlue Video Essentials VI Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio NewBlue Video Essentials VII Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio Winter Pack Supported ScoreFitter Volume 1 Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio ScoreFitte
35. The Importer 317 Check all Uncheck all 14 Use the Check All button to mark all asset files in the current folder Each time a file is added to or removed from the list of those to be imported the file browser updates the count in the selection status indicator at the bottom right of the display Customizing the browser Several controls allow you to configure the file browser appropriately for your display hardware and requirements Close the folder tree To maximize the space for viewing files click the left pointing double arrow icon at the top of the folder tree scroll bar This collapses the folder tree to a vertical bar down the left hand side At the top of the bar is the right pointing double arrow that will reopen the tree The name of the current folder is also shown Filter the file list Another way to optimize your use of the file area is to limit the files shown to include only one asset type This is the function of the asset filter dropdown at the bottom left of the browser By default all supported media file and project file types appear in the browser but you can limit the view to picture files audio files video files or project files by your selection here To see exactly which file types are included in a selection hover on the item for a second or two to pop up the list 318 Pinnacle Studio User Guide All compatible media files All compatible media files Picture files Audio files h
36. Training is in English only Tool tips To find out what a button or other Studio control does pause your mouse pointer over it A tool tip pops up to explain the control s function Finding your version information Whether you are considering upgrading your software or looking for support it s good to know your version information To check the version of Pinnacle Studio that you have click the Help button gt About Upgrading There are different versions of Pinnacle Studio and features vary depending on the version you have For more information please visit www pinnaclesys com and click Compare For information about upgrading your software click the Help button gt Online Offers amp News gt Software Offers 4 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Chapter 1 Using Pinnacle Studio For a simple outline of the digital movie making process you don t have to look any further than the central tab group of Pinnacle Studio s main window The same steps apply to any type of production from an unpretentious slideshow with dissolves between each frame to a 3D extravaganza containing hundreds of carefully arranged clips and effects Organize Author Import Export Pinnacle Studio s main control bar summarizes the movie making process The Importer Import on the right is a preparatory step It involves procedures like capturing video from your analog or DV camcorder bringing in photos from a digital camera
37. Video for Windows format specified by Microsoft for encoding video sequences JPEG compression is used to compress each frame individually MPA File extension for an MPEG file that contains audio data only M1V MPEG MPG MPEG Motion Picture Experts Group and the standard developed by them for the compression of moving images Compared to M JPEG it offers 75 80 data reduction with the same visual quality MPG File extension for an MPEG file that contains both video and audio data MPV File extension for an MPEG file that contains video data only Non interlaced Describes an image refresh method in which the complete image is generated as a single field without skipping lines A non interlaced image most computer monitors flickers much less than an interlaced image most TVs NTSC National Television Standards Committee and the color TV standard created by them in 1953 NTSC video has 525 lines per frame and 60 image fields per second It is used in North and Central America Japan and other countries See PAL SECAM PAL Phase Alternation Line a color TV standard developed in Germany and used throughout most of Europe PAL video has 625 lines per frame and 50 image fields per second See V7SC SECAM Parallel port Parallel port data is transmitted via an 8 bit data line This means that eight bits one byte can be transmitted at once This kind Appendix C Glossary 421 of transmission is much faster tha
38. are Rating Stereoscopic Information Correction Collection Tag Used Media Caption and Shortcut At the bottom center of most asset icons a preview button a standard triangular play icon enclosed in a square is displayed when the mouse pointer is over the asset In the compact version of the Library as seen in the project editors and some media editors the preview is shown on the Source tab of the embedded Player In the Main Library Chapter 2 The Library 35 the Player occupies a floating resizable window See The Library preview on page 41 for more information In either version of the Library Alt clicking the preview button will give you a mini preview on the asset icon Itself With video and audio media you can control the mini preview manually by means of a scrubber that appears below the thumbnail whenever the mouse is over the icon If the asset is a photo a pop up preview button replaces the standard play symbol Clicking it will display the photo in the pop up Player When the Browser is in thumbnails view a slider is available to control the size of the icons You will find the slider in the bottom right corner of the Library The icons can also be resized with the scroll wheel when Ctrl is pressed and the mouse pointer is positioned over the Browser pane Locked content indicator Some of the Disc Menus Titles Montages and other creative elements in the Library are locked to indicate that y
39. area of the Layer List Selecting layers Clicking a header in the Layer List has the same effect as selecting the ayer in the Edit Window and vice versa The layer name highlights and the layer s control frame appears Multiple selection is also allowed using the standard Windows mouse and keyboard combinations Shift click extend selection Ctrl click toggle selection of one item and Shift Ctrl click extend selection from last item clicked See Working with layer groups on page 230 for information on how to use multiple selections Layer names and renaming When you create a new layer the Title Editor gives it a default name based on the resource name or file name Since the default names are often not very descriptive of the layer contents it may be helpful in a title with a number of layers to give them custom names that make it easier to tell at a glance which name goes with which layer Chapter 7 The Title Editor 225 The name of a new text layer is the same as its default text Your text here Unless you give the layer a custom name its default name will continue to match whatever text you type into the layer Once you do rename a text layer further changes to the text are no longer reflected in the layer name The default behavior can be restored by setting a blank name however To rename the primary layer click its name An edit field opens with the existing name selected Type the new name then press En
40. audio For instance your commentary as you shoot the video may be recorded at such a high level that it overwhelms other sounds at the location The trick in using the Leveler is to find a target volume somewhere between that of the loud and soft audio in the original clip Below that volume Leveler increases the original level by a fixed ratio Above the target volume Leveler acts as a compressor reducing the original level With careful adjustment of the parameters the internal balance of the audio can be significantly improved Reverb The Reverb effect simulates the effect of playing back the source sound in a room of a given size and sound reflectivity The interval between the arrival of the original sound at the listener s ears and the first echoes is greater for a large room than a small one The rate at which the echoes die away depends on both the room size and the reflectivity of the walls The presets for Reverb are named for the type of room they simulate from the passenger cabin of a car all the way up to a huge underground cavern Stereo echo This effect allows you to set separate delays on each of the left and right channels with feedback and balance controls to provide a variety of interesting sounds 250 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Stereo spread This effect allows you to decrease or increase the apparent width of the stereo listening field in an audio clip Most often it is used to create a mix that sounds mo
41. barking dogs or cars passing by The five main speakers are represented by icons in the work area The sixth the LFE low frequency effects speaker is too low pitched to provide positional cues Its level in the surround mix is controlled by a slider beneath the work area Center channel off is the preferred setting for an immersive music track Dialog mode combines the center speaker with the two at the rear This combination is suitable for dialog involving multiple speakers Work area The main body of the Panner window schematically depicts a listening area with a typical arrangement of loudspeakers The cross icon in the center of the area indicates the position of the listener A blue control point sets the position of the sound source The speaker symbols at the edge of the work area show your typical surround 5 1 speaker arrangement with the screen at the top If you want to control the sound source position in one dimension horizontal or vertical use the slider at the bottom or right of the work area respectively LFE channel Surround supports a special subwoofer channel the 1 in 5 1 that allows you to boost or cut the lowest frequencies for special effects Control the LFE enhancement with the slider under the work area Since the ear is unable to pinpoint the location of these low frequency sounds the LFE is not assigned to a spatial position Keyframe buttons The keyframe buttons at the bottom of the pan
42. buttons that control your screen capture 3 Capture area frame Specifies the active program to capture and the dimensions exact dimensions of the area to capture in the Width and Height boxes 4 Settings default view Lets you specify file audio display and keyboard shortcut settings Recording your screen Before taking the actual screen capture make sure to configure the settings of the video first To configure your video 1 Click Settings 2 In File Settings specify the following details 378 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Filename Enter a filename for your project Save to Lets you specify the location where you want to save the video file Note Screen captures are saved to your Documents folder Documents Pinnacle Studio Screen Capture 18 0 by default Click J to add a new folder and change the location where the file is saved Format Choose an option from the available formats in the drop list Frame rate Lets you specify the number of frames to be used when recording Note Using a lower frame rate is ideal for uploading videos to the Internet as it yields a smaller file size but with less accuracy on screen dynamics A higher frame rate produces a larger file size and is most useful for detailed presentations to capture actual screen dynamics 3 In Audio Settings gt Voice do one of the following Click Enable voice recording EN to record a voice over Click the Sou
43. chapter begins With the Link chapters to menu buttons option see below each chapter will be represented by one chapter button on a series of automatically generated menu pages these pages are linked into a series by next and previous buttons By activating chapter buttons when the menu is viewed the viewer is able to play the movie from any of the provided starting points M Place Chapters at Optimal positions with an average length of 00 00 10 00 HH MM SS FF Timeline markers Apply to Whole Movie Selection Linking Link chapters io menu buttons Retum after every chapter The Chapter Wizard is great for setting up slide shows and scene selection menus If you are archiving video to disc you can use it generate a menu that will serve as a scene catalog The series of menu 282 Pinnacle Studio User Guide pages created can be arbitrarily long Its length depends on how many chapters are created and on how many chapter buttons are provided in the menu s page design Incidentally the Chapter Wizard does nothing that you could not do yourself using the available disc authoring tools within the Disc Editor and they remain available for tweaking the generated menu afterwards Its purpose is to speed your creative process by taking over much of the routine work that setting up a multipage menu entails Using the Chapter Wizard The Chapter Wizard controls are grouped into three horizontal panels When
44. check the White Balance box a color temperature setting for the image is computed and the Temperature bias slider is displayed Use the slider to customize the setting interactively as you preview Levels Checking this box activates an automatic illumination adjustment and opens a set of three controls The first is Optimization a dropdown list that lets you set the overall behavior of the tool by choosing either Contrast optimization of contrast only or Full general lighting optimization 138 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The Brightness and Vibrance sliders can take on values ranging from 10 to 10 A zero setting represents no change to the automatically chosen value Brightness provides a general boost or cut in brightness that is applied equally across the whole image Vibrance which is designed primarily for use with images of people is similar to a saturation control but minimizes the unnatural appearance characteristic of oversaturated skin tones Fundamentals This group of controls allows you to adjust the general lighting properties of your image Brightness This control provides an overall brightness adjustment that impacts the light and dark areas of the image equally For finer control in brightness editing use the Selective Brightness tool instead see below Contrast This control increases the difference between the light and dark areas of an image Boosting the contrast may enliven a dull ph
45. connection Analog video cameras and recorders DVD and Blu ray discs Digital still cameras Appendix E The installation manager 439 440 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Pinnacle Studio 18 User Guide Copyright 2014 Corel Corporation All rights reserved Product specifications pricing packaging technical support and information specifications refer to the retail English version only The specifications for all other versions including other language versions may vary Corel patent information www corel com patent INFORMATION IS PROVIDED BY COREL ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT ANY OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABLE QUALITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR THOSE ARISING BY LAW STATUTE USAGE OF TRADE COURSE OF DEALING OR OTHERWISE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS OF THE INFORMATION PROVIDED OR ITS USE IS ASSUMED BY YOU COREL SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFIT LOST OR DAMAGED DATA OR OTHER COMMERCIAL OR ECONOMIC LOSS EVEN IF COREL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR THEY ARE FORESEEABLE COREL IS ALSO NOT LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIMS MADE BY ANY THIRD PARTY COREL S MAXIMUM AGGREGATE LIABILITY TO YOU SHALL NOT EXCEED THE C
46. filtering types switched on when you don t need it it s likely that some assets will be hidden that should be displayed When an item is unexpectedly missing in the Browser verify that filters are inactive The Browser guards against the possibility of inadvertent filtering by displaying a filter alert that remains visible as long as any filter is in use Chapter 2 The Library 49 Rating titer 2D qs Rating amp Tags sky dawn match any of lake loch Ix A filter alert like the one shown here is displayed at the top of the Browser whenever filtering is in force Click the x icon at the right hand end to clear all filtering at once Tags The Library is capable of handling a great number of asset files sometimes far more in even a single folder than can be viewed conveniently The Browser therefore provides a number of methods of winnowing out irrelevant assets from the display One method of streamlining the display of assets in the Browser is filtering by tags A tag is simply a word or short phrase that you think would be useful as a search term It is up to you whether you assign tags to your media but if you do they provide a powerful way of selecting assets to display Tag management and filtering Management of tags and filtering by tags are handled in a panel that appears when the Tags button at the top of the Library is clicked The panel can also be invoked by choosing Apply tag gt Create new t
47. for opening Windows Media Player and the QuickTime Player To view your output file as soon as you have created it click the icon representing the player of your choice Export finished Open file in player oie Ready for viewing 3GP Pinnacle Studio can generate movies in this widely used file format using your choice of MPEG 4 or H 263 video compression along with AMR audio compression The format is adapted to the comparatively modest processing and storage capabilities of mobile phones Chapter 11 The Exporter 347 Settings Type Preset 3GPP Very Small H263 Video Very Small H263 Video Very Small MPEG 4 Video Small H263 Video x Small MPEG 4 Video Custom The list of presets for this file type offers two frame sizes in either encoder Choose Small at 176x144 or Very Small at 128x96 Audio only Sometimes a movie s soundtrack can stand alone without visuals Live entertainment footage and video recordings of interviews and speeches are instances in which an audio only version might be desirable Pinnacle Studio lets you save your soundtrack in wav PCM mp3 or mp2 format 348 Settings Type Preset Audio WAV PCM Stereo 44kHz WAV PCM Stereo 44kHz WAV PCM Stereo 48kHz MP3 3000 Quality MP3 Best Quality K Custom Pinnacle Studio User Guide Click the preset that best meets your needs or choose Custom then click the Advanced button to open the Advance
48. forward into any future project that includes it See Correcting media files on page 19 for more information Details In details view each asset is presented as one line in a list of text records In thumbnails view it appears as a thumbnail image for visual media types or graphic icon To switch the Browser to details view click the icon on the details view button at the bottom of the Library The arrow beside the button pops up a panel listing the optional columns available to be included in the text records one column Caption is always present Check the 34 Pinnacle Studio User Guide boxes beside any of these File size File type Date Tags Rating and Duration you wish to be shown Animals Koalas jpg mammal e ese Shoebill bird Li s j Zorse mammal Garden Scenery Daybreak dawn sky Distant hills jpg In Details view each asset is displayed as a one line text record A pop up checklist beside the Details view button lets you select which columns to show In the illustration animals and scenery are the names of folders in the All Media branch of the Library Thumbnails The thumbnails view button eed to the left of the details view button selects thumbnails view in which assets are represented in the Browser by icons rather than text The arrow alongside the button opens a pop up checklist on which you can choose additional data to be shown with each icon The options
49. from all tracks as currently mixed The expand icon to the right of the indicator opens a small floating window with separate level indicators for each output channel and a master gain control to trim the output level up or down uniformly Master Volume ch ANTrack 1 D Click the icon next to the master playback level indicator to open the Master Volume panel where you can apply an overall volume gain to the composite audio output of your project Audio mixer The audio mixer panel pops out to the right of the track headers when you click its access button in the timeline toolbar For each timeline track the panel provides two fader knobs Track level The left knob sets the output level of the track as a whole Its numeric value is shown in a small pop up window when the mouse pointer is over the knob The default value of OdB which you can restore with a double click on the knob means that no overall change is applied to the original volume of the clips on the track Clicking on the small window opens an edit field where you can enter the desired 252 Pinnacle Studio User Guide level You can also set it by dragging horizontally within the small window Clip level The other knob sets the level of the current clip at the scrubber position If no clip is currently selected on the track this second knob is unavailable The volume contour of a clip can be controlled with keyframes as discussed immediately below When k
50. layers some of the layer content may appear outside the control frame This occurs if one of the details within the Look is defined with a horizontal or vertical offset that moves the detail away from the nominal location of the layer See page 163 for more information Layer operations in the Edit Window The operations described here are for a single layer but can be extended to work with multiple layers simultaneously See Working with layer groups on page 230 for more information 214 Pinnacle Studio User Guide To select a layer in the Edit Window click in the layer rectangle with the mouse This causes the layer s control frame to appear ready for editing Layers respond to mouse clicks anywhere within their containing rectangle the rectangle shown by their control frame when selected This means that you may not be able to manipulate a layer that is visible only because it lies beneath a transparent area within the rectangle of another layer To perform any editing with the mouse in such cases you should first hide the upper layer s as described under The Layer List See page 181 for details To move any non text layer click down anywhere within its rectangle and drag to the new position To move a text layer position the mouse near the edge of the layer s control frame until you see the drag pointer four way arrows appear then click and drag normally Clicking inside the frame as you would do a
51. list The right hand end of the effect header has four buttons for operations related to that effect From left to right they are Diamond Toggle keyframing for parameters of the effect See Working with keyframes on page 164 Expand All Settings All the groups of settings for the effect can be expanded for editing or closed with one click Trashcan Remove the effect from the clip Dot Toggle the effect on and off You can switch the effect off for comparison purposes without deleting it and losing your settings Drag handle Use either this zone or the name area for dragging the effect up or down in the effect list when the clip uses multiple effects As mentioned above effects are applied in bottom up order In some cases changing the order can dramatically affect the cumulative result 162 Pinnacle Studio User Guide PENGUINSJPG Select preset No Preset v No Preset Default Top Left Comer Bottom Left Corner Bottom Right Corner Half Size Centered Half Size Bordered The Settings panel Here three effects Water drop 2D Editor Advanced White Balance have been applied to the current clip A preset for the 2D Editor Advanced effect is being selected highlighted box Modifying parameters Parameters are organized into named groups of related controls Click the expand collapse triangle on the group header to open the group and access its parameters or close it and conserve screen space The currently sel
52. motion however In such exacting cases you might consider supplementing or replacing the clip or prolonging it with the Speed function See Speed on page 113 Trimming Changing the length of clips or gaps on the timeline is called trimming Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 99 Multitrack trimming is a valuable editing skill By trimming multiple tracks at once you can assure that the clips coming later on the timeline maintain their relative synchronization Trimming clips without consideration for content later on the timeline can disrupt the synchronization of your project Soundtracks that don t match the action and badly timed titles are the kinds of problem that may result x AN Track 3 Te 00 00 10 17 31 00 00 10 00 Multiple track trimming A rule for staying in sync Pinnacle Studio has powerful trimming tools to allow you to perform multitrack trimming without risk Fortunately there is a simple rule for safeguarding synchronization even on a complex timeline open exactly one trim point on every track Whether the trim point is attached to a clip or a gap and at which end are up to you 100 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Opening trim points To open a trim point on the active timeline track position the timeline scrubber near the cut you want to trim then click the trim mode button on the timeline toolbar To open one trim point on each non empty track simultaneously Shift click the tr
53. or built in media storage 342 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Settings Type AVCHD2 Preset Fitto disc S3D MultiStream Advanced Exporting a multistream project Outputting your movie Studio creates your disc or disc image in three steps 1 First the entire movie must be rendered to generate the MPEG encoded information to store on the disc Next the disc must be compiled In this phase Studio creates the actual files and directory structure that will be used on the disc Finally the disc must be burned This step is skipped if you are generating a disc image rather than an actual disc To output your movie to disc or to a disc image 1 Click the Disc tab to bring up this display Target Size 47GB DVD 1 MB Quatity 100 D HL DT STDVDRAM GHMN The circular display summarizes your disc usage It also shows an estimate of the time the movie will occupy on your writable disc Use the folder button to change the hard drive location Studio uses for storing auxiliary files If you create a disc image it too will Chapter 11 The Exporter 343 4 5 be stored in that folder The dropdown list on the lower display specifies the disc burner to use if more than one is available On the Settings panel select the disc Type you are using then whichever video quality and disc usage Preset best matches your intent Settings Type AVCHD Preset Fit to disc 53D Fit to dis Best qu
54. parts a stem which you supply and a tail which is generated by one of three simple rules at the time of import Filename Parade number ext The default rule adds a unique sequence number to every filename While you are entering your custom name the edit box shows only the stem But when the name is displayed at other times the rule for the tail part of appears as well To select a different rule for the tail part click the more button This opens a dialog window with two dropdown lists The first lets you choose between original and custom for the stem You can use this if you ever want to revert to importing files under their original names The second dropdown which is displayed only for custom names gives the available rules for generating the tail part Number This is the same rule used by other media types to avoid name collisions If your stem is Parade the first file copied will be named Parade plus the original file extension the second will be named Parade 001 and the numbers then continue in sequence Creation time The time of day when the file was created in hours minutes and seconds is used to generate file names like Parade 20 30 00 for a file that was created at exactly 8 30 in the evening Time of day This is like the previous option but the time of importing the file is used Chapter 10 The Importer 311 v number number ex number creation time
55. right corner of the Settings panel Enter a name for your Composition in the dialog box that appears and clear the checkmark for any effect you don t want included See The Settings panel on page 161 for further information Switching to a new clip Even without leaving a media editor you can switch from one timeline clip to another by means of the Navigator a schematic representation of your project that is optionally shown in the space just above the footer bar of the editor window To toggle the visibility of the Navigator click the compass rose icon at the bottom right of the window Chapter 5 Effects 157 Each clip in your project is represented in the Navigator by a colored bar The layout of the bars on a horizontal time axis with vertically arranged tracks exactly matches the timeline The bar representing the clip now being edited is highlighted in orange Here the mouse pointer is poised over the compass rose button to turn off the Navigator panel immediately above where project clips are represented by horizontal bars If you click on one of the other bars any changes you ve made to the current clip will be automatically saved the clip corresponding to the bar you clicked on will then be loaded If the new clip is of a different media type the appropriate editor will switch in automatically Solo mode Sometimes while editing an effect it is useful to see the other timeline layers those above and below th
56. s ediscere Reem ey we Ree RE EUR EE 432 Title EdlitOE 45 85 eo tate tret pct p She hace a andl t 432 Appendix E The installation manager 433 Before you begins aac AR APTE RE RENS NER S 433 Upgrade Installation 2 0 sese 434 Launching the Installation Manager o n sasaaa aaaea 434 Registratioh 54 zs se LS Nette de Pa are d E 434 Supporting installations llis 435 The Welcome Screen noaua eee ee 435 COMMON controls s gol Ata tad ette tob nha dre ran 436 Installing plugs ins and bonus content 00 437 System requirements dogurdan a eA eea E i a a ii 437 Contents vii viii Pinnacle Studio Before you start Thank you for purchasing Pinnacle Studio We hope you enjoy using the software If you have not used Pinnacle Studio before we recommend that you keep the user guide handy for reference even if you don t actually read it all the way through In order to ensure that your movie making experience gets off on the right foot please review the topics Note Not all features described in the user guide are included in all versions of Pinnacle Studio For more information please visit www pinnaclesys com and click Compare Abbreviations and conventions This guide uses the following conventions to help organize the material Common terms AVCHD A video data format used by some high definition camcorders and for creating DVD discs that can be read on Blu ray players Succe
57. settings By default your timeline settings are copied from the first video clip you add to the timeline If that will give the right result you won t have to alter them If you do need to change these basic image properties of your project click the Gear button E to open the timeline settings panel and configure the four settings provided Aspect Choose between a 4x3 and a 16x9 display 78 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Imaging Choose between Regular 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Size Choose amongst the HD and SD pixel resolutions available for the given aspect ratio Frame rate Choose from a selection of frame rates consistent with the other settings These settings can be changed at any time during the development of your movie but you should be aware that a change of the frame rate can cause a slight shifting of clips on the timeline as they adjust to new frame boundaries Aspect Widescreen 16 9 Imaging Stereoscopic 3D Size HD 1440x1080 Framerate 30 60i Apply Timeline settings Video material that is not in compliance with the chosen project settings will be converted automatically on being added to the timeline If you are making a stereoscopic movie 2D material may be used but it will still look two dimensional as both the right eye and left eye views will be the same 3D material can be used on a 2D timeline but only the left eye channel will be shown If you want to choose a video standard for you
58. special transition technique to achieve maximum fluidity of movement from frame to frame Audio Hold pitch This option maintains the original pitch of the recorded audio even when it is played back accelerated or slowed The function becomes less effective the more the speed is changed Beyond certain limits it is switched off completely Movies within movies All the movie projects that you create in Pinnacle Studio appear as assets in the Projects branch of the Library But the purpose of Library Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 115 assets is to serve as the ingredients of movies What will happen if you try to drag Movie Project A onto the timeline of Movie Project B The answer is simple enough As with most types of assets Project A becomes a single clip on Project B s timeline From the standpoint of timeline editing it behaves just like any of your other video assets You can trim it move it around apply effects and transitions and so on The same is not true of disc projects These cannot be used as clips in another project Nevertheless a copy of the internal structure of Project A remains intact inside this container clip along with all of the project s clips effects titles and other components What s more if you double click the container clip or select Edit movie from its context menu a subsidiary Movie Editor opens in a new window to let you work on the sub movie Any modifications you make affect only the co
59. ten letters Allow an additional second of on screen time for every five additional letters Found titles Besides postproduction titles natural titles like directional signs street signs or title pages of local newspapers also create interesting possibilities 410 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Appendix C Glossary Multimedia terminology contains computer and video terminology The most important terms are defined below 720p A high definition HD video format with a resolution of 1280x720 and progressive non interlaced frames 1081i A high definition HD video format with a resolution of 1440x1080 and interlaced frames ActiveMovie Software interface by Microsoft for the control of multimedia devices under Windows See DirectShow DirectMedlia ADPCM Acronym for Adaptive Delta Pulse Code Modulation a method of storing audio information in a digital format This is the audio encoding and compression method used in CD I and CD ROM production Address All available saving positions in a computer are numbered addressed By means of these addresses each saving position can be occupied Some addresses are reserved for the exclusive use of particular hardware components If two components are using the same address this is called an address conflict Aliasing An inaccurate display of an image due to the limitations of the output device Typically aliasing appears in the form of jagged edges along cu
60. the knowledge base e If the video on your disc plays back but the sound does not read document 222577 Discs burned with Studio have no sound e If only a portion of your disc project appears on the DVD or if recent changes are missing try document 219785 DVD created with Studio is missing part of the project If your DVD does not play back or appears blank 1 Check the disc for cleanliness Ensure that there are no obvious smudges or scratches on the disc surface If the disc is dirty clean it with a soft cloth don t use a paper towel by wiping the DVD radially from the center to the outside edge not in a circular motion 2 Insert the disc into a DVD drive on the computer and verify that it contains file system folders Double click My Computer or This PC Right click the DVD drive and choose Explore 398 Pinnacle Studio User Guide There should be two folders on the DVD named audio_ts and video_ts The audio ts folder should be empty while video ts should contain files with bup ifo and vob extensions If the files are present the issue definitely relates to playback as such rather than the burning of the disc Conversely if the disc is in fact blank you are looking at a burn problem rather than a playback problem In that case follow the instructions in document 214533 Studio burn problems 3 If the disc fails in your set top DVD player try playing it back on the computer The disc should
61. the Layer List too a temporary group the e at once e a temporary group then bar or use the Group command from any member s Grouping context submenu Once created the group stays together unti you explicitly disband it with the ungroup button or menu command or by dragging the member layers out of the group in the Laye r List One further command regroup automatically reconstitutes the last group to have been ungrouped When a permanent group is selected it has a shared control frame that encloses all its members The control frames are not visible of the individual members Permanent groups have their own header entries and timeline track in the Layer List The group header can be expanded or collapsed to reveal or hide the headers for the member layers When the group is open its member layers are indented with respect to the group header Chapter 7 The Title Editor 231 An ordinary layer and a group with three member layers in the Layer List The timeline graphics show that Motions have been applied to the group itself and to one of its members The mouse pointer is positioned to collapse the group which would hide the names of the member layers Temporary groups and permanent groups respond differently to many commands as detailed below Note Even when a layer belongs to a permanent group it can still be individually selected either in the Edit Window unless the group itself is cur
62. the Storyboard and use the mouse wheel to scroll or use the arrows at each end of the Storyboard Editing with the Storyboard Although most editing takes place on the timeline tracks the Storyboard has some editing capability For instance effects can be added directly to a clip on the Storyboard by dragging and dropping Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 75 the effect onto the clip The clip s context menu offers the same set of commands here as on the timeline Any editing that takes place on the Storyboard is immediately reflected in the timeline and vice versa Adding clips Any photo video audio clip project Montage or title can be added to your project by simply dragging it from the Library to the Storyboard An insertion line appears to indicate where the new clip will be placed You can select multiple clips to add them all at once Inserting or replacing clips If you are inserting material between clips already on the Storyboard drag the new clip so that it overlaps the right side of the clip that will precede it When the insertion line appears and a space opens up drop the new clip into the gap To replace a clip drag the new one onto the clip to be replaced The insertion line will appear and the old clip will highlight to indicate proper placement The new clip must be the same type as the old A video clip cannot be replaced by a photo or audio clip for example Selecting clips To select a clip click on its icon
63. the folder Chapter 10 The Importer 301 Setting a subfolder To designate a subfolder of the base folder as the actual import destination for the asset type click either the set subfolder button or the more button 1E These buttons open a dialog window that represents an expanded version of the Import To panel one that includes controls needed to set the subfolder name or the naming method for each asset type supported by the currently selected import source Subfolder no subfolder Subfolder no subfolder Photo Subfolder CAUser My S no subfolder Project i Subfolder C User no subfolder The expanded Import To dialog window for file based assets Since files can be of any asset type controls for all four types are provided Most other sources import only video media and don t show the Audio Photo and Project controls The row of controls for each asset type includes a dropdown list of naming options No subfolder With this option the files you import will be stored in the base folder 302 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Custom When you choose this option an in place edit box appears Enter the name of the subfolder in which to store your next import or imports of the asset type Today Your imports will go to a subfolder named with the current date in the format 2012 10 25 Creation date Each imported file will be stored in a subfolder named with the creation date of the asset in the same format as abo
64. the item or items from the Collection As usual with the Library the underlying media items involved are not affected so removing a video or other item from a Collection in the Library does not delete it from other Chapter 2 The Library 29 Library locations Managing Library assets Media and other assets find their way into the Library in several ways For instance the original contents of the Creative Elements branch of the Library are installed with Pinnacle Studio The Library automatically discovers some assets on your system by regularly scanning Windows standard media locations These are set up on Pinnacle Studio installation as watchfolders Media files in these locations will automatically be brought into the Library You can add your own watchfolders see below and they will be automatically updated too Finally you can import media manually by any of several methods Watchfolders Watchfolders are directories on your computer that Pinnacle Studio monitors If you add media files such as video clips to a watchfolder or one of its subfolders they automatically become part of the Library Updating occurs each time the application is launched and while the application is running Watchfolders are set up on the Watchfolders page of the Setup control panel For each folder that you add you can specify that either one particular supported media type will be watched for or all of them Please see Chapter 12 Se
65. the layer has an emphasis Motion it occupies whatever unused duration remains up to the whole length of the title Three layers with Motions The top layer has only an Emphasis Motion solid line which therefore uses the full duration The bottom layer has Enter and Exit Motions and a static interval between them The center layer has Motions of all three types The Enter Motion is being trimmed note the horizontal arrow cursor as its length changes the Emphasis Motion self adjusts to consume fully any unused time To replace one of the Motions used by a layer simply add the new Motion as usual an existing one of the same type will be overwritten To delete a Motion without replacing it select the layer and click the small x in the center of the Motion s timeline graph Working with layer groups The Title Editor Layer List allows you to group layers on either a temporary or a permanent basis To create a temporary group you will use standard multiple selection techniques whether in the Edit Window or on the Layer List You can then make changes such as applying a Look to all the members of the group simultaneously The group remains whole only until you click another layer or an empty area of the Edit Window whereupon the 230 Pinnacle Studio User Guide layers resume their individual existences In control frames of each member are all visib To create a permanent group you first creat click the group button on
66. time of day The Import Filename configuration window Selecting assets for import Each source supported by the Importer has its own appropriate set of controls for selecting the material to be imported When you click the source name in the Import From panel the central area of the Importer configures itself appropriately with the controls you need Import from file There are two methods for importing media files and project files from file based storage media including local hard drives optical drives memory cards and USB sticks Select My computer in the Import From panel of the Importer to select specific asset files or groups of files for import 312 Pinnacle Studio User Guide When importing trom file based assets the Importer provides a folder and file browser in the central area This is flanked on the left by the Import From and Import To panels and on the right by the Mode Metadata and Filename panels The Start Import button at bottom sets things in motion after the desired asset files have been selected Select Scan For Assets in the Import From panel to select one or more folders and import all assets of the desired types that are found in those folders Selecting files for Import When you select My computer in the Import From panel the job of selecting the files to import belongs to the folder and asset file browser in the central area of the display A single import operation can take in multip
67. to mark or unmark the file Marking multiple files The browser also provides a method of checking or unchecking a group of highlighted files simultaneously To highlight an individual file simply click on its name or its icon the highlighted state is indicated by an orange border To highlight additional files click icons in conjunction with either of the Shift and Ctrl keys as follows 316 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Click while pressing Ctrl to add or remove the highlighting from one file without affecting the others in the group Click while pressing Shift highlights the clicked icon and all those between it and the previously clicked icon inclusive Highlighting is removed from any icons not within the range A group of four highlighted image file icons Marking or unmarking any one will affect the whole group You can also highlight a range of icons directly with the mouse by dragging out a rectangle that intersects the icons you want to include Click the first icon and move to the last one before releasing the mouse button Having highlighted some icons you want to import click the checkbox of any one of them to mark or unmark the entire group at once Check All and Uncheck All Click these buttons along the bottom of the file browser to mark for importing either all or none of the asset files listed in the current folder The buttons do not affect any files currently selected in other folders Chapter 10
68. to open the Advanced Settings panel Settings Type Image Preset Custom S3D JPG Original JPG 640Px TIF Original TIF 1600Px ustom Image sequence A section of your video project can be exported as a series of images one per frame The video selected must be at least one second long 352 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Each second of video will generate between 25 and 60 images depending on the frame rate setting The images can be TIF JPG TGA or BMP in a variety of sizes If the project is in stereoscopic 3D you will be offered S3D formats for output Settings Type Image Sequence Preset JPG HDV 1440 S3D Anaglyph Anaglyph Anaglyph Crossed Eyed Side by side 50 None 2D MOV Video This is the QuickTime file format It is particularly suitable when the movie will be played on the QuickTime player MOV Video Full screen DV Full screen DV Full size SD good quality Full size SD best quality Medium SIF Small QSIF HD 720p HD 1080p Very Small Custom Descript Chapter 11 The Exporter 353 The presets provide a variety of size and encoding options MPEG MPEG 1 is the original MPEG file format MPEG 1 video compression is used on VideoCDs but in other contexts it has given way to newer standards Settings Type MPEG Preset Video CD Compatible Video CD Compatible VHS Quality Small Custom MPEG 2 is the successor format to MPEG 1 Whereas the M
69. trimming To apply a transition to multiple selected clips hold down the Shift key while dragging a transition from the Library onto one of the selected clips The position at which you drop the transition on that clip determines whether it will be placed at the beginning of each selected clip or the end The transition will not be applied to any clips that are shorter than the transition s duration When the Dynamic length transition button is activated the duration you drag out for the transition on the target clip is used for all the transitions created To keep tracks synchronized when inserting transitions in the out position use this multiple apply feature to add the same transition Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 119 once on each track Since each track will be affected in the same way they will all remain synchronized When a fade in follows a fade out the result is termed a fade through black The left hand clip fades all the way out then the right hand clip fades all the way in It is not necessary to leave a one frame gap between the clips Rippling transitions The ripple transition command is especially useful for creating a quick slideshow from a set of still images or a video pictorial from a set of short clips Such a presentation is more interesting if you connect each pair of clips with a transition which can be done quickly and easily by using ripple transition Begin with a set of clips on the timelin
70. which the De esser is deployed Range This knob controls the maximum attenuation that will be applied to the detected sibilance De Esser Noise Reduction Select preset No Preset No Preset Default Select preset No Preset Default utside k Music Restoration Frequency Strong x Level t AutoAdapt Remove Wind Range 0dB Setting and presets for the De esser and Noise Reduction audio corrections Noise reduction Using the noise reduction filter you can reduce or eliminate undesirable background noise The filter reacts dynamically to changing amounts and kinds of noise within the material Noise reduction can be applied for a range of problems The results obtained may differ however depending on the source material and the origin of the problem In many cases the results can be optimized through targeted use of the Level and Fine Tuning parameters Chapter 8 Sound and music 247 Since a new setting may take a few seconds to go into effect make changes slowly and in small steps carefully auditioning each change Level Outdoor video recordings in which the subjects are far from the microphone frequently suffer from excess background noise It may even be enough to obscure sounds of interest such as the subjects voices Under the same conditions the operating noise of the camcorder itself or the words of its operator may be amplified to an off putting degree Experiment with the Noise reductio
71. will be retained by the transition when pasted It is therefore not possible to paste a fade in as a fade out or vice versa To paste the transition to a particular clip select Paste on its context menu To paste it to all selected clips select Paste from the context menu of an empty timeline area or any selected clip or press Ctrl V 122 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Diagonal bottom right Falling Crys Remove Replace by Diagonal bottom right wipe 00 00 40 00 00 00 50 00 The Replace By submenu on the context menu for a transition pops up a convenient palette of standard recently used and 5 star transitions This pop up is also seen when transitions are added or replaced via a clip s context menu Ripple This command appears if more than one clip is selected For more information see Rippling transitions on page 120 Remove This command deletes a transition Fade in transitions are removed without further ado Removing a fade out transition causes clips to the right to be rippled rightwards by the duration of the transition This can cause loss of synchronization with other tracks Replace by A selection of transitions is offered two standard dissolves the six transitions most recently used and all transitions with a 5 star rating Clip effects Clip effects also called filters or video effects operate on one clip at a time Effects are of many kinds and vary widely in purpose With keyframing eff
72. you adjust a number of video and audio parameters The Hue slider fourth from left is not used with PAL sources Although you can also adjust these levels with the appropriate correction in the Video Editor setting them correctly for capture can save you from having to worry about color correction later on Setting your audio options correctly as you capture will help in achieving consistent volume levels and quality Particular capture devices may offer fewer options than are shown and discussed here For instance with hardware that doesn t support stereo captures an audio balance control will not appear Video Choose the type of video you are going to digitize by clicking the appropriate source button Composite or SVideo The five sliders allow you to control the brightness video gain contrast ratio of lightest to darkest sharpness hue and color saturation of the incoming video 298 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The hue slider can be useful for correcting unwanted color shifts in NTSC material it is not available when capturing from a PAL source The saturation slider regulates the color saturation the amount of color in the image An image with zero saturation has only black white and gray tones Audio The sliders on the right side of the panel let you control the input level and stereo balance of the incoming audio The Import To panel After importing from external devices media items and Pin
73. you have configured the controls to your satisfaction click OK The Chapter Wizard will carry out its work of creating new chapters for your production complete with markers on the timeline and by default an automatically generated set of menu pages with as many chapter buttons as necessary Place chapters at This is the uppermost panel in the Chapter Wizard The two options here can be used separately or together Optimal positions When this box is checked the Chapter Wizard creates chapters at a selected interval along the timeline but will adjust the chapter to a nearby clip boundary when one is available The desired average chapter length is specified in seconds The initial value is based on the length of your movie To adjust it either click directly on the number and type or drag horizontally within the text box Timeline markers This option assumes that you have prepared timeline markers to indicate to the Chapter Wizard particular places in your movie to which a chapter link must be created Chapter 9 Disc projects 283 Apply to The second panel in the Chapter Wizard provides options that control the scope of the wizard s operation Whole movie Chapter markers will be created throughout the entire movie Selection Chapter markers will be placed only within the range from the beginning of the first selected clip to the end of the final one Options The third panel offers two final choices which may be se
74. your animation A loop button lets you cycle the animation continuously for easy checking Frame rate This rate in frames per second determines how many frames you will have to create in order to amass one second of movie time This rate influences the apparent speed of the animation Onion skin settings Click the more button amp to open a small window where the onion skin feature can be configured The first slider shows the difference in transparency between successive frames while the second controls the number of frames in 332 Pinnacle Studio User Guide addition to the current one that will take part in the effect Experiment with both settings until you find the levels that work best for your movie Importing the animation When you have added all the frames you want to the animation click the Start Import button The Importer adds your animated movie and or the individual frames you captured to the appropriate sections of the Library Snapshot The Snapshot function of the Importer is used to record individual frames still images from cameras or players connected to the system To prepare make sure the source device is switched on then select it by name under the Snapshot heading in the Import From panel of the Importer For more information see The Import From panel on page 294 Before starting the capture make sure that your destination folder and file names are set up in the other panels a
75. 10 GB you will need to free up some space Uninstall and reinstall Pinnacle Studio If none of the suggestions so far help you could have a corrupted installation of Studio If that is the case you should try uninstalling Pinnacle Studio and then reinstalling it You can uninstall Pinnacle Studio from the Windows Control Panel by clicking Uninstall a program Uninstall Pinnacle Studio Once Pinnacle Studio is uninstalled install it again from your disc or program download Check for a corrupt project Try rebuilding the first few minutes of your project If this does not cause any instability try adding a few more minutes to the project Continue to rebuild the project if the system remains stable Appendix A Troublehooting 395 Check for corrupt media If the instability seems to occur when you manipulate certain audio or video clips you should recapture or import the audio or video If the media were imported and created by another application you should capture with Studio and create a test project While Studio works with many video formats the clip you have may be corrupt or in an uncommon variant format If you have a wav or mp3 files that seems to be problematic convert the file to the other format and then import the file Reinstall Windows This is quite a drastic step but if the steps to this point have not helped Windows itself may be corrupt The heavy processing demands made on your system by a multimedia authori
76. 63 Razor blade razor blade button No material is deleted by this operation but each affected clip becomes two clips that can be handled separately with respect to trimming moving adding effects and so on To split one or more clips at the playhead position click the If there are selected clips at the playhead on any track only those clips will be split Both parts of those clips remain selected after the split If there are no selected clips at the playhead line all clips intersected by it will be split and the right hand parts will be selected to facilitate easy removal in case that is desired Locked tracks are exempt from the split operation Trashcan the timeline Deleting clips on page 96 for details on how T Click the trashcan button to delete all selected items from other timeline clips may be affected by the deletion Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 81 Snapshot that you would like to capture as a still image click the Snapshot button This creates a photo of the image currently being previewed and puts it in the Snapshot folder under Photos in the Library E If while previewing video on the timeline you see a frame Using the Snapshot button on the timeline is a quick way to grab a frame for more control use the Snapshot tool in the Video Editor Please see Snapshot on page 151 for more about the Snapshot tool Markers provided in the media editors for video and audio Please see uli The m
77. Dad Adorage FX Pack 11 Supported NewBlue Video Essentials Supported NewBlue Video Essentials II Supported NewBlue Video Essentials III Supported proDAD Mercalli Supported Appendix A Troublehooting 385 Third party bonus DVD plugins Support Bravo Studio 1 2 amp 3 Not supported BWPlugins 1 2 amp 3 Not supported Dziedzic Effects Pack 1 amp 2 Not supported eZedia Effects Not supported NewBlue Art Effects 1 Not supported NewBlue Effects Not supported NewBlue Time Effects 1 Not supported PE CameraPOV Not supported proDAD Adorage Supported proDAD Heroglyph 1 Not supported proDAD Heroglyph 2 Supported Included in Title Extreme proDAD Vitascene 1 0 Supported StageTools Moving Picture Full Not supported StageTools Moving Picture LE Not supported Vance Effects Not supported Algorithmix Not supported NewBlue Audio Enhancements 1 Not supported NewBlue Audio Essentials 1 Not supported NewBlue Audio Essentials 2 Not supported NewBlue Audio Essentials 3 Not supported NewBlue Audio Essentials 4 Not supported Might not be supported in the 64 bit version of Pinnacle Studio 386 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Capture hardware compatibility Document ID 384431 Pinnacle Studio has been tested and found to work successfully with a wide variety of vide
78. Disc Editor timeline is opened in one of the media editors you can use the Corrections family of tools to change it in any way you like without affecting either Library assets or other clips Such changes to the clip become part of your project Chapter 4 Corrections 129 If you want to remove corrections from a clip on the timeline select the context menu command Open Effects Editor then switch to the Corrections tool The settings panels indicate with highlighting which settings have been modified Use this to locate and reset the corrections For details on using a particular media editor please see Correcting photos on page 138 Correcting video on page 145 or Correcting audio on page 152 Media editing overview The media editors can be opened to access the available tools in a number of ways from both the Library and a project s timeline To open from the Library Doone ofthe following Double click the icon or text record of a video photo or audio asset Select the Open in corrections command from the asset s context menu To open from the Library Player e After clicking the play button on a Library item to open the Library Player click the gear wheel icon EH at bottom right To open from the timeline Doone ofthe following Double click the clip in the timeline Select the Open effects editor command from the clip s context menu 130 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Use the context menu Eff
79. Eye or Right Eye and direct it to either eye using the Mapping dropdown Working with transitions The Transition In tab to the left of Corrections and Effects and the Transition Out tab on the right offer access to all the transitions in the Library grouped as you find them there Some transitions may offer settings for properties like reverse motion color and softness that can t 172 Pinnacle Studio User Guide be edited on the timeline The media editors also provide transport controls and a time ruler to help in previewing the transition and adjusting its duration Transition In Corrections Effects Transition Out 1 Standard Transitions 2 1 5 E134 8 1 p 3 bt PeelBack Pinwheel 1 Pinwheel 2 Pinwheel 3 Pinwheel 4 Pinwheel 5 Pinwheel 6 Pinwheel 4 wipe i lt a b gt Dp Pp 00 01 00 00 00 01 30 00 Choosing a transition in the media editor The same transitions and controls apply to both in and out transitions When you have chosen a transition at the top of the screen its settings panel will open on the right side of the media editor Select a preset from the dropdown list if one meets your need or edit the parameters of the transition directly using the controls provided When you are offered a choice of colors click in the color box to open a color selector or click the color picker icon beside the box to choose a color from anywhere on the screen using a special mouse pointer Chapter 5 Effects 173
80. Generation iPad The file format used for iPod and iPhone compatible devices is based on MPEG 4 video compression technology The combination of powerful compression with a small 320x240 frame size produces very small output files relative to the more expansive formats The three 362 Pinnacle Studio User Guide quality presets select different data rates each providing a different balance of quality and file size Apple TV as well as iPad compatible files are based on the H 264 video compression standard Output frame size is either 960x540 for Apple TV first generation or 720p later generations Microsoft Xbox and Xbox One Microsoft Xbox presets allow you to create files for full screen playback on your Xbox Two formats are available DivX SD based on MPEG 4 video compression technology and WMV HD Settings Type Microsoft Xoox Preset DivX SD sap BWASD WMV HD PAL Nintendo Wii Pinnacle Studio can generate files for playback on your Nintendo Wii with the support of both AVI and FLV output formats Settings Type Nintendo Wii Preset AVI SD FlashVidec Chapter 11 The Exporter 363 Sony PS3 and PS4 You can export files to your PlayStation by selecting the Sony PS3 or Sony PS4 export type Studio supports the following file formats Full size which is in DivX file format at 720 x 400 and HD 1080 60i Settings Sony PS3 Full size SD Full size SD HD 1080 50i Sony PSP
81. Lengths Pan amp Zoom Video Track Volume 50 Photo Video Mix Chapter 2 The Library 59 The settings entered will be used the next time the production is generated The video settings button lets you set up the timeline options that will apply if you take the production into the Movie Editor The clear project button removes all media from the project and returns to default settings Title Enter a caption to be used as the main title of the production Pan and zoom Checking this option enlivens your presentation with simulated camera moves Fit image Check this option to enlarge images that are too small for the selected format For a more flexible approach you can also consider correcting the asset with the Crop corrections tool SmartMovie SmartMovie presents its controls on a panel that slides up into the Library from below Again there are three subpanels The leftmost presents information and advice concerning your SmartMovie The center subpanel is a storage area with bins for video and photos top and audio The right subpanel contains controls for customizing the show Adding media The visual elements in your SmartMovie can include photos and other still images along with the video Drag the assets you want to use from the Browser into the upper bin in the storage area You can also drag thumbnails within the storage area to get the order you want Continue adding further material until you are satisfied To
82. Library Player Clicking the preview button in the center of the asset icon loads the item into the Library Player for viewing Chapter 2 The Library 41 TC 00 00 02 03 Horses mp4 00 00 00 30 Previewing a video clip in the Library Player window The transport controls are at the bottom starting with a Loop button at the far left and a shuttle wheel The third in the group of five arrow buttons starts playback The two buttons on each side of it are for navigating from asset to asset in the Library folder Along the top of the Player the current viewing position is displayed At the bottom is a toolbar of transport controls and function buttons Transport controls First among the transport controls is the loop button which causes playback in a continuous loop from the start of the media Next is a shuttle wheel with which you can sensitively control the speed of playback by dragging backwards and forwards on the control The center play button in the cluster of five arrow controls begins preview of the video or audio asset The two buttons on either side of it are for navigating from the viewed asset to others in its folder When previewing a photo the play button does not appear only the navigation buttons remain 42 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Click the mute button to the right of the transport controls to toggle the audio associated with the clip A volume slider appears next to the mute button when the mouse is over it
83. OM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Memory chip that after programming retains its data without power supply The memory contents can be erased with ultraviolet light and rewritten Fade to from black A digital effect that fades up from black at the beginning of a clip or down to black at the end Field A frame of video consists of horizontal lines and is divided into two fields The odd lines in the frame are Field 1 the even numbered lines are Field 2 File format The organization of information within a computer file such as an image or word processor document The format of a file is usually indicated by its file extension e g doc avi or wmf Filters Tools that alter data to produce special effects 416 Pinnacle Studio User Guide FireWire Apple Computer s trademarked name for the FFF 7394 serial data protocol Field A frame of interlaced video consists of horizontal lines and is divided into two fields The odd lines in the frame are Field 1 the even numbered lines are Field 2 Frame rate The frame rate defines how many frames of a video sequence are played in one second The frame rate for NTSC video is 30 frames per second The frame rate for PAL video is 25 frames per second Frame size The maximum size for displaying image data in a video or animation sequence If an image intended for the sequence is larger than the frame size it must be cropped or scaled to fit Frequency The number o
84. OSTS PAID BY YOU TO PURCHASE THE ATERIALS SOME STATES COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 2014 Corel Corporation All rights reserved Corel Pinnacle Studio the Corel logo and the Corel Balloon logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Corel Corporation and or its subsidiaries All other product names and any registered and unregistered trademarks mentioned are used for identification purposes only and remain the exclusive property of their respective owners Please respect the Rights of Artists and Creators Content such as music photos video and celebrity images are protected by the laws of many countries You may not use other people s content unless you own the rights or have the permission of the owner
85. PEG 1 file format is supported on all Windows 95 and later PCs MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 files can only be played on PCs with appropriate decoder software installed Several of the MPEG 2 presets support HD High Definition playback equipment Settings Type MPEG2 Preset DVD Compatible S3D DVD Compatible SVCD Corrpatible HD 720p HDV2 1080i HD 1080 HD 1080p HD 1030 24p Custom 354 Pinnacle Studio User Guide MPEG 4 is another member of the MPEG family It offers image quality similar to MPEG 2 but with even greater compression It is particularly suitable for Internet use Two of the MPEG 4 presets QCIF and QSIF create quarter frame video sized for cell phones two others CIF and SIF create full frame video suitable for handheld viewers Settings MPEG 4 Full size SD best quality Full size SD best quality Full size SD good quality Medium Medium SIF Small QSIF HD 720p HD 1080p Small Very Small Ultra HD 4K Custom Custom presets With all MPEG variants Custom lets you configure movie output in detail by clicking the Advanced button to open the Advanced Settings panel Real Media Real Media movie files are designed for playback on the Internet Real Media movies can be played back by anyone around the world who has the RealNetworks RealPlayer software which is a free download from www real com Chapter 11 The Exporter 355 Settings Type RealMedia Preset Large
86. Player Here a Library clip is ready to drop on the second zone The clip will replace the igloo graphic now occupying the zone Template backgrounds Some templates have built in graphical backgrounds a selectable background color or both Many of these also provide a Background check box in the Montage Editor leave the box unchecked if you want a transparent background This allows the Montage to be used on an upper timeline track over a background of the video or photo material on the tracks below Montage clips on the timeline Montage clips behave like ordinary video clips when it comes to operations on the timeline of a movie or disc project such as adding transitions trimming and positioning 184 Pinnacle Studio User Guide A Montage template dropped onto the timeline is added by one of three methods insert overwrite and replace When the editing mode button on the toolbar is set to smart the replace method is chosen automatically The default length of the clip varies from one template to another Inserting a Montage template A Montage can be added anywhere on the timeline If a Montage clip is placed in the middle of an existing clip it will interrupt that clip on playback and the current editing mode will determine whether the second part of the original clip is overwritten or simply delayed If you wish to insert a Montage at a cut point between or adjacent to other clips but without disturbing them begin b
87. Recording to start the screen capture All activities inside the specified capture area are recorded Screen capture starts after the countdown Note You can press F10 to stop and F11 to pause or resume the screen capture Click Stop Recording to finish your screen capture Note The screen capture is added to the custom folder that you have specified Pinnacle Studio User Guide Appendix A Troublehooting Before you begin troubleshooting take some time to check your hardware and software installation Update your software We recommend installing the latest operating system updates for Windows Check your hardware Ensure that all installed hardware is functioning normally with the latest drivers and is not flagged as having a problem in Device Manager see below If any devices are flagged you should resolve the issue before starting the installation Get the latest drivers We also highly recommend installing the latest drivers for your sound card and graphics card Each time it is launched Pinnacle Studio verifies that both cards support DirectX Opening Device Manager The Windows Vista and Windows 7 Device Manager which lets you configure your system s hardware has an important role in troubleshooting The first step in accessing Device Manager is to right click on My Computer and then select Properties from the context menu This opens the System Properties window The Device Manager button is listed on
88. TE ER A T ow 1 i A single video file can contain many scenes This makes the footage easier to manipulate during editing than if it were treated as a single segment During editing scene clips behave identically to other video clips Manually creating scenes If you want to manually divide a video file into individual scenes select Show scenes from the asset s context menu or click the Scenes view button If you haven t previously subdivided the file it will now appear in the Browser as a single scene In the Library Player navigate within the clip to each frame where a scene break should occur then click the Split scene button See Function buttons on page 43 for further information Removing scenes To empty the entire list of scenes for a video file select Scene detection gt Remove scenes on the asset s context menu 56 Pinnacle Studio User Guide To remove individual scenes select one or more scenes then press Delete SmartMovie SmartMovie is a built in project generator that allows you to create a slideshow or movie production automatically based on media you supply The created production will include animated transitions a full music soundtrack and eye catching image effects SmartMovie At the bottom of the Library just click SmartMovie To begin select from the Library a series of photos or video files Your music might come from digital audio assets already in the Library or you can c
89. Title Editor 205 Text and shape layers These are vector based layers meaning that they are stored not as bitmapped images like video and photo files but as a kind of recipe for recreating the images from straight and curved line segments to which properties e g color and special effects e g blur can be applied Like video and image layers these vector based layers can be dragged resized rotated and grouped and you can apply Motions to them Unlike the other layers however they can also be customized with Looks from the Looks section of the Presets Selector See Preset Looks on page 201 for details Motions Motions are animation routines that can be applied to any layer in the title composition except the background Motions are selected and applied from the Motions tab of the Presets Selector Once a Motion has been applied to a layer its timing can be adjusted in the Layer List timeline See Preset Motions on page 202 and The Layer List on page 224 for further information Creating text and shape layers To create a text layer either click the add text button in the header bar of the Layer List timeline or simply double click an empty area of the Edit Window A new layer containing default text will appear The text is automatically selected and will be replaced if you now begin to type MB To create a shape layer click the add shape button to the right of add text then make a selection on
90. a channel specifying transparency pixel by pixel Such alpha information can conflict with Pinnacle Studio effects The command isn t available for pure audio clips Active streams This command is available for disabling individual streams in clips containing both video and audio It is typically used as an easy way to discard unneeded camera audio Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 125 Adjust duration Enter a duration numerically in the pop up window All selected clips will be trimmed to the duration requested by adjusting their out points Detach audio In clips with both video and audio this command detaches the audio stream into a separate clip on a separate track allowing advanced editing operations like L cuts Find in Library This command opens the Library Browser at the folder containing the asset that is the source of the video photo or audio clip Cut Copy Paste Move or copy a selection of clips using Clipboard commands instead of drag and drop Group You can group multiple clips so that you can move the clips together When you no longer need the group or want to create a different grouping you can Ungroup the clips In Transition Out Transition These provide access to a set of operations for managing transitions including Add Replace Edit Copy and Remove For more information see Transitions on page 116 Delete Delete the selected clip or clips Display information Display properties of the clip a
91. ached import is terminated and the source device is stopped 4 The captured material is stored in the Library 326 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Import from analog sources To record analog video e g VHS or Hi8 you need a converter that connect to your computer and that has the required video and audio connections This is also the case when recording from analog sound sources such as a record player Currently supported devices include Pinnacle and Dazzle products such as 500 510 USB 700 710 USB and DVC 100 and webcams based on DirectShow technology To prepare for importing from an analog source switch on the device and select it by name in the Import From panel of the Importer Also choose the applicable input e g Video Composite or Video SVideo If you wish to tweak the incoming analog signal prior to digitization click the more button which provides access to the Analog Input Levels window See Adjusting analog audio and video levels on page 296 Before starting the capture make sure that your destination folder compression presets and other options are set up in the other panels as you want them See Importer panels on page 294 Import from Video SVideo DVD Blu Ray My compute Stop Motion o Bg Dp JE Sr apst t L 4 Snapshot Chapter 10 The Importer 327 To capture from an analog source 1 2 Verify that the input device is connected e g Video S Video
92. add music drag one or more sound files to the lower bin in the storage area Alternatively you can click the clef button Ba in the 60 Pinnacle Studio User Guide bottom left corner of the audio bin to create a music soundtrack in ScoreFitter As media are added the total running time of the source material is displayed in the top left corner of the bin This is not necessarily the length of the resulting movie Preview edit and export Having placed your media click Preview on the footer bar below the tool The project is created and opened in a preview window If necessary you can return to SmartMovie to modify your media selections Smart progress Analyzing Media The analysis phase of generating a SmartMovie may take some time to complete the first time the material is analyzed Full rendering of the project with progress indicated by shading on the time ruler of the Player may introduce an additional delay before a fully detailed preview Is available When you click Preview the media you have chosen are automatically saved in a Collection named Latest Smart Creation If you expect to make further use of this grouping of assets rename the Collection to prevent it being overwritten the next time you generate a SmartMovie preview The Edit button brings your production to the Movie Editor timeline for detailed editing As usual it s a good idea to check that the timeline video settings match your requirements f
93. add text and add shape buttons allow you to create new vector based layers to which Looks from the Presets Selector can be applied Clicking add text adds a new text layer with a default Look and caption As a shortcut for add text you can simply double click any unused area of the Edit Window Clicking add Chapter 7 The Title Editor 227 228 shape opens a pop up menu from which you can select a particular shape as the contents of the new layer Add Circle Add Square Add Ellipse Add Rectangle Add Triangle Add Horizontal Pill h Add Vertical Pi asci Each of the align group and order buttons opens a pop up menu of commands that can affect multiple layers These commands are covered under Working with layer groups on page 230 The 3D viewing mode switcher appears if you are editing a stereoscopic 3D title Please see the 3D viewing mode switcher on page 44 for information on the available formats The transport buttons allow you to preview your title without leaving the Title Editor From left to right the functions of the buttons are loop play jump to start go back one frame play pause advance one frame and jump to end The loop play button loops continuously once started to halt It click anywhere on the Edit Window or click loop play again As usual pressing Space provides a convenient shortcut for stopping and starting playback Pinnacle Studio User Guide The System Volume and Mut
94. aded from one scene to the next Dithering Increasing the number of apparent colors in an image by the application of color patterns Decibel dB A unit of measurement of the loudness of sound An increase of 3 dB doubles the loudness Digital8 Digital videotape format that records DV coded audio and video data on Hi8 tapes Currently sold only by Sony Digital8 camcorders and VCRs can play both Hi8 and 8mm cassettes Digital video Digital video stores information bit by bit in a file in contrast to analog storage media Appendix C Glossary 415 DMA Direct Memory Access Driver A file containing information needed to operate peripherals The video capture driver operates a video capture board for example DV Digital videotape format for recording digital audio and video on V4 wide metal evaporated tape Mini DV tapes hold up to 60 minutes of content while standard DV tapes can hold up to 270 minutes ECP Enhanced Compatible Port Enables accelerated bi directional data transfer via the parallel port See FPP Edit decision list EDL A list of clips and effects in a particular order that will be recorded to your output disc or file Studio allows you to create and edit your own edit decision list by adding deleting and reordering clips and effects in the Movie Editor and the Disc Editor EPP Enhanced Parallel Port Enables accelerated bi directional data transfer via the parallel port See ECP EPR
95. ag from any asset s context menu 50 Pinnacle Studio User Guide New tag name Apply the tag to selected media Sort by Abc v flowers 10 7 vacation 1 fi delete all tags The tags panel with existing tags listed alphabetically At the top of the tags panel is a text box for entering new tag names The panel also lists all the tags you have defined so far lets you delete or rename them and lets you choose which assets you want displayed in the Library Creating renaming and deleting tags To create a new tag click in the text box at the top of the tags panel and type in your tag Select the media that you want to tag make sure the Apply the tag to selected media box is checked and click the Create new tag button beside the text box There is no limit to the number of tags you can create However if you try to apply a name that isn t new you will be notified that the name already exists and it will not be added to the selected media To apply an existing tag to all currently selected assets in the Browser click the tag name Selecting multiple assets to tag makes the process much more efficient than if you could tag only one item at a time Chapter 2 The Library 51 flowers 10 a4 0 Hovering over a tag reveals the Rename and Delete buttons Clicking the tag itself applies it to any currently selected assets Hovering the mouse over a tag reveals the controls for renaming or deleting the tag T
96. ail layer relative to the nominal position of the text or graphic to which the 210 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Look is applied The range of offset is 1 0 left or bottom to 1 0 right or top The maximum offsets represent one eighth the width and one eighth the height of the Edit Window work area In this example a Look with three detail layers has been applied to a single text layer The detail layers are contigured identically except for their offset values as follows top left 7 0 1 0 center 0 0 bottom right 1 0 1 0 Size This slider sets the thickness of the segments used to draw the text or graphic from zero to 2 where 1 represents the default thickness This example includes three detail layers with varying size values From left to right 0 90 1 0 1 20 The visual effect of varying the size depends on the default thickness of the strokes in the layer In a text layer this depends on the font family and size chosen e Blur As this slider increases in value from O to 1 the detail layer affected becomes increasingly ghostly and indistinct Chapter 7 The Title Editor 211 The detail layers in this example differ only in their blur settings From left to right 0 15 0 0 40 e Opacity This slider sets the opacity of the detail layer from 0 transparent to 1 opaque Fill Click the color swatch button to open a color picker in which the fill color of the detail layer can be set T
97. ailable for importing Importing can be regarded as a four step process 1 Select the import source on the Import From panel 2 Confirm or adjust the settings on the other panels 3 Select material to import from the chosen source 4 Initiate the import operation At this point Studio begins transferring the requested audio video and pictorial material from the source device to your hard drive if necessary using the locations set in the Import To panel The media are then immediately added to the Library Once the import operation is complete the Importer returns control to the prior screen from which you can access the imported files through the Library See Chapter 2 The Library on page 17 Chapter 10 The Importer 293 Importing stereoscopic 3D content Pinnacle Studio will recognize content as stereoscopic 3D and mark it as such for files with the following properties MTS MVC SBS50 SBS100 if H264 stream markers are present WMV Multistream SBS50 SBS100 TAB5O TAB100 if metadata tags are present MP4 MOV with H264 SBS50 SBS100 if H264 stream markers are present MPO Multistream JPS PNS SBS50 SBS100 If Studio has not correctly identified your 3D media choose the correct setting from the Stereoscopic 3D dropdown in the Adjustments group of Corrections tools Please see Adjustments on page 150 for details Importer panels The actual selection of material to be imported takes place i
98. akes for granted that you know how to open and use them 2 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Mouse clicks When a mouse click is required the default is always a left click unless otherwise specified or unless the click is to open a context menu Right click and select 7 t e Editor Or one might say Select 7 t e Editor from the context menu Key names Key names are spelled with an initial capital and are underlined A plus sign denotes a key combination For example Press Ctrl A to select all the clips on the Timeline Please refer to Appendix D Keyboard shortcuts for a comprehensive table of available shortcuts Help and Tooltips Immediate help is available while you are working in Pinnacle Studio via the Help menu Help The Help menu lets you access a variety of learning resources Click the Help button gt User Manual to access the Learning Center page with links to video tutorials the Pinnacle Studio 18 User Guide PDF and other community and support links p E Store Video tutorials You can access video tutorials from the Learning Center page Help gt User Manual or by visiting the following sites directly Before you start 3 e YouTube http www youtube com user pinnaclestudiolife StudioBacklot tv http www studiobacklot tv studio18 Get a 6 week all access pass to StudioBacklot tv featuring brand new Pinnacle Studio 18 content loads of other training and a royalty free stock library
99. ality Custom If you wish to fine tune your output settings choose the Custom preset then click the Advanced button to bring up the Advanced Settings panel Click the Burn Disc button Studio goes through the steps described above render compile and burn to create the disc Click the Create Image button to perform the identical steps but omit the burn step When Studio has finished the burning operation it ejects the disc If you want to burn a previously created image press the Burn Image button Quality and capacity of disc formats The differences amongst the various disc formats can be boiled down to these rules of thumb regarding the video quality and capacity of each format e DVD Each disc holds about 60 minutes of full quality MPEG 2 video 120 minutes if the disc recorder supports dual layer recording 344 Pinnacle Studio User Guide DVD AVCHD Each disc holds about 40 minutes of full quality AVCHD video per layer BD Each disc holds more than 270 minutes of HD video per layer Output to file Studio can create movie files in all of these formats e 3GP e Audio only e AVCHD Blu Ray AVI e Divx e DivX Plus HD e Flash Video Image Image Sequence MOV e MPEG 1 e MPEG 2 e MPEG 4 MTS e Real Media Smart Windows Media e XAVC Supported in 32 bit only Chapter 11 The Exporter 345 Choose whichever format matches the needs of your audience and the details
100. and O Koer ist O Ster id ons My FX Compositions TT I5 IT Along with the seven other groups under the Effects family a group named My FX Compositions right appears as soon as any compositions are added to the Library They are stored in the Effects section of the Library under My FX Compositions and can be used in the same way as ordinary effects Pan and zoom The Photo Editor provides a third tab Pan and zoom to go along with Corrections and Effects The pan and zoom tool is a versatile accessory with which you can add motion and drama to any high resolution photograph among other uses See Pan and zoom on page 174 for details Effects in the media editors Like other resources for your project effects are stored in the Library You ll find them in the Navigator under Effects in the Creative Elements branch As with other types of Library resource you can use all the Chapter 5 Effects 155 usual features Collections ratings tags and so on to help you organize the many effects available You can apply an effect from the Library directly to a clip on the timeline of a project with drag and drop Clips to which an effect has been added are indicated by a brightly colored upper border When you double click a timeline clip its media editor opens automatically with the Effects tab preselected Up to eight groups of effects are available depending on which version of Pinnacle Studio you are working wit
101. and copying media files to your local hard drive from a network location The Pinnacle Studio Importer provides tools for these tasks along with a Snapshot feature for grabbing frames from video files and a Stop motion tool for building up video frame by frame See Chapter 10 The Importer on page 291 for details File menu import commands Choosing Import from the file menu has the same effect as clicking the Import tab it opens the Importer The menu provides three other import related choices as well Each of Chapter 1 Using Pinnacle Studio 5 these opens a Windows file dialog to permit import of files from a hard drive or other local storage Import previous Pinnacle Studio Projects lets you load movie projects created with earlier versions of Studio Import Studio for iPad App Projects lets you b ring in projects exported from Studio s companion app for the iPad Quick Import lets you directly select ordinary media files photo video audio and project for import A 82 FA 8252 FR 054 Da Principal controls in the Importer s Snapshot tool The Exporter At the other end of the movie making process is Export By the time you get to this stage the hard part of the task is behind you The creative energy that went into making your movie has paid off in a production that now lacks only one ingredient an audience 6 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Preset details Preparing to create a video file in the Expo
102. and in a spectrum of visual styles Each menu comprises a background picture a text title and a set of navigation buttons appropriate to the menu s purpose To add a disc menu to your production open the Compact Library in the Disc Editor choose a menu in the Disc Menus under Creative Elements and drag it to the Menu List To edit the actions assigned to the menu s buttons you can use the authoring tools provided on the timeline in conjunction with the Player or get some automated help from the Chapter Wizard To modify the appearance of a menu or create one from scratch you will use the Menu Editor Menu types Each menu design in the Library has two variations main and multipage Main menu In most productions the first menu seen by the viewer is of this type Main menus usually contain buttons with the default captions Play Movie and Scene Selection you can change these if you like Although the buttons link targets are also up to you it helps your audience if you stick to convention For instance the Play Movie button is normally configured to start playing back your movie from the beginning and Scene Selection typically switches to a subsidiary menu one with links to the chapters of your movie Multipage menu A scene selection menu often needs to provide more of these chapter buttons than will fit on a single screen To solve this problem Pinnacle Studio supports multipage menus which have additional butt
103. aps if you shorten It will never affect the synchronization between tracks Alternative mode The smart editing mode works by predicting what you re trying to do and determining whether insert overwrite or even some more complex strategy would be best to apply You ll find it usually does what you want but there are sure to be other times when you have something else in mind Many actions support both insert and overwrite but no other possibilities Smart mode will use sometimes one and sometimes the other but if insert isn t what you want overwrite usually is and vice Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 85 versa All you need therefore is a method of overriding smart mode s default behavior To change insert to overwrite behavior or overwrite to insert hold down the Alt key while carrying out your edit as usual You can press or release Alt as you please while setting up the edit what counts is the state of the key at the instant the operation is finally enacted such as when you drop dragged items onto the timeline The trick works in all editing modes so it s always available when you need it If you are not satisfied with the default behavior just cancel or undo as needed then try again with Alt In one timeline editing operation that of replacing one clip by another while retaining its duration effects and other properties the Shift key takes on a similar role See Replacing a clip on page 94 for detai
104. arate schedules For example suppose you wish to change the Size parameter of an effect smoothly over the whole clip while changing another let us say Rotation at several points along the way Here are two ways of approaching this 166 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Method 1 Set up the Size keyframes first then add the more numerous Rotation frames where needed At each of these a correct Size value will be calculated Method 2 Add the effect twice once to adjust the keyframes for overall changes Size in the example then another time to make multiple keyframe changes Rotation Video and photo effects The effects provided for use with video also work with photos and vice versa Only Pinnacle Studio supplied effects are described here For third party plug in effects please consult the manufacturers documentation Blur Adding Blur to your video produces a result similar to shooting out of focus The Blur effect allows you to add separate intensities of horizontal and vertical blurring over the whole frame or any rectangular region within it You can easily blur out only a selected portion of the image such as a person s face an effect familiar from TV news coverage Emboss This specialized effect simulates the look of an embossed or bas relief sculpture The strength of the effect is controlled by the Amount slider Old film Old movies have a number of traits that are usually considered undesirable grainy imag
105. arching the Library for assets to use in a movie Use the Collection field to enter the name of a Collection to which all imported assets will be added You can enter the name of an existing Chapter 10 The Importer 309 Collection or create a new Collection by entering a new name See Collections on page 28 You can enter tags for the asset in the Tag field these can later be used to find the asset See Tags on page 50 The Filename panel This panel of the Importer is where you specify the names under which your imported media files or project files will be stored Each type of input source has a default filename assigned by Studio For instance the default filename when importing a Snapshot is Snapshot To change it click in the space and type the name you want Filename Snapshot The Importer never overwrites an existing file when importing If a file with the same name as the target name already exists a sequence number is added to the name of the incoming file When importing from file based assets additional file naming features are available By default the naming formula for a file based input is given symbolically as original ext meaning that the original filename and extension are used Filename original ext 310 Pinnacle Studio User Guide If you want a custom name enter it into the edit box as usual however in the case of file based assets the target filename has two
106. are Equalize Compressor Expander De esser and Noise reduction Each can be applied both to Library assets and to timeline clips Equalize Equalizers are similar in principle to the treble and bass controls of an audio system but with finer adjustment capabilities This equalizer divides the audio spectrum into five frequency bands each centered on a specified frequency and with a settable amount of gain Chapter 8 Sound and music 243 Preset list A number of fixed presets can be selected from the dropdown list for example you can select a telephone voice effect Gain Using the Gain parameter you can determine the amount that the respective frequency band contributes to the overall sound from 18 to 18 Equalizer ct preset Heavy No Preset Default Compressor Heavy k Soft Telephone Vocal No Preset No Preset Threshold dB Release s Gain dB 20000HZ Knee dB gt 20Hz Settings and presets for the Equalize and Compressor audio corrections Most Expander settings not shown are the same as those of Compressor See the description for details Frequency Using the Frequency parameter you can specify the center frequency of each band 244 Pinnacle Studio User Guide LoCut and HiCut These controllers completely eliminate frequencies below or above a set value The default values allow all frequencies Adjustments The only parameter available under the Adjustment tool th
107. are two types of compression lossless and lossy Files compressed with a lossless scheme can be restored unchanged from their original state Lossy schemes discard data during compression so some image quality is sacrificed The loss of quality may be negligible or severe depending on the amount of compression Cropping Choosing the area of an image to be displayed Data rate The quantity of data transmitted per unit time for example the number of bytes read from or written to a hard drive per second or the amount of video data processed per second 414 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Data transfer rate The measurement of the speed at which information passes between the storage device e g CD ROM or hard drive and the display device e g monitor or MCI device Depending on the devices used some transfer rates may offer better performance than others DCT Discrete Cosine Transformation part of JPEG image data compression and related algorithms The brightness and color information is saved as a frequency coefficient DirectShow System extension by Microsoft for multimedia applications under Windows See ActiveMovie DirectMedia System extension by Microsoft for multimedia applications under Windows See ActiveMovie DirectX A bundle of several system extensions developed by Microsoft for Windows 95 and its successors to make possible video and game acceleration Dissolve A transitional effect in which the video is f
108. arker functions available here are identical to those Markers on page 148 Instead of being attached to a particular clip however timeline markers are considered to belong to the video composite at the marked point Only if there is a clip selection embracing all tracks at the marked point and only if no track is locked will the markers change positions during timeline editing Trim mode cut to be trimmed and click the trim mode button Click it again to close trim mode Please see Trimming on page 99 for more details ES To open a trim point place the timeline scrubber near the 82 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Dynamic length transitions given the default length you have configured in Setup Click this button if you would like to override the default length When the button is highlighted the transition durations can be set by dragging the mouse to the right or left while placing the transition onto a clip For more about transitions please see Transitions on page 116 kJ Ordinarily when a transition is added to the timeline it is Magnetic snapping dragging While the mode is active clips are magnetically drawn to other items on the timeline when they approach within a critical distance This makes it easy to avoid the unnecessary though often indiscernibly small gaps between items that are otherwise apt to arise during editing If you want to deliberately create such a gap however simply turn off th
109. asses Appendix B Videography 405 Do not string together pan shots Pan shots should not be strung together unless they have the same direction and tempo Rules of thumb for video editing Here are some guidelines that may be helpful when you come to edit your movie Of course there are no hard and fast rules especially if your work is humorous or experimental e Do not string together scenes in which the camera is moving e Pans zooms and other moving shots should always be separated by static shots Shots that follow one another should be from different camera positions The camera angle should vary by at least 45 degrees Sequences of faces should always be shot alternately from varying angles of view Change perspectives when shooting buildings When you have similar shots of the same type and size the picture diagonal should alternate between front left to rear right and vice versa Make cuts when persons are in motion The viewer will be distracted by the ongoing motion and the cut will go almost without notice In particular you can cut to a long shot from the middle of the motion Make harmonious cuts avoid visual disjunction e The less motion there is in a shot the shorter it should be Shots with fast movements can be longer Long shots have more content so they should also be shown longer 406 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Ordering your video sequences in a deliberate manner not only permit
110. assign the entered shortcut to the selected command Adding a shortcut does not delete associations between a particular keyboard sequence and other commands it gives access to In fact it is possible for different commands to use the same shortcut provided they occur in different contexts For instance Ctrl L is the default shortcut for two commands Timeline gt Lock Track and Media Editor gt Rotate Left which one is activated depends on what part of Pinnacle Studio you are currently using To delete a shortcut 1 Select the target command 2 Choose the shortcut to delete from the Shortcuts for selected command dropdown list 3 Click the Remove button Restoring defaults Controls are also provided that allow you to restore the default keyboard configuration either for the currently selected command the Reset Current button or for all commands at once the Reset All button Chapter 12 Setup 373 Project settings On this page of the Pinnacle Studio Control Panel you can select your default settings for new projects titles and transitions New movie project format Select a resolution such as PAL or HD 1920x1080i as the default for every newly created timeline Alternatively let the first clip placed on the timeline define the format for the project with the option Detect format from first clip added to project The format for the current timeline may be changed at any time while editing by using the timeline set
111. at once from a clip with Delete all or delete a particular effect by selecting it on the Delete submenu Save as FX Composition Save the effects applied to the clip or a subset of them as an Effect Composition In the dialog that opens click on the FX Composition Name box and enter the caption that will identify the Composition in the Library and elsewhere Uncheck any of the applied effects that you don t want included in the Composition Edit From this submenu of applied effects choose one to open for configuration in the clip s media editor 160 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Find in Library Open to the page of the Library Browser that contains a particular effect with its thumbnail already selected Real time vs rendered Adding effects to a clip increases the amount of computation Pinnacle Studio must do to give you a smooth preview Depending on your computer s hardware the rendering process for a clip can easily require more computing time than can be managed in real time that is while the preview is actually running In this circumstance some pre rendering will be required before the clip can preview acceptably Rendering progress is shown on the time ruler by yellow to be rendered and green now being rendered shading The shading is removed as soon as pre rendering is complete Options for rendering are set in the Preview page of the Pinnacle Studio Control Panel See Export and Prev
112. ay using full screen Esc Exit full screen viewing Alt Click Play in thumbnail J Fast reverse hit multiple times for faster playback K or Shift K Pause playback L Fast forward hit multiple times for faster playback Shift L Slow forward hit multiple times for slower playback Shift J Slow reverse hit multiple times for slower playback Right or X Step forward 1 frame Left or Z Step back 1 frame Shift Right or Shift X Step forward 10 frames Shift Left or Shift Z Step backward 10 frames D or Page up or Ctrl Left Jump backward to cut F or Page down or Ctrl Right Jump forward to cut Ctrl 4 l Jump to mark in Ctrl O Jump to mark out period Jump to next marker comma Jump to previous marker Appendix D Keyboard shortcuts 429 Importer Enter Stop Motion Capture Frame when capture frame is open Right Expand folder in tree Left Collapse folder in tree Arrow keys Navigate up down left right Ctrl A Check all Ctrl Shift A Uncheck all FA Start Import Movie interface A Mark in or I S Mark out or O Shift 1 Clear mark in Shift O Clear mark out Shift U Clear mark in and out Scroll Lock Audio Scrub On Off E or Home Go to start R or End Go to end P Toggle Magnetic Snapping semicolon Split c
113. be displayed and manipulated separately in the Library This greatly simplifies the task of locating material of interest during editing Click the lower more button 8 to open the Scene Detection Options window See The Scene Detection Options window on page 308 Stop at tape end This option tells Pinnacle Studio whether to automatically stop capturing if a blank area of tape is encountered A blank area one without timecode striping indicates virgin tape 304 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Provided you have avoided leaving any blank spots during shooting by slightly overlapping neighboring shots this option allows for unattended capture Import options for analog media The options for analog import are similar to those just discussed for digital sources See below for explanations of the Compression Options and Scene Detections Options windows Mode Presets MPEG Custom Scene detection OFF Import options for file based assets The Mode panel provides two options affecting importing from file Import Mode This option determines whether the media file or project file is physically copied from the source location to the target folder of the local hard drive as specified on the Import To panel If Copy is selected the file is copied If Link is selected the file is not copied and a link is created in the Library to the file in its original location It is strongly recommended that files on network drives be copi
114. bias to achieve a particular effect For example a night scene can often be heightened by adding blue and slightly reducing overall brightness You can even make video shot in daylight look like a night scene Sepia This Pinnacle Studio effect imparts the appearance of antique photography to the clip by rendering it in sepia tones rather than full color The strength of the effect is controlled by the Amount slider White balance Most video cameras have a white balance option for automatically adjusting their color response to ambient lighting conditions If this option is switched off or not fully effective the coloration of the video image will suffer The White balance effect corrects the problem by allowing you to specify which color should be taken as white in this image The adjustment needed to make that reference color white is then applied 170 Pinnacle Studio User Guide to every pixel of the image If the reference white is well chosen this can make the coloration seem more natural Effects and stereoscopic 3D Some video and photo effects have features designed for 3D media For instance some of the provided effects offer a stereoscopic mode that is activated by a check box in the effect parameters Meanwhile the effects in the Stereoscopic group itself let you modify the 3D properties of your material The group includes The S3D Depth Control This effect allows you to adjust the parallax of stereoscopic footag
115. by file type option is not needed and doesn t appear The add collection button The Collections branch does not exhibit a group by menu This button on the branch header lets you create a new Collection Chapter 2 The Library 27 Collections From the Library s point of view a Collection is just an arbitrary grouping of assets a set of Library items with no organizing principle You may well have a good reason for gathering certain files into a particular collection but the Library doesn t have to know what it is Inside a Collection any asset can rub shoulders with any other One special Collection with the name Latest import is automatically updated after each import operation to display the media added Immediately after importing you can turn to this Collection and start working with the new material Another automatically generated Collection is Latest Smart Creation which stores the media you selected for your most recent SmartMovie production To create a new collection 1 Click the icon in the header line of the Collections branch and enter a name in the provided text field 2 Complete the process by pressing Enter Tip Alternatively choose Add to collection gt Create new collection from any asset s context menu To manage collections 1 Right click a collection and choose a command for renaming or deleting the collection or for creating a subcollection that has the current Collection as its pare
116. cally generating a full scale Pinnacle Studio project containing the media and options requested You can export the project immediately or edit it further by hand as you choose For more information see Instant gratification SmartMovie on page 20 The Movie Editor and the Disc Editor Once you have gathered your materials together and organized them to your satisfaction in the Library it s time to get to work on a video or a slideshow If you are working on a disc production specifically you can immediately start work in the Disc Editor which is just like the Movie Editor but has extra tools for creating and setting up DVD menus For more information see Chapter 9 Disc projects on page 267 If you aren t planning on creating a disc or aren t sure or if disc is only one of the output media you are targeting the Movie Editor is the right place to start Once your movie is completed you can export it to the Disc Editor and add in the menus The Movie Editor and the Disc Editor exist side by side but apart from the export feature just mentioned they do not interact If you want you can have a regular movie project and a disc project loaded simultaneously and switch from one to another at will Chapter 1 Using Pinnacle Studio 11 In both the Movie Editor and the Disc Editor a multitrack timeline occupies the lower part of the display Most of the clips on the timeline come trom the Library a few types lik
117. cation Align Center on the dropdown list in which each separate line is horizontally centered in the available space The additional options provide for Align Left Align Right and Justify To accommodate the various conventions of different languages with Text flow regard to the direction in which lines of text are written and for maximum graphical design flexibility the Title Editor offers a menu of eight text flow options These options which work in concert with the justification options just discussed affect not just the way the text is displayed but also the meaning of standard keys like Home and End E Styling with Looks As explained in the topic Preset Looks on page 201 the appearance of text and shape layers can be transformed by the application of Looks from the Presets Selector In a partially highlighted text layer applying Chapter 7 The Title Editor 221 a Look affects only the highlighted text In principle each of individual character in your title could be given its own Look Titles and stereoscopic 3D If you are working on a stereoscopic 3D project you don t have to settle for a 2D title The Library includes many titles identified as 3D but any title at all can make use of stereoscopic text To set a 2D title as stereoscopic select a text layer then check the Stereoscopic box on the Stereoscopic Settings subpanel Now the Text Depth setting becomes available it allows you to change the appare
118. clip To trim on the clip drag the trim point to the left or right To trim on the Player use the trim buttons to trim one or ten frames either forwards or backwards Click the loop play button for a looping preview of the trim region The position of the playhead relative to the trim point helps distinguish the in point of a clip left from the out point of the previous clip right Trimming the end of the clip To trim the end of the clip or mark out point open a trim point by clicking at the right hand edge of a clip when the mouse pointer changes to a rightward pointing arrow Now you can add or remove frames from the end of your clip Once again you can trim directly on the clip by dragging the trim point or on the Player while it remains in trim mode Trimming gaps The project s timeline lets you trim not just the clips upon it but also the gaps between them Trimming gaps might not sound terribly useful at first but is in fact handy For instance the easiest way to insert or delete space on a single timeline track is to trim the right hand edge 106 Pinnacle Studio User Guide of a gap All clips to the right of the gap are shifted as a block when this is done Also when you need to open a trim point on each track in order to maintain synchronization while trimming you may often choose to trim the duration of a gap rather than that of a clip Remember the rule one trim point on every track is required for k
119. clip is added to the special voice over track rather than the current track as with other media types 260 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Locating the Library asset As mentioned above a new Library asset is created each time you make a voice over and one can optionally be created from ScoreFitter as well In both cases a new button appears on the Library footer bar A new button is temporarily added to the Library footer bar when a new Scorefitter or voice over asset is added to the Library Click the button to locate the Library folder containing the asset Click the button to navigate in the current location tab to the Navigator folder where the new item is stored The button relates only to the operation just completed and is removed after a short time ScoreFitter Pinnacle Studio s ScoreFitter automatically creates EN background music in the category of your choice Within that category you select one of several songs and within that song any of a number of versions The list of versions available also depends on the duration of background music you specify Chapter 8 Sound and music 261 P Scorefitter Scorefitter Category Song Version Classical Homeward Bound Cricket Song Electronica I m Home at Last Sweets at Night Ethnic I Arr Summer Nightingale Film TV Quarterly Report Reminiscent Folk Traditional Smooth Breeze Summer s Kiss Speed Of Light Riverside Jazz Blues Spring Time Wandering Alone Novelty W
120. content is designed for stereoscopic 3D viewing carry a 3D indicator The indicator appears when video and photo assets are automatically detected as stereoscopic while importing them the Library and when an asset has been manually set as stereoscopic in corrections Dreadalus Used media indicator A checkmark is displayed to the right of the ratings indicator if the asset represented by the thumbnail is currently to be found in an open timeline within your project The checkmark is rendered in green if the asset is used in the currently visible project otherwise it is gray The used media indicator applies only to photo video and audio assets not to items like transitions and titles that come from the Creative Elements branch 40 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Information indicator Clicking the information indicator opens the information panel in the pop up Player where you can edit the asset s rating title and tags as well as view all its properties Like most of the other indicators the information indicator can be turned on and off using the thumbnails view pop up 731 The Sky is the Li The Library preview Most types of Library asset support previewing in the Browser The capability is indicated by a preview button on the asset icon and the presence of a Show preview command on its context menu Remember too that most asset types can be previewed on the icon itself with an Alt click on the play button The
121. ct audio clips behave very similarly to clips of other types but the timeline also has some features just for audio Chapter 8 Sound and music 235 In this group of timeline toolbar buttons the first button opens the mixer panel the second creates background music and the fourth initiates a voice over For instance the timeline track header area includes a pop out mixer panel and the timeline toolbar includes a button for controlling clip dynamics with keyframes A v At the right hand end of the toolbar these buttons activate audio keyframing left and audio scrubbing right Some other buttons on the toolbar also provide audio features One lets you create a ScoreFitter background music clip another in the same group lets you record a voice over Further along on the toolbar is a toggle button for audio scrubbing which allows you to monitor audio in brief snatches as you drag the scrubber along the timeline The Library Audio and music clips enter your productions via the Library which handles audio files in wav mp3 and other standard formats When you want to add audio files to your production you can do so by dragging the desired asset from the Library Browser directly onto the timeline of your project Corrections and effects The correction tools in the Audio Editor let you apply various repairs and customizations including noise reduction compression and 236 Pinnacle Studio User Guide equalization
122. ctive visually consistent sequences that integrate artist created titles and animations with your own photos and video See The Montage section of the Library on page 181 for further information Montage titles vs standard titles Although you can make fancy titles from Montage templates these are not the same as those made in the Title Editor Each has its particular strengths Montage templates are especially easy to use and can provide effects not available in ordinary titles On the other hand the Title Editor gives you greater control over the appearance of titles and the animation of their graphical elements The template collection Each of the templates in the Library s Montage section is designed to cover a typical presentational need Within each theme the available templates are designed to complement one another when used in the same project Templates in the Library s Montage section Some details are shown e g the presence of text captions and some omitted e g ratings because of current Library settings For instance most themes provide an Opening template and a matching Ending template Many themes also provide one or more 180 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Segue templates you can use when transitioning from one video or image clip to another Montage in your project The first step in using a chosen template is to drop it onto your project s timeline Once there the Montage template i
123. ctive saturation Whereas the standard Saturation correction increases color saturation equally across the entire spectrum Selective saturation allows for individually boosting or suppressing the primary and secondary colors For example if blue appears to be too strong it can be turned down while other colors retain their intensity Adjustments During import Studio automatically detects certain parameters but a variety of factors can lead to the occasional incorrect identification Adjustments allows any of these basic image properties to be changed if needed Alpha Your photo may have an Alpha channel an 8 bit grayscale image plane that defines the transparency level of each pixel in your photo If you wish to remove the alpha channel choose the Ignore Alpha option Chapter 4 Corrections 141 Interlacing If the Interlacing options on the image were misidentified on import use this dropdown to impose the correct setting Stereoscopic 3D If the format of a 3D image file was wrongly identified on import set the correct stereoscopic layout with this dropdown list Crop Use this tool to emphasize a specific section in an image or to remove undesired components Cropping an image Bounding box cropping frame After you select the cropping tool a resizable frame is placed over the image Drag the sides and corners of the frame to crop the image or drag the center of the bounding box after cropping to adjust it
124. d Settings panel AVCHD Blu ray AVCHD Blu Ray is the transport stream version of MPEG 2 It may contain video in MPEG 2 or H264 AVC compression Its applications include HD playback on AVCHD based camcorders and Sony s PlayStation 3 home game console Settings Type AVCHD Blutay Preset Full size S3D Full size HD 720 50p AVCHD HD Disc AVCHD HD HDD Sony PS3 HD HD 1080 50p Custom Click the preset that best meets your needs or choose Custom then click the Advanced button to open the Advanced Settings panel ANI Although the AVI file type for digital video is itself widely supported the actual coding and decoding of video and audio data in an AVI file is performed by separate codec software Studio supplies a DV and an MJPEG codec If you wish to output your movie as an AVI in some other format you can use any DirectShow compatible codec installed on your PC as long as that codec is also installed on the PC that will play your movie Chapter 11 The Exporter 349 Settings Type Preset S3D AMI Full screen DV Full scrcen DV Full screen MJPEG Nintendo Wii SD Medium Small Custom Click the preset that best meets your needs or choose Custom then click the Advanced button to open the Advanced Settings panel DivX This file format based on MPEG 4 video compression technology is popular for video files disseminated over the Internet It is also supported by a rang
125. d bites transition effects titles and other assets as they are often called for your movies as easily rapidly and intuitively as possible The Pinnacle Studio Media Library The Library s classification scheme resembles what you might see in a file system viewer While the viewer groups files under their physical storage locations such as hard drives the Library groups assets under their type video photo and so on In other respects the tree view Chapter 2 The Library 17 concept for accessing subgroups of assets is virtually identical and should feel immediately familiar In addition to audio photo and video files in standard formats the Library includes specialized auxiliary media like titles and disc menus They are found along with transitions filters and other effects in the main category called Creative Elements The Library can easily manage large media holdings such as are often found nowadays even on a home system All of the dozens of media file types usable in Pinnacle Studio can be browsed organized and previewed within its integrated interface Assets are displayed either as icons or text records within collapsible folders that stack up in the Library Browser The folders may correspond either to real directories in your computer s file system or to virtual groupings based on ratings file type creation date or membership in a user defined Collection Adding assets to a project Two vie
126. d topic Installing plugs ins and bonus content As described above the Installation Manager can optionally install a rich variety of content in addition to the Pinnacle Studio application itself In a Standard Installation all available add ons and plug ins are installed In a Customized Installation you can choose exactly which items to install Even if you elect not to install particular content items during the initial installation of the application you may return to the Installation Manager at any time to update your installation System requirements In addition to your Pinnacle Studio software an efficient editing system requires certain levels of system performance as noted below Remember too that while specifications are important they do not tell the whole story For instance the proper functioning of hardware devices can also depend on manufacturer supplied driver software Checking the maker s web site for driver updates and support information can often be helpful in solving problems with graphics cards sound cards and other devices Operating system A 64 bit operating system is recommended if you are planning to edit HD material Appendix E The installation manager 437 RAM The more RAM you have the easier it is to work with Pinnacle Studio You will need at least 1 GB of RAM to achieve satisfactory operation and we highly recommend 2 GB or more If you work with HD or AVCHD video the recommendation r
127. d with the creation date of the asset in the same format as above When multiple assets are brought in in a single import operation this may mean creating or updating multiple folders Chapter 12 Setup 371 Current month This is the same as the Today option but without the day portion e g 2012 10 Scene detection This sets the default detection method for scene detection The Scene Detection Options window on page 308 Stop motion This sets the default import method for the frames you capture with the Stop Motion feature See Stop motion on page 330 Keyboard Studio provides both an extensive default set of keyboard shortcuts and a means of customizing them The Keyboard page of the Control Panel lists all commands to which shortcuts can be applied together with their currently assigned shortcuts where applicable The commands are grouped by section Watchtolders Keyboard Shortcuts Settings Audio Device Event Log Export and Preview Import Project Settings Storage Locations cted command Alt Space shortcut keys urrently used by Keyboard shortcut settings window 372 Pinnacle Studio User Guide To add a keyboard shortcut 1 Select the target command 2 Click in the Press shortcut keys edit box 3 Pressthe keys for the desired shortcut If the shortcut is currently is already in use the Shortcut currently used by dropdown list will show any conflicting commands 4 Click the Assign button to
128. deo and Audio Many standard file types are supported The purpose of the fourth subsection Missing media is described below 20 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The Projects branch of the Asset Tree contains your own Pinnacle Studio movie and disc projects You can open a project right from the Library and begin editing it or you can add it to the timeline of another project to serve as an ordinary clip Collections are custom groupings of Library media The more time you spend on media management the more you will probably use Collections They can serve as temporary holding places while you work or for classifying and setting aside media for later use Collections may be automatically generated but most are user defined Hierarchically organized Collections are also supported The top level Collections in the hierarchy are used as subsections of the Collections branch The Creative Elements branch is either a type of special effect Effects and Transitions or a special media type Ready to use royalty free collections of all seven types are included with Pinnacle Studio All Media By Folder v Projects By Folder Collections Creative Elements fX Effects Transitions Sound Effects Montage SoundStage T Tities Disc Menus Storage of Library assets Every asset in the Library every clip sound transition and so on corresponds to a file somewhere in the local storage of your computer system Th
129. dogs and cats will be displayed including the handful of photos in which both animals appear Photos with neither tag will be hidden Full selects only the assets that have all your tags Now with the same boxes checked you should see only those photos in which at least one cat and one dog appear Notice that under Partial you will see more assets displayed as you check more tags but with Full you will see fewer Turning off tag filtering When tags are set to filter the contents of the Library an orange bar at the top of the Browser lists which tags are being used To turn off filtering by an individual tag bring up the tag panel and uncheck the tag s Filter icon To turn off all filtering at once click the x button at the right hand end of the orange bar The art of tagging There is no prescribed way of using tags The best way to use them if you do is the way that works best for you Consistency is important however The more faithful and systematic you are about assigning tags to your media the more useful they will be Since the idea is to locate an asset quickly when you need it tags should be chosen to work well as search terms With family photos your tags might include the names of the people in each shot For vacation video scenes tags naming the locations visited would probably be useful Chapter 2 The Library 53 Videographic terms two shot silhouette exterior can also serve a
130. down is set to the right standard Aspect Standard 4 3 Imaging Regular 2D Size NTSC Standard DEEST Framerate PAL Standard Apply checking the Size setting You can also set the default video standard for projects on the Project Settings page of the Pinnacle Studio setup dialog 400 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Appendix B Videography To shoot good video then create from it an interesting exciting or informative movie is something anyone with a little basic knowledge can achieve Starting from a rough script or shooting plan the first step is to shoot your raw video Even at that stage you should be looking ahead to the editing phase by making sure you will have a good set of shots to work from Editing a movie involves juggling all your fragments of footage into some kind of harmonious whole It means deciding on the particular techniques transitions and effects that will best express your intent An important part of editing is the creation of a soundtrack The right sound dialog music commentary or effect can work with the visuals to create a whole greater than the sum of its parts Pinnacle Studio has the tools you need to create professional quality home video The rest is up to you the videographer Creating a shooting plan It is not always necessary to have a shooting plan but it can be very helpful for large video projects The plan can be as simple or as complex as you lik
131. e icon at the right end of the tab list and come in handy for keeping track of multiple things simultaneously Clicking within the Navigator sets the location for the current tab conversely clicking another tab transfers you to its saved location on the tree Only the assets within the chosen location are displayed in the Browser If the location has subfolders however their contents will be included To keep things simple choose a location as near the bottom of the folder hierarchy as possible Other controls let you restrict the display further by filtering out some of the assets in the chosen location Each location tab maintains its own set of filters so any change of filtering settings affects the current tab only Filter by rating The Filter by rating control at the top of the Library hides all assets that don t have at least the specified rating from one to five stars zero stars means unrated To use the filter simply click on the star that represents the minimum rating you want to bother with The default filter setting is to show all assets regardless of rating See Inadvertent filtering on page 49 for instructions on switching off all filters at once To deactivate just the rating filter click the last selected star or double click any star Chapter 2 The Library 47 Library Movie Rating filter t Rating Display only items with the selected rating and higher In this close up three stars are h
132. e A simple list of planned scenes might be enough or you might also want to include some notes regarding detailed camera directions or prepared dialog The really ambitious can go all the way to a full fledged script in which every single camera angle is Appendix B Videography 401 described in detail along with notes about duration lighting and props Title Jack on the kart track No Camera angle Text Audio Duration Date 1 Jack s face with helmet Jack is driving his first 11 sec Tue camera zooms out race 06 22 Noise of engines in the background 2 On the starting line Music is played in the hall 8 sec Tue driver s perspective low noise of engines 06 22 camera position 3 Manwitha starting flag Let s go 12sec Tue is accompanied into the Carry out the start add 06 22 scene to the start starting signal position Camera stays man goes out of the scene after start 4 Jackon the start Music from the hall no 9 sec Tue position from the front longer audible fade up 06 22 camera follows shows same music from CD over Jack up to the bend noise of engines now from behind 5 Draft of a simple shooting plan Editing Using varying perspectives An important event should always be shot from varying perspectives and camera positions Later during editing you can use the best camera angles alone or in combination Make a conscious effort to 402 Pinnacle Studio User Guide
133. e By default the effect is presented in Standard mode in which a single Depth slider lets you control the amount of divergence between the left and right frames whether to correct or match source material or as a special effect The advanced mode offers separate Shift and Zoom control groups each containing a Horizontal and a Vertical slider The Shift sliders let you control the divergence between the left and right frames while the Zoom sliders control their magnification Both properties can be controlled independently in the horizontal and vertical dimensions but by default the Zoom aspect ratio is locked Click the lock icon to adjust the horizontal and vertical zoom independently Chapter 5 Effects 171 THE SKY IS THE LIMIT MPG Mooe Honzontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical The Shift settings in the S3D Depth Control effect allow you to change the relative position of the left and right eyes horizontally and vertically S3D Eye Selector The Eye Selector effect is presented in two variations one for left eye and the other for right it is used for uniting left and right eye video streams on a 3D timeline A pair of clips at the same timeline index one for left eye and the other for right eye can be combined to produce stereoscopic output by applying the eye selector effect to the upper clip The effect can also be employed to extract either the left or right stream from a 3D clip by setting the Source to Left
134. e This mode displays the frames for both eyes horizontally adjacent to each other with the left eye on the left and the right eye on right When editing no stereoscopic equipment is needed Differential Differential mode is good for detecting the depth of an image more easily and especially for revealing areas of zero depth Differential mode show a 5096 gray for areas where identical information is being presented to both eyes a color difference is shown if the areas are not identical If 2D material is added to a stereoscopic 3D timeline in differential mode since the same content is shown to both eyes the image will be a uniform gray Checkerboard Checkerboard mode breaks the image up into EJ a 16 x 9 checkerboard pattern The white squares of the checkerboard contain the view from one eye the black squares the other Checkerboard mode provides a quick check on the ways the left and right frames differ across the whole image 3D TV Side by Side Use this mode to preview stereoscopic jG content on a 3D TV display or with a 3D projector by connecting it as a second monitor This obviates the need for a special graphics card or additional hardware Configure the second display to operate in its native resolution and to extend your desktop not just mirror it Make sure the input format is side by side Chapter 2 The Library 45 In the Control Panel Preview settings choose Second Monitor from the Show
135. e and is permanent once it is assigned Transition A bridging effect between adjacent video or audio clips ranging from a simple cut to a showy animated effect Common transitions like cuts fades dissolves wipes slides and audio cross fades are part of the language of film and video They can convey passages of time and changes of viewpoint concisely and often subliminally 424 Pinnacle Studio User Guide TrueColor The name indicates an image with enough color resolution to appear true to life In practice TrueColor normally refers to 24 bit RGB color which allows about 16 7 million combinations of the red green and blue primary colors See Bit HiCo or TWAIN driver TWAIN is a standardized software interface allowing graphics and capture programs to communicate with devices that supply graphical data If the TWAIN driver is installed the capture function of a graphics application can be used to load images directly from your video source into the program The driver supports 32 bit programs only and captures images in 24 bit mode VCR Video cassette recorder VHS Video Home System Popular video standard for home VCRs Half inch tape is used to store composite signals incorporating both brightness and color information VISCA Protocol used with certain devices for controlling external video sources from computers Video8 Analog video system using 8mm tape Video8 recorders generate com
136. e automatic background music are generated with special tools Both project editors include embedded versions of the Library and the Player in addition to the timeline display To build a project drag assets from the compact Library onto the timeline tracks where they are known as clips Both the Movie Editor and the Disc Editor can be used with Stereoscopic 3D as well as 2D material The preview type control above the Player lets you switch between viewing the current Library asset source and the current timeline clip In the Disc Editor an additional preview type menu lets you use the Player as an editor for linking disc menus to points on the project timeline Timeline editing a central activity in project authoring Chapter 3 The Movie Editor on page 65 The media editors Additional windows are often needed for working with particular types of media In general you can open an editor window appropriate to any asset or clip by double clicking the item 12 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Corrections from the Library The editors for the standard media types of video photo and audio are particularly important When invoked from the Library by double clicking an asset each of these editors provides a suite of correction tools appropriate to its media type These tools can be applied directly to Library assets in order to remove camera shake from video trim unwanted material from a photo or suppress audio
137. e then add a transition of the desired type to one of the clips Select all the clips in the set bring up the context menu on the clip with the transition and choose the ripple transition command This will apply the original transition to all the selected clips If the original clip had both an In transition and an Out transition you can choose either one to be rippled Any of the selected clips that already have a transition in place or that are too short for the new transition will not be altered Removing multiple transitions To remove transitions from several clips at once select the clips right click on one of them and use the remove transitions command in the context menu All the transitions both in and out will be removed from the selected clips 120 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Replacing a transition Select the transition you want and simply drag it onto an existing transition This replaces the transition animation while retaining the original type in or out and duration Alternatively you can choose Replace by on either the transition s context menu or the clip s context menu You will be offered a selection of transitions to use Adjusting transitions The durations of transitions can be adjusted just like those of clips Notice the adjustment pointer when the mouse is positioned near the vertical side of the transition rectangle Use this to change the duration of your transition As usual fade out tran
138. e Clipboard Right click in the transition area in the upper corner at the start or end of a clip to access the Transition context menu Select Cut or Copy to put the transition on the Clipboard As with effects transitions can be pasted to one or more target clips but any existing transition of the type start or end being pasted will be overwritten The paste fails if the duration of the transition on the Clipboard is longer than the target clip Speed The Speed Control window is launched by selecting Speed gt Add or Speed gt Edit in the context menu of a timeline video or audio clip You can adjust the settings to produce any degree of slow motion or fast motion over a wide range A clip to which Speed Control has been applied is marked by a broken yellow line Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 113 Constant 125 If Constant is selected when the clip is trimmed on the current timeline the speed will be adjusted so that the anchor frame selected below remains at the same position on the timeline Anchor First frame Current frame Last frame Stretch If Stretch is selected when the clip is trimmed on the current timeline the speed will be adjusted so that the first frame and the last frame are always at the start and end of the chp Video Reverse Smooth Motion Audio Hold Pitch The Speed Control window The actual playback speed of your project always remains the same It is set once and for all by t
139. e Editor s Presets Selector After entering your text and with the text layer still selected apply any of the preset Looks to it with a single mouse click To make it even easier as you hover the mouse over any Look icon the Edit Window previews the effect on your title of applying the Look to the current layer Even if you can t find exactly the Look you want among the presets you can often save time by starting with one that s almost what you want then tweaking it in the Look Settings subpanel 200 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Motions The Presets Selector with the Looks tab selected Clicking the name of one of the listed preset families opens a pop down tray of icons To give your title some visual impact there s nothing like a bit of animation Click the Motions tab of the Presets Selector The three groups of presets available correspond to phases in the life of a layer The Motion presets are categorized by the role they play in introducing the layer displaying it or removing it from view As with Looks Motions can be previewed as they will appear in your title by hovering the mouse over any of the preset icons Once your mind is made up you can apply the chosen Motion with a single click Preset Looks The Looks tab of the Title Editor Presets Selector provides visual styles that can be applied to the text and shape layers in your title Previewing Looks To preview a particular Look on a particular layer
140. e Library doesn t own these files and never modifies them Chapter 2 The Library 21 unless specifically requested to do so Rather it keeps track of their names locations and properties in an internal database The information stored also includes any tags and ratings with which you have annotated particular items and the parameters of any correction filters you have applied The database The files that make up the Library database are stored in a folder with single user rather than shared access rights under Microsoft Windows If Pinnacle Studio is used on your computer by multiple users with individual log ins a separate Library will be created for each Missing media Operations like adding removing and renaming a Library asset are database operations that have no effect on the media file itself When you remove an asset from the Library an option on the confirmation dialog box does let you go one step further and delete the actual file as well but the option is off by default you have to specifically request the action By the same token when you delete or move an asset file in Windows Explorer or another application outside of Pinnacle Studio the database record of the file continues to exist Since the Library can t actually access the file however an error graphic is added to the file s listing If the file still exists but has simply been moved to another folder or device relinking it to the Library is eas
141. e Scene Detection Options window lisse 308 The Metadata panel mirean datg pis ana at eee 309 The Filename panel s t Sutin sta now A ctae re 310 Selecting assets for import lille 312 Selecting files for Import 0 llis esses 313 Customizing the browser 0 0 0 0 00 cece eee eee 318 Adjusting the import file date and time 320 Scal Tor assets ces d Lael tube galt a Wh Bed de dle 320 Import from DV or HDV camera is sees 321 Import from analog sources 0 0 0 cee ee 327 Import from DVD or Blu ray Disc o a aaa aaua eee 328 Import from digital cameras 0 0 2 0 eee eee 330 Stop MOON o3 it edi Goh oak Pin hives Backs 330 Snapshot 2220 4004 tune burda Se end AS MR Un PAS 333 Chapter 11 The Exporter 000000 eeu 337 Output to disc or memory card 2 else sss 341 Qutput to3tile x s us t e SC CR 345 Output to cloud i dus eos RAE Pensa ae th ER 357 Output toa device ssid een we FREE edu EXER 362 Chapter 12 Setup assau 365 Watchfoldets iy tcc ssa kod teak vended Dupin Un des 366 AUGIO devices e cuc dd c RENE SEARCH TL ud 366 Everit logalhg iaceo nne sre e DEC Rao Sm godes 366 Export and Preview Sees lisse ess 366 Itporte mote E A Er Me Mi SE Me 370 Keyboatd oct opp e suo cot tr auti s dete e seu 372 Project settings lesse 374 Contents v Storage Ocations 1s s ao hod Hs WIRE rece ea ee 375 Chapter 13 Screen capture 0 002 377 Sta
142. e button allows you to adjust the speaker volume of your system It does not change the audio level of any clips on your timeline The counters show the duration of the title and the current position of the Layer List timeline scrubber in the usual hours minutes seconds and frames format For titles that come from your project rather than the Library the scrubber position shown is relative to the start of your project s timeline not the start of the clip 00 00 03 00 TC 00 00 00 08 Editing layers and Motions When a layer is created its duration is set to the full span of the title of which it is a part To delay the first appearance of a layer in the running title or to banish one layer while continuing others drag the ends of the layer along the timeline in the same fashion as clip editing on the timeline of your project A title is like a stage on which the layers are actors who come on for their big scene and then depart Trimming the layers in the Layer List timeline allows you to control precisely the timing of their entrances and exits Up to three Motions one of each type are allowed to each layer These are also displayed on the timeline where their durations too can Chapter 7 The Title Editor 229 be adjusted Enter and exit Motions are each anchored to their respective ends of the layer lifespan but the end of the enter Motion and the start of the exit Motion can be freely edited with the mouse If
143. e by Ctrl clicking the contour line This inserts both a new keyframe at the point you clicked and a second one with the volume set to zero If you clicked in the first half of the clip the second keyframe is added at the start to create a fade in if you clicked in the second half of the clip a fade out is created by placing the second keyframe at the end Create abrupt level changes by dragging horizontal sections between neighboring keyframes up or down This produces vertical steps in the volume contour Reposition swells and fades by dragging ramps rising or falling sections of the contour line laterally within the clip Reposition control handles in two dimensions to any allowed point between their immediate neighbors or the ends of the clip You can simultaneously change both the time index of the keyframe and the clip volume that will take effect when playback reaches it The arrows in this illustration show the uses of the mouse in keytrame editing An individual control point can be dragged in all directions Ramps and flat sections are respectively limited to horizontal and vertical movement only Delete a keyframe by dragging it onto another keyframes or by moving it vertically away from the contour Chapter 8 Sound and music 255 Set a linear fade in or fade out by dragging either of the upper corners of the clip horizontally toward the center Notice before you start that the unfolded corner of the clip become
144. e current layer containing the clip you are working on On other occasions you can simplify a complex editing situation by turning off the other track Solo mode is started or stopped with the Solo button En and its accompanying dropdown menu in the lower right area of the media editor Three configurations are possible e Off When soloing is on clicking once on the button will turn it off All layers from the timeline are then used in the preview Sometimes the current layer may be obscured by a layer above it on the timeline 158 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Show media and the tracks below Under this option the current layer and all layers below it are previewed but the clips on layers above the current layer are hidden Show media only This option allows only the layer you are currently working on to appear in the preview Previewing effects In the Creative Elements section of the Library you can preview a sample of each effect either directly on the icons in thumbnails view or in the separate Player window These samples will give you some idea about the look of the effect but can often do no more than hint at the possibilities that will be available once customization keyframing and combination with other effects are considered As mentioned earlier you can see the effect previewed on your own media without actually applying it by hovering over the effect icon in a timeline clip s media editor Then to apply t
145. e folder view starts in the closed position Please see page 253 for further information Stop motion The Stop Motion function of the Importer allows you to create animated films by stitching together frames grabbed from a live video source such as an analog video camera or webcam The result of your Stop Motion import will be either a movie at 8 or 12 frames per second the collection of still images you grabbed or both depending on Mode panel settings To prepare for Stop Motion import make sure the source device is switched on then select it by name under the Stop Motion heading in the Import From panel of the Importer See The Import From panel on page 294 330 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Import from NE HDV Canor D e Video E o DV n Q Blu Ray M mputer ute Dazzle Video Capture Before starting the capture make sure that your destination folder options and file name are set up in the other panels the way you want them For more information see Importer panels on page 294 If your source equipment is functioning correctly you should have a live preview in the central area of the Importer window Click the full screen button at the right hand end of the transport bar to preview on the full monitor screen When you are ready to capture an image click the Capture Frame button A thumbnail of the grabbed frame is added to the Image Tray at the bottom of the window For more information s
146. e is LFE Subwoofer which lets you either activate or deactivate the Subwoofer channel for a particular clip or to stay with the Library s setting determined on import Compressor A compressor smooths the dynamics instant by instant in an audio signal scaling back the loud sections while typically boosting the overall sound This gives the impression of a stronger signal even though the level peaks are not higher after compression than before Light compression is very commonly applied in audio mastering of music tracks Compression can also be used creatively in numerous ways depending on the material Preset list Choose from a number of premade parameter sets for the compression filter Ratio This control sets the compression ratio which is the amount of compression applied to sections of the input signal that exceed the Threshold setting For example a 2 1 compression ratio means that a 2 dB increase of source level above the threshold produces only a 1 db increase in the output level The allowed range is from 1 1 no compression up to 100 1 hard limiting Threshold All levels above this setting are attenuated by the value set in Ratio You can apply an overall boost with the Gain controller to compensate for the level lost Chapter 8 Sound and music 245 Attack and Release Attack governs how quickly the compressor responds to an audio signal that has crossed the threshold Larger values delay the onset of compression
147. e mode to allow the preferred placement E Magnet mode simplifies the insertion of clips during Volume keyframe editing The volume keyframe editing button toggles keyframe 1 based editing of clip audio While the button is engaged the green volume contour on each timeline clip becomes editable In this mode you can add control points to the contour drag contour sections and other operations While the button is off the volume keyframes are protected against modification Opening the Audio Mixer automatically activates the button Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 83 Audio scrubbing By default the audio portion of a project can be heard only during playback in the preview The audio scrubbing button on the timeline toolbar provides an audio preview even while just scrubbing through your movie by dragging the timeline scrubber control The shuttle wheel of the Player also provides audio scrubbing Editing mode The editing mode selector at the right hand end of the timeline toolbar determines the behavior of other clips when editing changes are made Material to the left of the edit point is never affected in timeline editing so this applies only to clips that extend rightward from the edit point Three choices of editing mode are available smart insert and overwrite The default is smart in which Pinnacle Studio selects from insert overwrite and sometimes more complex strategies in the context of each editing opera
148. e n is a number e g COM2 See Parallel port SIF Standard Image Format An MPEG 1 format specifying a resolution of 352 x 288 under PAL and 352 x 240 under NTSC See MPEG QSIF Appendix C Glossary 423 Single frame A single frame is part of a series or sequence When this series is viewed at sufficient speed the illusion of a moving picture is created Software codec Compression method that can create and play back compressed digital video sequences without special hardware The quality of the sequences depends on the performance of the complete system See Codec Hardware codec Still video Still images or freeze frames extracted from video S VHS Improved version of VHS using S Video and metal particle tape to deliver higher luminance resolution resulting in sharper pictures than VHS See VHS S Video S Video With S Video Y C signals the brightness luminance or Y and the color chrominance or C information are transferred separately using multiple wires avoiding modulating and demodulating the video and the resulting loss of picture quality Timecode Timecode identifies the position of each frame in a video sequence with respect to a starting point normally the beginning of the shot The usual format is H M S F hours minutes seconds frames e g 01 22 13 21 Unlike a tape counter which can be zeroed or reset at any point in a tape timecode is an electronic signal written onto videotap
149. e of DivX compatible hardware devices from DVD players to portable and handheld units 350 Settings Type Preset S3D DivX Full screen Full screen Medium Small x Sony PS3 SD Microsoft Xbox SD High Definition Custom Pinnacle Studio User Guide Click the preset that best meets your needs or choose Custom then click the Advanced button to open the Advanced Settings panel DivX Plus HD This file format based on H264 video compression technology is popular for HD video files disseminated over the Internet Settings Type DivX Plus FD Preset Full screen S3D Full HD Full screer High Definition Custom Click whichever of the quality presets matches your needs or choose Custom then click the Advanced button to open the Advanced Settings panel Flash Video Studio supports output in Flash Video flv format version 7 Virtually all current web browsers are able to display this popular format which has been widely adopted by social networking sites and news sites Chapter 11 The Exporter 351 Settings Type FlashVideo Preset Full screen S3D Full screen Nintendo Wii Medium Small Custom Click the quality preset that matches your needs or choose Custom then click the Advanced button to open the Advanced Settings panel Image A frame of your video project can be exported as an image a JPG TIF or Custom If you select the Custom option use the Advanced button
150. e of navigation pressing the first letter of a font name will take you instantly to the corresponding alphabetical location in the list Click the font you want or move to the name using the up and down arrow keys and press Enter EddadA Edwardian Serpe ITC Elephant E w Wwe To select a font open the dropdown list and click the one you want The font is applied to the currently highlighted text only Font size The Title Editor provides several methods of setting the font size You can enter a new value directly into the font size edit field up to 360 or use the neighboring dropdown arrow to display a list of sizes Further to the right the shrink font and enlarge font buttons change the size in intervals that widen as the font size increases He Copying and pasting text styles With both text and shape layers the Copy Attributes and Paste Attributes context menu items found by right clicking on a the control frame in the Edit Window let you copy Looks from one layer to 220 Pinnacle Studio User Guide another without having to open the Looks section of the Presets Selector With text this operation also replicates the font name size and style from one text layer to another and also works on partial selections within text layers Text alignment For titles with multiple lines of text the Title Editor provides a standard menu of justification options The default for new text layers is center justifi
151. e rendering items requiring intensive computation such as video effects The changes made here apply only to future file operations any existing files remain in their current locations Delete render files You can delete render files to save space without concern over permanently losing data Note however the files will be recreated the next time your project needs to be rendered Chapter 12 Setup 375 376 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Chapter 13 Screen capture Record computer actions and mouse movement by using the screen capture feature in Pinnacle Studio This feature lets you create videos that require visualization in a few easy steps You can also define the capture area for more emphasis and focus or integrate voice overs This section contains the following topics Starting a screen capture project Recording your screen Starting a screen capture project To open the Screen Capture window Click the Live Screen Capturing program tile on the Start screen Windows 8 or select Live Screen Capturing from the programs list in Start menu Windows 7 or earlier The capture area frame automatically covers the entire screen by default and appears along with the Screen Capture toolbar Chapter 13 Screen capture 377 Screen Capture toolbar basics Part Description 1 Capture area frame Specifies the display area to capture This covers the entire screen by default 2 Recording Controls Contains the
152. e timeline and timeline editing These are described in order from left to right Customizing the toolbar The timeline toolbar can accommodate numerous buttons to help editing go more smoothly One set of buttons is available for the Movie Editor and a somewhat larger set for the Disc Editor The Customize toolbar button ial at the far left of the toolbar lets you choose which subset of the available buttons you wish to display Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 77 Select All ark In l Trim Mode lark Out 24 Transitions hill Audio Mixer W Reset Mark In Out Magnetic Snapping 6 Scorefitter EE Sp Volume Keyframing T Title Je Selec Audio Scrub Voice Over E Snapshot Editing Options Markers The Customize toolbar panel with all available buttons selected for display Clicking the button brings up a panel upon which all the other toolbar buttons can be individually set as visible or hidden The gray check marks beside the Timeline settings button and a few others indicate that these buttons are not optional and will be displayed as a matter of course Check or uncheck the boxes for the optional buttons until the toolbar has been configured to your liking or check the Select all box to display all of the buttons Some of the commands invoked by buttons also have keyboard shortcuts These work whether the button is displayed or not See Appendix D Keyboard shortcuts on page 427 for more information Timeline
153. e to the expansion bus IEEE 1394 Developed by Apple Computers and introduced as FireWire this is a serial data transmission protocol with rates up to 400 Mbits sec Sony offers a slightly modified version for transmitting DV signals named i LINK providing transmission speeds up to 100 Mbits sec Image An image is a reproduction or picture of something The term is often applied to digitized pictures consisting of pixels that can be shown on a computer display and manipulated by software Image compression Method of reducing the amount of data required to store digital image and video files Interlaced The screen refresh method used by television systems The PAL TV image consists of two interleaved image halves fields of 31214 lines each The NTSC TV image consists of two image halves of 24214 lines each The fields are displayed alternately to produce a blended image Interleave An arrangement of audio and video to promote smoother playback and synchronization or compression The standard AVI format equally spaces audio and video O Input Output IRQ Interrupt Request An interrupt is a temporary break in the main processing stream of a computer so that housekeeping or background tasks can be performed Interrupts can be requested by either hardware e g keyboard mouse or software Appendix C Glossary 419 JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group and the standard developed by them for compressing digi
154. ect gt Edit on the colored strip that appears along the upper edge of clips to which any effects have been applied To close the media editor window Doone ofthe following Click the Cancel button leaving the clip unchanged Click the close X button in the upper right corner If you have made changes you will be given a chance to save them Click the OK button confirming your changes Previewing The central panel in each of the media editors is either a visual preview of media showing the result of applying corrections and effects or an audio visualization When video media with an integral soundtrack is being edited both the Audio Editor and the Video Editor are available via tabs at the top left of the window Video Previewing stereoscopic 3D images Stereoscopic 3D images are edited in the same way as 2D images but there is an additional Preview window which is shown only for 3D images The window shows the edited picture in stereoscopic 3D whereas the working area is shown in 2D The Preview window also has a switcher for changing the stereoscopic 3D preview mode Chapter 4 Corrections 131 Title bar File and Edit menus If you invoked the media editor from the Library the File menu offers the ability to save a new copy or Shortcut of the currently loaded asset A Shortcut is a special type of asset that has its own parameters and settings but applies them to a media file that is already assoc
155. ect parameters can be arbitrarily varied throughout the clip Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 123 To apply a specific effect to a clip either locate it in the Effects section of the Library and drag it to the clip you want to enhance or double click the clip and select the effect from those offered under the Effects tab of the clip s media editor Multiple effects can be applied to a clip using either or both of these methods By default multiple effects are processed for playback in the order they were added On the timeline the upper border of any clip to which an effect has been applied is drawn in magenta This clip effect indicator has its own context menu which provides the Clipboard commands for cutting and copying effects between clips See Using the Clipboard on page 111 for more information Double clicking any clip opens it in its media editor where effects may be added removed or configured Please see Chapter 5 Effects on page 153 for detailed information Clip context menus Right clicking a clip opens a context menu with commands appropriate to the item type A video clip has a different menu than a title clip for example Some commands are shared between most or all types however Differences of applicability are noted in the following descriptions Edit movie Available only for movie container clips this command opens the container in its own movie editor The nested editor offers the same functions a
156. ected element is highlighted with an orange frame To Chapter 5 Effects 163 move forward to the next element use Tab use Shift Tab to move backward Numeric parameters are controlled by horizontal sliders with a gray bar that you can drag horizontally to change the value For more precise control use the Left or Right arrow Double click the bar to reset a particular parameter to its default value Most effects furnish a dropdown list of preset parameter combinations for fast selection of variants Once a preset has been selected you can customize it by editing the parameters if desired When you are finished with a media editor and are ready to return to the timeline click OK at the bottom of the window to approve your changes or Cancel to abandon them Working with keyframes The normal use of some types of effect is to transform the source material in a uniform way from beginning to end Atmospheric effects like Old film and effects that change only the coloration of the clip are among those in this category Their parameters are generally set once and for all at the start of the clip This is the static use of an effect Other effects such as Water drop depend on a sense of motion They are likely to be effective only when their parameters are allowed to vary throughout the clip The easiest way to this animated use of an effect is to use a preset that has animation built in like most of those for Water drop In this
157. ection name toggles between the default and custom values of all parameters Linked parameters Some parameters are configured to change in lock step The presence of a lock symbol indicates this Click the symbol to toggle the link Chapter 4 Corrections 135 Image Correction CPU ect preset Automatics White Balance Levels Fundamentals Brightness Contrast Temperature Saturation Clarity Haze E White Balance The settings panel lets you adjust the available settings for a correction or effect Here the settings for the Enhance group of photo corrections are displayed Photo editing tools These tools are located on the bottom bar of the Photo Editor They are available for photos and other graphic images loaded from the Library only Images opened from the timeline do not have access to them 136 Pinnacle Studio User Guide For information about opening the Photo Editor to access the correction tools along with general functions of the media editors please see Media editing overview on page 130 Image rotation Two rotary arrow icons are located to the left below the image preview Click the icons to rotate a Library image either clockwise or counterclockwise in 90 degree increments Rotation is only available in the Photo Editor when a photo is opened from the Library Clips opened from a project s timeline can be rotated using the 2D Editor effect Before and after When editing photos
158. ects just discussed pan and zoom can be animated with keyframes to create any desired combination of simulated pan and zoom camera moves within the boundaries of a single photo For more information about Correction tools and the media editors see Chapter 4 Corrections on page 127 and Chapter 5 Effects on page 153 The Player The Player is a preview screen in which you can examine Library media play back your movie project work on disc menus and much more In each window or context in which it is used the Player exhibits somewhat different controls For an introduction to the Player and its basic controls please see The Library preview on page 41 For the use of the Player in trim mode on the timeline see Clip operations on page 97 For information on using the Player with Montage see Using the Montage Editor on page 191 For the use of the Player in editing disc menus see Previewing disc menus on page 275 Pinnacle Studio Projects The movies and discs that you create in Pinnacle Studio are distilled from the projects that you build on the timeline of the Movie Editor or the Disc Editor 14 Pinnacle Studio User Guide To manage projects Studio must keep track of everything that goes onto your timeline and all the editing decisions you make with regard to trimming adding effects and much more Much of this information is stored in the project file which is in axp Studio Movie format In order to conserve ha
159. ed on it To resize a temporary group drag any control point of any member s control frame Each layer is affected individually expanding or contracting in place about its own center In resizing operations on groups as with individual layers dragging by a corner control point preserves the aspect ratio of the layer whereas dragging by a side control point allows the proportions to be altered Applying properties to a group Once a temporary group is selected any property settings you make will affect every member to which the property is applicable Chapter 7 The Title Editor 233 If you apply a Look any text or shape member will receive it If you add a Motion by right clicking a Motion icon and choosing Add to selected layer s the result will be the same as if you had added it to each member individually If you select a font or change any other text styling attribute every text member of the temporary group will be updated Except in the first case permanent groups have their own rules for these operations If you apply a Look it works the same as with a temporary group all text and shape layers in the group are affected If you add a Motion to a permanent group the group is treated for the purposes of animation as a single graphic object without regard to the letters words or lines its members may contain However the individual Motions of its members continue to run along with that of the group as a whole
160. ed to the local hard drive Chapter 10 The Importer 305 Mode Import mode LINK Delete original YES Ignore duplicates YES Delete original When this option is enabled the original copies of the files you import will be deleted after copying This option is handy if you are using the Importer to consolidate your assets and don t want your hard drive cluttered with redundant copies Ignore duplicates This option helps you deal with redundant media files or project files you already have by telling the Importer not to import extra copies of files that may be differently named but are apparently identical Import options for stop motion capture In stop motion animation a series of individual frames is captured from a live video source Depending on your plans for the stop motion sequence you can instruct the Importer to integrate the individual frames into a movie or simply import each frame as a picture or both Mode Import as PHOTO BOTH 306 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The Compression Options window The options provided in the Mode panel for both DV HDV and analog import include access to this window for fine tuning compression preferences If you select either of the DV and MPEG presets you can use this window to review the actual settings used Editing the settings here automatically selects the Custom preset Because some options are contingent on others not all will be visible simultaneo
161. edia types handled by the application When used from the main view of the Library the Player opens in a separate window When the compact Library is used an embedded version of the Player appears in the same window For more information see The Player on page 14 Chapter 1 Using Pinnacle Studio 9 Previewing a Library video asset in the resizable Player window with full transport controls including a shuttle wheel You can keep working in the main window while the pop up Player is open For comprehensive coverage of the Library and its uses please see Chapter 2 The Library on page 17 The next step The next step once you know your way around the Library and have made any changes needed to the default set up is to start creating a movie There are two ways to go about this The usual way If you want to exert detailed control over the way media assets are used in your production you will usually start building your movie or disc project from scratch in one of the two project editors These are described below 10 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The easiest way For ultra quick results the Library offers another way Clicking SmartMovie at the bottom of the Library main view opens an extra tray of controls With either of these you select some visual media assets to serve as the basis of the project choose music for a soundtrack and make a handful of other customizations Then the software takes over automati
162. ee Using the Image Tray on page 335 Since this is a stop motion sequence after each image is grabbed you will generally make small changes to the scene you are shooting in order to create the illusion of motion from frame to frame To make your task of visualization easier the Stop Motion preview includes an onion skin effect whereby successive frames are shown Chapter 10 The Importer 331 simultaneously in translucent layers so that the differences can be clearly seen This feature can be configured on the control bar The number of images shot so far and the duration of the film based on the number of images rounded off are displayed to the right below the control bar The Stop Motion control bar This bar provides transport and other functions for Stop Motion import From left to right Video and Frames indicators These let you switch between previewing the live video feed and previewing the captured frames in the Image Tray You can review and if necessary replace particular frames without having to undo other work e Counter This readout shows your current position within the animation in hour minutes seconds and frames The counter value depends on the number of frames you have grabbed and the animation speed in frames per second The up and down arrow buttons to the left of the counter provide single stepping when previewing your animation Navigation buttons These buttons are for previewing
163. ee Mee Rae Ses 146 Video corrections 0 6 cect eee 149 Stabilize cz os REESE RAD IRE oe RS 152 Gorrecting AUCIO s st d erret e xat eame qol ma 152 Chapter 5 Effects 0 liliis eres 153 Effects in the media editors liliis essen 155 Effects on the timeline llle sees 159 The Settings panell s o oe e ae d des XEM sau 161 Working with keyframes lisse 164 Video and photo effects liliis 167 Working with transitions llle 172 Palicand zoomr ex bad tese EE tu ces qe eed AR 174 Chapter 6 Montage 000 eee eee eee 179 The Montage section of the Library aasa sanaaa aaan 181 Using montage templates 0 000 e eee eee 182 Montage clips on the timeline 0 0 2 00 2000 008 184 Anatomy of a template nananana acta ish enligiad deka 187 Montageediting ix ambe ahs aani Ern ase hae packs 190 Using the Montage Editor 0 0 0 esses 191 Chapter 7 The Title Editor 00 00 eee 195 Launching and leaving the Title Editor 197 Tie EIbraby oce tto ERE th ERR et osten 199 The Presets Selector llle 200 Preset EOOKS HR SEE ace eee SOT TO IA Saha 201 Preset Motlons tic e iO et eo eter e 202 Creating and editing titles 2 liiis sess 205 Background settings arene 0 0 0 cece ee eee 207 LOOK settings 5 im ees ie we oe Vane dee a 209 Contents iii The Edit window eee RR 213 Text and text settings lesse ee
164. een the track headers to seamlessly adjust the height View waveforms Toggle the waveform view for audio clips Please see Audio on the timeline on page 251 for coverage of Timeline audio functions Editing Movies The first step in any movie editing session is to bring your project into the Movie Editor to begin work To launch a new production Choose File gt New gt Movie from the main menu Before adding your first clip make sure that the timeline video format will be right for the project see below 88 Pinnacle Studio User Guide To edit an existing movie Select a recent project from the File gt Recent menu click File gt Open to browse for a movie project to open or locate the movie you want to open in the Projects folder of the Library and double click the thumbnail If your movie has been stored as a project package it must be unpacked before editing Find your project in the Studio Projects group in the Library and use the Unpack project package command on the thumbnail s context menu Show in Explorer Rer Unpack Project Package Edit caption Apply tag Apply rating Display information A project package thumbnail in the Library with the context menu open After unpacking the movie will appear on the project s timeline ready for editing Alternatively you can click File gt Open and find the project package in Explorer by choosing Studio Project Package axx in the file extension box
165. eeping in sync Trimming a gap whether at the start or the end is accomplished in exactly the same way described above for trimming a clip T the sky is the limit mpg Two gaps and an audio out point have been selected for trimming Because one trip point has been created on each track the entire production stays in sync when trimmed Trim both In this operation two adjacent clips or a clip and an adjacent gap are trimmed simultaneously Any frames added to the left hand item are taken away from the one on the right and vice versa as long as space and material are available All you are moving is the cut point where the items meet One application for this technique is adjusting visual cuts to the beat of a music soundtrack Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 107 To start click at the end of the left hand clip to open the first trim point then Ctrl click at the beginning of the right hand clip to open the second When positioned over the adjacent trim points you just opened the mouse pointer should be a horizontal two headed arrow Drag left or right to move the clip boundary or use the Player in trim mode yp brediey mp4 00 00 20 0 00 00 24 00 00 00 28 00 Trim both Adjacent out and in trim points have been selected Dragging the trim points affects the timing of the hand off from the outgoing clip to the incoming one but does not disrupt the timeline Slip trim To change the starting frame of a clip withi
166. el allow you to add remove and navigate between keyframes The Add Chapter 8 Sound and music 259 symbol automatically switches to Delete if you are positioned on an existing keyframe s position Audio creation tools The Movie Editor provides two authoring tools that allow you to build your own soundtrack rather than depending solely on Library supplied media Both tools are accessed with buttons on the toolbar above the timeline of your project ScoreFitter is Pinnacle Studio s resident composer You can use it to generate either incidental music or a full background scores for your production ScoreFitter music clips can be of any desired length and take only seconds to specify and create in the style of your choice By default a ScoreFitter clip exists only within your project but you can also save particular music selections to the Library for re use Just above the timeline in the project editor the ScoreFitter button under the mouse pointer and voice over button far right provide access to tools that let you author new audio material The voice over tool lets you record live material vocal or otherwise using a microphone attached to your computer Its most common use is for voice overs and narrative tracks but you can record any sound at all providing it can be produced on cue The tool creates an audio file that is automatically imported to the Library then added to your project at the scrubber location The
167. eline area and release the button Either of these abandons the drag and drop operation To call back a drag and drop after it s complete press Ctrl Z or click the undo button Don t forget that you can vary many timeline editing operations with alternative mode just press and hold Alt while dragging or trimming In a one for one clip replacement Shift is also significant Advanced drag and drop After you have assembled an assortment of clips on a timeline track it s only matter of time before you want to start changing things around For instance you might want to 92 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Filla gap with clips Insert some clips before a specific clip Replace a clip already on the timeline with a different one The smart editing mode helps you achieve these goals with ease Filling a gap Smart mode makes it simple to fill a particular timeline gap with new material for example Rather than having to painstakingly pre trim the new material to the space available you simply drag items into the gap Any clips that are not needed for filling the gap will be dropped and the last clip used will automatically be trimmed to the appropriate length No clips already on the timeline are affected so no synchronization problems can result Inserting clips Suppose that your goal is to add new material to the timeline at a point where there is an existing clip You don t want the clip already there to be overwritten ho
168. enerating a name based on either the current date or the creation date of the imported material Click either set subfolder or the more button E for the media type to access the subfolder options See Setting a subfolder on page 302 For example if you set your main video folder to cid and your subfolder naming method to Current month any video you import will be transferred to a folder with a name like c vid 2012 10 Fill level indicator This bar graph shows for each import destination how much room is left on the storage device The first part of the bar represents space already occupied on the device The colored extension 300 Pinnacle Studio User Guide shows how much room will be required by any currently selected media files or project files awaiting import Project B Available storage space display Note If a destination device reaches 98 per cent full during import the operation is halted at that point Selecting an import folder To choose a different base folder for a given asset type click the corresponding folder button or folder name on the Import To panel This opens a folder selection box where you can navigate to and if necessary create the folder you want to use Import to Video lin n S Folders that contain subfolders are indicated with a plus icon to the left of the folder icon if they are currently closed and a minus icon if they are open Clicking the icon reverses the state of
169. enu with its own buttons The possible targets for menu buttons are e A timeline location Upon activation playback resumes from a chosen frame The location and the content found there are referred to as a chapter of your movie e Another menu Buttons can link to any menu in the Menu List 270 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Another page of the same menu Multipage menus always include next and previous buttons for navigating between their pages Automatic page creation As you insert new chapter links into a multipage menu additional pages are created automatically as needed These appear in the Menu List alongside those already in the project A connector graphic links pages belonging to the same menu To insert new linked chapters use either the Insert Link button on the toolbar or the Chapter Wizard Your Text Here se Play Movie S cti ws Scene Selection A main menu and its matching multipage menu in the Library Player Next and Previous It is the presence of the special next and previous buttons that causes a menu to support the multipage behavior To create a multipage menu from an existing main menu simply add buttons of both these types Likewise deleting either or both of the next and previous buttons from a multipage menu removes the automatic features Chapter 9 Disc projects 271 Multipage menus in the Menu List The icons of multipage menus are connected in the Menu List by a special grap
170. er buttons cause a transfer to another menu or to another page of the same menu Multipage menus with each page displaying several chapter buttons along with automatically managed navigation buttons facilitate productions of almost any size However there is a Chapter 9 Disc projects 269 limit of 99 on the total number of chapters and return markers allowed in a single production The Menu List Unlike timeline clips the menus in your production are not bound to a particular time offset Instead a disc player will loop the menu until user interaction is received Because menus exist outside of time Pinnacle Studio provides the Menu List a special area above the Disc Editor timeline to accommodate the menus in your project Dragging a menu from the Library into the Menu List makes it available for use in your project Designing menu interactivity A disc production may contain just one menu or it may have many Each menu contains graphically distinct areas generically called buttons that can be activated by the viewer perhaps using the navigation keys on a DVD remote control The behavior of disc menu buttons can be set up using controls in the Disc Editor window Alternatively you can invoke the Chapter Wizard to create and configure a set of buttons automatically according to your chosen settings Activating a button either starts your movie playing back from a chosen point or transfers control to another m
171. er solution is to apply the correction to the Library asset itself before adding it to a project That way any Chapter 2 The Library 19 production using the asset will start with the corrected version not the unsatisfactory original Such corrections can quickly be made by opening media editors from the Library The file underlying the corrected asset is not modified instead the correction parameters are stored in the Library database and reapplied whenever the item is displayed or used Instant gratification SmartMovie In addition to the core functions mentioned so far the Library offers a matching pair of tools for automatically constructing a complete project using media resources you specify Just select some photos or video sequences enter a few settings and start You can output the project Studio generates without further modification or refine it with manual editing as you prefer For more information see SmartMovie on page 57 Understanding the Library The Studio Library lets you manage and efficiently use the entire pool of media and other assets available for use in your productions What exactly does the Library contain The full range of assets that you can draw on for your projects is summarized by the four main branches of the Asset Tree Each branch is further divided into more specialized subsections The All Media branch contains the standard media files on your system in subsections named Photos Vi
172. ers in the same region are not is possible but may be confusing unless executed in overwrite mode Moving either single clips or a complete timeline cross section is more straightforward and should be preferred when possible Holding down the Alt key while moving clips allows you to toggle between insert and overwrite modes Standard smart operation is the same as insert since the most frequent use of horizontal moves is to reorder the playback sequence Copying clips Holding down the Ctrl key while moving a selection of clips will copy the clips instead of moving them Using the Clipboard Although drag and drop operations provide somewhat greater power when dealing with clips the timeline does support the standard Clipboard operations cut copy and paste with the usual shortcut keys The Clipboard also provides the only method for moving and copying transitions and effects between clips Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 111 From the Library After selecting one or more clips in the Library select Copy from the selection s context menu or press Ctrl C to put the selection on the application s Clipboard Cut the other usual command for adding to the Clipboard is not available in the Library On the timeline position the playhead at the point where the paste operation should begin and select the desired track by clicking in its header Now press Ctrl V to insert the clips from the Clipboard onto the given track starting at t
173. es caused by early photographic development processes spots and streaks from dust and lint adhering to the film and intermittent vertical lines where the film has been scratched during projection The effect lets you simulate these blemishes to give your footage an antique look Chapter 5 Effects 167 Soften The Soften effect applies a gentle blurring to your video This can be helpful for anything from adding a romantic haze to minimizing wrinkles A slider controls the strength of the effect Bevel crystal This effect simulates viewing the video through a pane of irregular polygons arranged into a mosaic Sliders let you control the average dimensions of the polygonal tiles in the image and the width of the dark edging between neighboring tiles from zero no edging to the maximum value 2D Editor Use this effect to enlarge the image and set which portion of it will be displayed or to shrink the image and optionally add a border and shadow Earthquake The Pinnacle Studio Earthquake effect jiggles the video frame to simulate a seismic event whose severity you control with sliders for speed and intensity Lens flare This effect simulates the flaring seen when direct bright light overexposes an area of a film or video image You can set the orientation size and glow type of the main light Magnify This effect lets you apply a virtual magnifying lens to a selected portion of the video frame You can position the lens
174. es the preview display from the video source to the captured file Chapter 10 The Importer 335 and activates the File indicator You can also activate the indicator by clicking it directly Click the File indicator or any thumbnail in the Image Tray to review images already grabbed Here thumbnail 5 has been clicked and the mouse pointer is poised over the trash can icon to delete it The heavy line to the right of the selected thumbnail is where the thumbnail of the next grabbed frame would be inserted To delete a captured frame select it in the Image Tray then click the trash can icon that appears in the top right corner of the thumbnail To switch back to previewing video after reviewing files in the Image Tray click the Live indicator beneath the preview display Importing the frames When you have grabbed all the frames you want from the video source click the Start Import button The Importer adds the grabbed images to the still images section of the Library 336 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Chapter 11 The Exporter One of the great things about digital video is the large and growing number of devices that can make use of it Studio lets you create versions of your movie for whatever video viewers your audience will be using from hand held DivX players and mobile phones to HDTV home theaters Library Movie Disc Export R Export Export tne selected clips or projects to tile or UVD Qv Search your current
175. ever an unlinked chapter also serves a useful purpose in its own right during playback it designates one of the points to pause at when browsing a DVD with the jump button on the remote control Remove chapter When the timeline scrubber is positioned at a Ld chapter the Create unlinked chapter button takes on the opposite function and a modified symbol Clicking on it will remove both the chapter marker and the link that binds it to a menu if it has one You can also remove chapters with the Delete Selected Chapter context menu command when one or more chapter markers are selected To remove the links from chapter markers leaving them unlinked but still on the Chapter Track use Remove Selected Links from the same menu BE Create return Unless there is already a marker at the timeline scrubber position this button will add a return marker to the Chapter Track A return marker is active during viewing only if playback commenced from the same menu the marker is associated with On the timeline the marker color should match that of the associated menu s icon in the Menu List When playback reaches the frame associated with an active return marker it will jump back to the associated menu 280 Pinnacle Studio User Guide a Delete return If there is a return marker at the scrubber position the Create return button converts to Delete return with an appropriately changed symbol The Remove chapter button and the Delete selected c
176. ewer and easily avoided Chapter 9 Disc projects 289 D00 00 04 43 In the Disc Simulator you use a control set similar to that found on a DVD remote control Menu interactions and playback can be fine tuned and fully tested before you burn the project to disc Once you are happy with the project it can be exported as a movie file saved to a disc image file or burned to a disc See Chapter 11 The Exporter on page 337 for more information 290 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Chapter 10 The Importer Pinnacle Studio lets you incorporate many kinds of media into your video productions When these are stored externally to your computer on a camcorder tape say or a memory stick from your digital camera or a cloud based service they must be transferred to local storage before you can use them This transfer process is variously called capturing importing or downloading depending on the media involved and the method of transfer Because most audiovisual recordings now are stored in digital form from the start transfers can typically be achieved with no loss of quality Only when transferring from analog or tape based sources e g VHS Hi8 or DV tape is there still a capture process often involving conversion to digital form The terms import and importing can be used to signify all methods of bringing images and sound into the Library for use in your productions The file based as
177. external preview on dropdown menu Set up Studio with a 16x9 stereoscopic timeline Finally on the Player click the Full Screen button Please see Export and Preview on page 366 and Timeline settings on page 78 for help with these configurations Anaglyph An Anaglyph stereoscopic preview is suitable for viewing with red cyan stereoscopic glasses with no additional hardware support required Pinnacle Studio s anaglyphic display works well even for images with a lot of red thanks to a method very similar to the optimized anaglyphs technique 3D Vision This stereoscopic mode is available with many A NVidia graphics cards after the 3D Vision feature has been enabled in your NVidia configuration utility The type of 3D display offered depends on the hardware available At the basic Discover level the 3D Vision display is anaglyphic Choosing what to display in the Library The Library is much more than a passive storehouse of material for your Pinnacle Studio productions The Library Browser has several features for decluttering your view by hiding assets that aren t relevant to your purpose No matter how numerous your media files the combined power of these techniques can greatly speed your browsing Location tabs Most importantly each location tab corresponds to a different selection on the Navigator Like web browser tabs location tabs are 46 Pinnacle Studio User Guide readily defined click th
178. eyframing is in use the clip level knob causes new keyframes to be created or existing ones to be repositioned cf ANTrack t AN Track lt ci AN Track 2 lt gt When its access button above the timeline L is clicked the audio mixer panel pops out to the right R Each track has two knobs The first adjusts the level of the track s overall audio output the second controls the levels of the current clip It can be keyframed for moment by moment level control The third icon on each track opens the Panner Volume keyframing An audio clip s level can be varied at will using keyframing which allows you to create a volume envelope that reflects the dynamic changes you want within the clip The envelope appears as a green line on the clip the keyframes are represented by small square control handles along the line On playback the clip volume tracks the envelope line as it moves smoothly from one keyframed level to the next Chapter 8 Sound and music 253 If there are no keyframes on a clip the volume contour is a horizontal line representing the default clip volume To add a keyframe make sure the volume keyframe editing button on the timeline toolbar is selected then click on the volume contour of the clip Alternatively you can position the scrubber to the desired keyframe location then simply click the clip level knob this second method works whether or not the keyframe editing button is lit In either case
179. f repetitions in a periodic process like a sound wave or an alternating voltage per unit of time Usually measured in repetitions per second or Hertz Hz GOP In MPEG compression the data stream is first divided into Groups Of Pictures sections of several frames each Each GOP contains three types of frames I Frames P Frames pictures and B Frames GOP size The GOP size defines how many I Frames B Frames and P Frames are included in one GOP For example current GOP sizes are 9 or 12 Hardware codec Compression method that uses special hardware to create and play back compressed digital video sequences A hardware codec may offer better encoding speed and image quality than a codec implemented completely in software See Codec Software codec Appendix C Glossary 417 HD High Definition video Most HD formats in use have a resolution of either 1920x1080 resolution or 1280x720 resolution A substantial difference exists between the 1080 and 720 standards the larger format uses 2 25 more pixels per frame This difference substantially increases requirements for processing 1080 content in terms of encoding time decoding speed and storage The 720 formats are all progressive The 1080 format has a mixture of progressive and interlaced frame types Computers and their displays are inherently progressive whereas television broadcasting has been based on interlaced techniques and standards For HD terminology we indicate
180. fault options for the Pinnacle Studio Importer may be set here however you can adjust or override them in the Importer at the time of importing Folder options View or set the default storage locations for media and projects that are to be physically copied during import unlike linked imports including the Library s Quick Import feature which simply link to existing files without relocating them The folder locations are initially set to the user s music video and images folders as configured in Windows and to the default folder for saving Studio projects 370 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Watchfolders Import Settings Audio Device Event Log Export and Preview no subfolder Keyboard y Project Settings A M custom Storage Locations i UR ype today creation date current month no subfolder jpg automatic based on time and date VIDEO Selecting a video subfolder type on the Import Settings page After locating and selecting the folder you want to serve as the base folder you can optionally set up a subfolder No subfolder With this option the files you import will be stored in the base folder Custom When you choose this option a Custom Project Subfolder box will appear Click it to enter a name for the Subfolder for that media type Today Your imports will go to a subfolder named with the current date in the format 2012 10 25 Creation date Each imported file will be stored in a subfolder name
181. first select the layer then open the Looks tab of the Presets Selector and hover your mouse over the thumbnails As you hover the Edit Window previews your title as it would appear with the selected Look applied This lets you immediately gauge its effect in context Chapter 7 The Title Editor 201 Applying a Look To apply a preset Look to a text or vector graphics layer first select the layer with the mouse by clicking in the Edit Window or the Layer List You can also affect more than one such layer simultaneously using multiple selection or a layer group Motions Beveled Outlined Aa 13 PINK Be 20 Blue Be 18 ion Bevel Looks 17 Green B L in To begin using Looks select a family of presets Standard Shadow Beveled or Outlined Hover over thumbnails to preview presets click the thumbnail to apply one to the current layer Having selected the layer or layers to change use one of the following methods to apply a Look Click its thumbnail in the Presets Selector e Drag the thumbnail from the Presets Selector onto the layer in the Edit Window Drag the thumbnail from the Presets Selector onto any of the layers or grouped layers in the Layer List header Preset Motions The Motions tab of the Presets Selector contains the animation routines that give the Title Editor much of its power These Motions are assigned to and operate on single layers in your title The Motions are divided int
182. ged with the mouse to serve as a reference for true vertical and horizontal alignment anywhere in the image The Grid button produces a fixed repeating grid pattern over the entire image Set angle To set the degree of rotation you can either use the slider on the toolbar below the image or click and hold the left mouse button while dragging over the image Rotations up to 20 degrees in either direction are supported Clear Cancel and Apply Clear sets the image back to its original state Cancel closes without saving any edits made Apply saves the changed image without exiting the editor Red eye This tool corrects the red eye effect that often occurs in flash photography when the subject s gaze is towards the camera Mark the area around both red eyes with the mouse Extreme precision shouldn t be necessary but you can experiment with changing the area slightly if you are dissatisfied with the correction Clear Cancel and Apply Clear sets the image back to its original state Cancel closes without saving any edits made Apply saves the changed image without exiting the editor 144 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Correcting video Like the other media editors the Video Editor has a central preview display and an area at right for correction and effect settings If the video includes an audio track floating panels for audio management will also appear These are positioned originally at upper left but you can drag them to new d
183. give some thought to the organization of tracks and rename them according to their function in the movie For information on track properties and how to edit them please see The timeline track header on page 86 90 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Adding clips to the timeline Most types of Library asset can be brought onto the timeline as independent clips The types include video and audio clips photos graphics ScoreFitter songs Montage and titles You can even add your other movie projects as container clips that work just like video clips in your project Disc projects however cannot be added as container clips to a timeline since they require a capability user interactivity that timeline clips don t have Drag and drop Drag and drop is the commonest and usually the most convenient method of adding material to a project Click any asset in the Movie Editor s compact view of the Library and drag it wherever you like on the timeline When crossing into the timeline area during the drag and continuing to the target track watch for the appearance of a vertical line under the mouse pointer The line indicates where the first frame of the clip would be inserted if dropped immediately The line is drawn in green if the drop would be valid and red if it would not be possible to insert a clip where indicated because the track is protected for example It is possible to insert multiple clips into the timeline at the same ti
184. graphical editor for controlling the lifespan of the layer within that of the title as a whole and the durations of any Motions that have been assigned to the layer The left hand portion of the Layer List contains the layer headers to the right is an animation timeline where the timing of each layer and of any Motions applied to them is displayed and can be modified Only the leftmost portion of the timeline is shown here If the title you are editing was opened from the Movie Editor or the Disc Editor the Layer List timeline represent the current length of the clip To modify it return to the timeline of your project and trim the title there If the title was opened from the Library and so is not bound to a clip in the project its length can be edited in the Title Editor Set the desired duration by entering a value directly into the duration counter at the right side of the toolbar All layers will be adjusted relative to the new duration 224 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The Layer List toolbar is home to several important groups of controls see The toolbar on page 227 Working with the Layer List The Layer List is a multitrack timeline very similar in conception to the timeline of the project itself in the Movie Editor or Disc Editor Some operations such as those to do with Motions are particular to the Title Editor however Layer operations The procedures described here are all carried out in the header
185. gs panel lets you create the background of a title The small preview area serves as a Color Selector button and also as a drop target for videos or images trom the Library Here the Aspect Ratio menu has been opened by clicking the button just above The default background for a title is fully transparent If your title appears on an upper track in your project s timeline any video or other imagery on the tracks below will be visible behind the title foreground To create a solid or gradient background click the background preview area This brings up a color selection dialog and also provides an eyedropper that allows you to pick up a color from anywhere within the Title Editor window You may choose to have a gradient background by choosing the Gradients tab at the top of the color palette Additional gradient markers can be set by single clicking below the gradient bar Gradient markers can be removed by dragging them vertically out of the bar area To use video or a still image as your background drag the item down from the Videos or Photos sections of the Library to the background preview which also serves as a drop zone 208 Pinnacle Studio User Guide To make the background translucent position the opacity slider anywhere between fully transparent all the way to the left and fully opaque Double clicking the slider returns it to full opacity To reset the background to its default state with no background click the t
186. h Click the name of the group to see the effects it contains Camera Cok Keyer Artist c Stereoscor 7 Add on EarthQuake Invest h Lens Flare Lighting Magnify Adv Magnify Plus f The Camera group of Effects is open in the Photo Editor The mouse pointer is positioned over the thumbnail for the Invert effect left side causing it to be automatically demonstrated on the preview The thumbnail icons for the effects in the currently selected group are shown in a full width tray at the top of the work area With visual 156 Pinnacle Studio User Guide effects as your mouse pointer hovers over the effect icons the preview shows how the clip you are editing would appear if each effect were applied When you have made your choice click the effect s thumbnail to apply it Customizing an effect Once you have applied an effect to a clip by either of the methods mentioned above you can return to the media editor at any time to manipulate the effect s settings Double click the clip on the timeline or select Open effects editor if you wish to customize the effect See The Settings panel on page 161 for further information To save your modifications and return to the timeline click OK To cancel modifications and return to the timeline press Cancel Creating Effect Compositions The set of effects used by a clip and their settings can be saved as an Effect Composition by clicking the Save button in the upper
187. hapter context menu command can both also be used to delete return markers Timeline editing of chapter and return markers Chapter and return markers are tied to particular frames on your timeline at which playback will be launched from a disc menu chapters or at which playback again gives way to the originating menu returns Both types of marker can be dragged with the mouse to change the location at which they take effect in the movie When you are previewing a menu dragging a chapter marker from the Chapter Track to a button on the Player will relink the button The reverse operation dragging a button from the Player to a point on the Chapter Track is an alternative method of creating a new chapter marker A project that contains one or more disc menus must have a return marker permanently positioned at the end of the Chapter Track This guarantees that any chapter played on the disc will encounter a valid return The final return marker can thus not be deleted The Chapter Wizard When a multipage disc menu has been dragged from the Library into the Menu List a Chapter Wizard button is displayed at the top right corner of the menu icon Clicking on this button will open the Chapter Wizard window Chapter 9 Disc projects 281 Why use the Chapter Wizard The Chapter Wizard provides a fast way to create chapters for your movie Chapter markers will be added to the Chapter Track on the Disc Editor timeline to show where each
188. hared by all Windows programs used to hold data during cut copy and paste operations Any new data you place onto the clipboard immediately replaces the existing data Closed GOP GOP Codec Contraction of compressor decompressor an algorithm that compresses packs and decompresses unpacks image data Codecs can be implemented in either software or hardware Appendix C Glossary 413 Color depth Number of bits delivering the color information for each pixel A 1 bit color depth allows 21 2 colors an 8 bit depth allows 28 256 colors and a 24 bit depth allows 224 16 777 216 colors Color model A way to mathematically describe and define colors and the way they relate to each other Each color model has its own strengths The two most common color models are RGB and YUV Color saturation Intensity of a color Complementary color Complementary colors are opposite in value to primary colors If you were to combine a color with its complement the result would be white For example the complementary colors of red green and blue are cyan magenta and yellow respectively COM Port A serial port located on the back of your computer for attaching a modem plotter printer or mouse to the system Composite video Composite video encodes luminance and chrominance information into one signal VHS and 8mm are formats that record and play back composite video Compression A method for making files smaller in size There
189. he Navigator The entire gamut of Library assets is organized into a folder tree whose structure and general usage should be familiar from file system tools like Windows Explorer When you select a location in the Navigator the folder name appears on the caption of the active location tab and its contents are displayed in the neighboring Browser 24 Pinnacle Studio User Guide hawaii 2014 L IMAG2383 Ipg M IMAG23T8 Ing IMAG2376 jpg IMAG237 pg IMAGISTA pq In the Main Library shown here the Navigator occupies the left hand pane of the workspace In the compact view of the Library used by Studio s project and media editing tools the Navigator is presented instead as a dropdown list on the active tab The Group By menu The header line of the All media branch offers a small dropdown menu of options to control how the groupings within each subsection of the branch are created v All Media By Filetype By Folder I bmp By Rating By Date By File type The Photos subsection of the All Media branch is shown grouped by file type The virtual folders have names like bmp Chapter 2 The Library 25 gif and jpg one virtual folder for each recognized file extension in the subsection s media files When you group by folder the default the folder structure corresponds to actual directories on your hard drive flash drive or other file system device Some standard folders are included by default yo
190. he action if you close down the panels first so that the whole stack is visible at once Saving a custom Look Once you have finished editing a custom Look you can save it to the My Looks presets group by clicking the save look button z in the header bar of the Look settings Before saving it s a good idea to rename the Look To do so double click the current name in the settings type a descriptive name for the Look and press Enter Once the Look is saved you can retrieve it at will through the Presets Selector under My Looks The Edit window The Edit Window is the main preview and editing area of the Title Editor This is where you rearrange resize and rotate the foreground layers of your title Chapter 7 The Title Editor 213 A necessary first step for most kinds of editing is to select the layer or layers your want to affect Selected layers are drawn within a frame having eight control points for sizing and a rotation handle at the top for rotating the selection in one degree increments Most types of layer can be grabbed for dragging to a new position by clicking directly on the control frame Rotating a shape object within the Edit Window The smaller dot at the top center of the control frame is the rotation handle for the layer To rotate a layer click down on its rotation handle and drag When you are over the rotation handle the mouse pointer will show as a circular arrow With text and shape
191. he color picker includes an eyedropper button to pick up a color from anywhere in the Title Editor To set a gradient background choose the Gradients button at the top of the color palette Additional gradient markers can be set by single clicking below the gradient bar Gradient markers can be removed by dragging them vertically out of the bar area Working with detail layers In addition to setting the properties of existing detail layers you can add details of any of the three types delete details and reorder the detail layer stack To add a detail layer click one of the three small buttons at the top right of the Look Settings From left to right these create a new face edge and shadow layer respectively The placement of the new detail layer in the layer stack is determined by its type as explained above 212 Pinnacle Studio User Guide To delete a detail layer click the trashcan button in the header bar of the detail s edit panel To rename a detail layer double click its name type the name you want and press Enter To temporarily hide a detail layer click the dot shaped visibility toggle icon in the detail s header To close down or open up the edit panel of a detail layer click the arrow button at the left hand end its header bar To reorder detail layers drag the header bar of the edit panel to its new location If the Look you are editing contains more than two or three layers it can be easier to follow t
192. he effect simply click on the thumbnail Effects on the timeline To check whether a timeline clip has had any effects applied to it look for a magenta stripe along the clip s upper edge Both this clip effect indicator and the clip itself provide useful context menu commands for effect management The clip effect indicator is a contrasting stripe along the top edge of any clip to which an effect has been applied Chapter 5 Effects 159 A clip with corrections displays a green stripe along the upper edge but there are no relevant context menu commands Clip context menu Open effects editor This opens the media editor appropriate for the clip with the Effects tab preselected There you can apply new effects to the clip or modify existing ones Paste Effects can be cut or copied to the Clipboard using commands on the Effect submenu The Paste command lets you apply the effect to one or more other clips Clip context menu Effect The context menu of any clip to which at least one effect has been applied will include an Effect submenu that provides a number of ways of manipulating the effects that are present The clip effect indicator has a reduced context menu containing only the Effect submenu Cut all Copy all With these functions effects assigned to a clip can be cut or copied to the Clipboard from which they can be pasted to one or more other clips as described above Delete all Delete Remove all the effects
193. he frames per second rate in your project settings To achieve slow motion new frames are interpolated between the original ones for fast motion some source frames are suppressed The options provided on the dialog are divided into several groups Constant Select the clip playback speed as a value from 10 to 500 percent relative to the original material Anything under 100 percent is slow motion Anchor When Constant is selected the clip is anchored to the timeline by a specified frame during trimming operations You can choose the first or last frame of the clip or the frame indicated by the current 114 Pinnacle Studio User Guide position of the playhead to serve as the anchor This can be useful for coordinating action between the speed affected clip and material such as background music on other tracks Stretch Under this option the first and last frames of the clip as currently trimmed will remain locked when the clip is trimmed on the timeline Shortening the clip instead of trimming material from the end speeds it up just enough so that it finishes at the same frame as before Lengthening the clip by trimming its end rightwards slows it down rather than exposing any trimmed material Video Reverse reverses the direction of playback without affecting the speed Synchronous audio if any is suppressed with this option since it is generally undesirable to play sound backwards Smooth motion This option applies a
194. he playhead If you select Paste from the timeline s context menu rather than pressing Ctrl V the clips will be pasted at the mouse pointer position on the default track not at the playhead You can repeat the paste operation with the same set of clips as often as desired From the timeline Select one or more clips on the timeline then click either Copy or Cut on the selection s context menu or press Ctrl C copy or Ctrl 4 X cut Both commands add the clips to the Clipboard Cut removes the original clips from the project while Copy leaves them in place Paste the Clipboard contents onto the timeline as described above The clips paste onto the same tracks as they originally occupied and with the same horizontal spacing Unlike drag and drop the Clipboard does not support moving clips between tracks 112 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Effects on the Clipboard Clips to which effects have been added have a magenta line along the upper edge Right click on the clip or right click the line to access the Effect context menu which provides Cut all and Copy all commands for transferring or sharing a set of effects between clips Select one or more target clips then press Ctrl V or click Paste on the timeline context menu The effects stack will be pasted to all selected clips The target clips retain any effects they may already have had The pasted effects stack will be placed on top of the existing effects Transitions on th
195. hic It shows that the menus are linked which is to say that you can navigate from one page within the menu to another by means of the next and previous buttons Splitting and joining To unlink neighboring menu pages from each other click the connector graphic between them The graphic is removed Pages to the left of the mouse remain with the original menu while those to the right form a new separate menu with a new background color for its menu icons Click in the gap between neighboring multipage menus to regroup them into a single menu Sorting chapters A time saving tool meant primarily for multipage menus is the sort button that appears with the Chapter Wizard button to the right of the menu s last page When you have been working on a menu for a while adding deleting and rearranging chapters perhaps even while editing the movie itself in parallel you are likely to find that the chapter buttons are no longer in timeline order across the set of pages Unless you want a custom order for some reason the remedy is a single click on the sort button Pages from a multipage menu The connector graphic shows that navigation within these pages is provided by Next and Previous buttons The Sort button top right under pointer arranges the chapter buttons in timeline sequence 272 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Adding disc menus The disc menus section of the Library contains a collection of menus for a variety of occasions
196. hiss to give just a few examples When a correction is applied to a Library asset the media file is not modified Instead the correction parameters are saved in the Library database They can be altered at any time or removed as your needs dictate The corrections you make in the Library are brought with the asset when you add it to your project timeline as a clip Corrections trom the timeline When you open one of the standard media editors by double clicking a timeline clip the correction tools are again available although in this case they apply only to the clip in the project not to the underlying Library asset Transitions and Effects When they are invoked from the project timeline the media editors also offer effects which cover a wide range of enhancements in all three media types in the transition in transition out and effects groups Transitions let you punctuate the passage of one clip to the next with anything from a barely perceptible dissolve to an audience awakening flare Chapter 1 Using Pinnacle Studio 13 Effects range from the practical Brightness and contrast to the theatrical Fractal fire Effects can be animated with keyframed parameter changes to any degree of complexity They provide innumerable ways to add creative interest to your productions Some effects are particularly designed for 3D material Pan and zoom The Photo Editor provides one more tool pan and zoom of its own Like the eff
197. hown in the information view In the information view the properties that can be edited are Rating Title Tags and Comment TC 00 00 00 00 The Sky is the Limit mpg Asset Type Rating Title Tags Comment Fite Name the sky is the hmit mpg Path c users public videos Size 96 66 MB Created Thursday May 17 2012 3 16 PM Video Codec IPB MPEG 2 MP ML 4 20 Bitrate 8000 kBit s Duration 00 02 05 07 Color Depth 16 Bit Frame Aspect 169 Alpha No Dimensions 720 x 480 px Pixel Aspect 12 Framestart 0 Frames 29 97 FPS Interlacing Top Field First Stereoscopic No gt Audio e Ia SEN E Here data regarding a Library asset a video is displayed in the Information view of the Player Click the highlighted Info button to return to the Playback view of the asset 3D viewing mode switcher When stereoscopic 3D content is being shown the 3D viewing mode switcher will appear On opening the Player the default mode from the preview settings in the Control Panel is used for photos videos and 44 Pinnacle Studio User Guide projects The icon for the current mode is displayed beside a dropdown arrow used for switching modes The available modes are Left eye Right eye The preview for stereoscopic Ed Cd content can be set to show only its left or right eye view This helps keep things simple at times when a stereoscopic preview is unnecessary Editing in these views is carried out as for a 2D movie Side by sid
198. hows Media Only The Solo button gives access to a menu of options for previewing underlying tracks in the media editor as well as the current one and for including the clip s transitions if any in the preview Solo This button is available only if the media editor is selected from the timeline While it is highlighted the current clip in the Navigator is shown in isolation when previewed without taking into account the effect of any clips either above or below it on the timeline While the button is not highlighted all timeline tracks can contribute to the preview Before and after view This button appears for photo media only For details see Before and after on page 137 Chapter 4 Corrections 133 Full screen When active this button scales the preview image to the size of the current monitor and removes other tools from view To exit the full screen mode press Esc or use the close X button at the top right of the window The full screen view includes its own small overlay panel of transport controls Preview zoom options Fit window adjusts the size of the preview so that the height and width of the image do not exceed the available space even when all tools are open Set to actual size displays the image at the original size of the source Zoom The scroll bar at the far right of the toolbar provides continuous scaling of the preview image Moving the preview in the window The previe
199. iated with an existing asset This lets you have multiple versions of the same asset without having the overhead of storing a separate media file for each one Shortcuts are stored to the Library as the original name plus a sequence number The Edit menu offers five standard editing commands Undo Redo Cut Copy and Paste Undo Redo As seen throughout Studio the graphical undo and redo buttons at the upper left of the media editor window step forward and back through your editing history The Navigator The Navigator strip at the bottom of all media editor windows gives you an opportunity to load other Library items or other timeline clips When called trom the Library the Navigator at the bottom of the media editor accesses other assets displayed in the Library Browser 132 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The current item is highlighted You can switch to editing a different item by clicking a different element in the Navigator using the arrows at right and left to assist scrolling if required When you do so any changes made to the currently loaded item are automatically saved as though you had clicked the OK button You can hide the Navigator by clicking its button at the bottom of the media editor window View options Sharing the bottom toolbar with the Navigator button is a series of view related buttons Shows Media with transitions and tracks below g Shows Media with transitions k Shows Media and tracks below S
200. ice The transport bar for DV and HDV import with from left jog controls and timecode readout transport buttons a shuttle control and an audio button with a pop out slider for controlling the preview volume The current timecode indicator Emi 29 0 00 14 B shows your playback position according to the timecode recorded onto the tape Chapter 10 The Importer 323 when it was shot The four fields represent hours minutes seconds and frames respectively To the left of the indicator is a pair of arrow buttons use these to jog the position one frame back or frame forward at a time From left to right the transport buttons are play pause stop rewind and fast forward These buttons relay commands to your camera Using them is equivalent to using the camera s onboard controls but typically more convenient Drag the orange needle on the shuttle control to the left or right to change the playback position in the reverse and forward directions respectively The motor speed increases as you drag the needle further off center When you release the needle it homes to the center position and pauses playback Set preview volume To set the playback volume for previewing hover the mouse pointer in the area of the audio mute button in the bottom bar of the file browser A volume slider will appear beside the button Drag the knob up and down to control the volume Click the audio mute button itself to toggle audio muting
201. ice over This check box allows you to switch off timeline audio completely during recording Chapter 8 Sound and music 265 266 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Chapter 9 Disc projects With the advent of DVD Blu ray and AVCHD discs video technology has developed into an interactive medium that gives both the videographer and the audience new possibilities In a disc project you can go beyond the old idea of creating a movie to be viewed in strict sequence from beginning to end Now the audience themselves can decide which parts of the production to view and in what order Disc authoring is the process of designing and creating the structure that allows this interaction Pinnacle Studio provides automated features that make authoring easy while still giving you full control Chapter 9 Disc projects 267 The Disc Editor in Pinnacle Studio Here two menus have been added to the Menu List and are now available for use The Player top right in this window provides a special mode for editing the behavior of menu buttons Your disc project can begin in the Disc Editor using the same controls and techniques that you would in the Movie Editor or you can import a movie project into the Disc Editor to add a disc menu to it Please see Chapter 3 The Movie Editor on page 65 for information on how to construct a movie The upper part of the Disc Editor screen includes two functional areas the Compact Library from which d
202. ides two sets of tools for different purposes These are Corrections and Effects Corrections are available both for Library assets and for clips on your timeline of your movie or disc project Effects are available for timeline clips only Corrections When opened from either the Library or the timeline the Audio Editor provides access to a suite of correction tools for overcoming common flaws such as excess sibilance in recorded speech If you are editing a Library asset any changes you make will be preserved when it is later 238 Pinnacle Studio User Guide used in a project Changes to a clip on the timeline however have no impact outside the project to which they belong For information about opening the Audio Editor to access the correction tools along with general functions of the media editors please see Media editing overview on page 130 The transport and marker controls are the same as for editing videos and are described in Video tools on page 146 For descriptions of the audio editing tools themselves see Audio corrections on page 243 Effects As just mentioned when the Audio Editor is opened from the timeline it provides a set of correction tools whose main purpose is to repair defects in media These tools can be applied directly to assets in the Library as well as clips in the project With timeline clips only the Audio Editor also provides a set of audio effects These afford a wide range of po
203. iew on page 366 If effects are not playing back smoothly try increasing the Optimization Threshold value This will increase the amount of pre rendering time while improving the preview quality If rendering is taking too long on the other hand the Optimization Threshold value can be decreased or rendering can be turned off by altogether by setting it to zero Other factors that affect playback and rendering time are the format size and frame rate selected for the project These can be changed in Timeline settings Please see Timeline settings on page 78 The Settings panel The Settings panel provides a list of the effects that have been assigned to the current clip whose name is given at the top Click an effect name in the list to select it this causes its settings to be displayed for Chapter 5 Effects 161 inspection and editing in the parameters area below the list Most effects also offer a dropdown list of preset parameter combinations Though a clip might have transitions Corrections and Pan and zoom in addition to effects the Settings panel on the Effects tab does not list these Turn to the other tabs to access the settings information for their tools When a clip has multiple effects they are applied in the order they were added which is the reverse of the order in which they are listed new effects are added at the top of the list not the bottom To change the order drag the effect header up or down in the
204. if there is one or a fade in if there is not The wider you make the fold the longer it will take the transition to complete Folding back the top right corner of the clip results in either a dissolve to the following clip or a fade out More elaborate transitions can be added to the timeline from their section of the Library under Creative Elements When you find one you want drag it onto one end or the other of a timeline clip The length of the transition will be determined by the default duration defined in the Pinnacle Studio Control Panel Project settings one second by default If the clip already has a transition at the chosen end the new one replaces it See Project settings on page 374 for details Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 117 If you are trying to add the transition to a clip which is shorter than the default transition length the transition will not be applied One way to avoid this problem is by making sure the dynamic length transitions button on the timeline toolbar is active While it is you can control the length of a new transition by dragging to the left or right as you place it on the clip You will see the corner of the clip fold back as you drag If the time ruler is zoomed out enough you will see the duration of the transition numerically displayed clicking in this readout lets you edit it directly 7 the sky is the limit mpg A transition dragged to a project s timeline Another way to apply a
205. ighlighted meaning that only assets with ratings of three stars or better are on display Here the mouse pointer is poised to click the fifth star which would set the rating filter to hide all but five star assets Filter by stereoscopic 3D To display only stereoscopic 3D content click 3D at the top of the Library To return to viewing 2D assets as well click 3D again Filter by tags Another way to narrow the field of displayed assets is with filtering by tags Tags are keywords that you can assign to assets as you work Once tags have been defined you can use them in several ways to control which assets are displayed by the Browser See Tags on page 50 for detailed information Search At the top right of the Library is a search field that gives one further way to filter the display As you begin entering your search term the Browser continually updates the view to include only those assets with text that matches your search term 48 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Even when multiple terms are separated by spaces partial word as well as whole word matches are allowed in each term A dropdown list lets you choose whether the search will be satisfied if even a single search term matches the asset text or if all terms must match for the asset to be accepted Q snow Match any words h v Match all words Inadvertent filtering The various filtering methods can be combined at will Should you leave any of the
206. iking editorial transitions The effect can be used for anything from fine control of monochrome images to psychedelic color transformations Invert Despite its name the Invert effect doesn t turn the display upside down Rather than the image itself it is the color values in the image that are inverted each pixel is redrawn in its complementary light intensity and or color producing a readily recognizable but recolored image This effect uses the YCrCb color model which has one channel for luminance brightness information and two channels for chrominance Chapter 5 Effects 169 color information The YCrCb model is often used in digital video applications Lighting The Lighting tool enables correction and enhancement of existing video that was shot with poor or insufficient lighting It is particularly suitable for fixing backlit outdoor sequences in which the subject s features are in shadow Posterize This Pinnacle Studio effect lets you control the number of colors used to render each frame of the clip all the way from the full original palette down to two colors black and white as you drag the Amount slider from left to right Regions of similar color are coalesced into larger flat areas as the palette shrinks RGB color balance RGB Color Balance serves a dual role in PPinnacle Studio On the one hand you can use it to correct video that suffers from unwanted coloration On the other it allows you to apply a color
207. ill be given an opportunity to save before closing TheLibrary The Library appears in the Title Editor as a tabbed panel on the left side of the window The tabs across the top give access to all the available media and content This compact view of the Library is functionally the same as the main view described in Chapter 2 For editing titles the Library sections of interest are Photos Video and Movie Projects Photos march IMG 8690 jpd IMG 8689 jpg The compact version of the Library in the Title Editor provides the same comprehensive access to your media as the full version See Chapter 2 for full information Chapter 7 The Title Editor 199 Adding Library media to a title To add a video or photo to the title drag it from the Library into the Edit Window The new element is created at a default size where you drop it in the Edit Window You can then move resize or rotate it as you like To add a video or photo as a full screen background for your title drop it onto the background drop zone of the Background Settings subpanel See Background settings on page 207 for details You can also use a video or photo as the fill for the face border or shadow of your text To do so first add a face border or shadow to your Look Settings using the add buttons Then drop your photo or video into the drop zone to the right of the Fill The Presets Selector Quickly setting up an attractive title is easy with the Titl
208. im mode button Once in trim mode you can open trim points with the mouse pointer at the beginning or end of a clip Notice that the trim pointer faces left at the start of the clip and right at the end While the trim pointer is showing click once at the point you want to trim Then continue to open trim points on other tracks if required You can open two trim points per track by holding down the Ctrl key to create the second point This feature is useful for the trim both slip trim and slide trim operations all described below Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 101 Trim Editor Right ee xL xw a 00 01 12 00 00 01 14 00 1 00 01 18 00 00 01 20 00 00 01 22 00 The Trim Editor in dual mode The yellow rectangle shows the currently selected trim point at the start of a clip the left side shows the final frame of the outgoing clip When a trim point is opened several things happen The left or right edge of the clip is highlighted with a yellow bar showing that it is currently selected Trim points that are not currently selected are shown with an orange bar The Trim Editor opens with the Player in dual preview mode The transport controls under the Player become trim adjustment tools The preview with the currently active trim point is outlined in yellow 102 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The Trim Editor In dual preview mode the Trim Editor shows two frames from the timeline The currently selected tr
209. im point is always shown and has a yellow rectangle around it If the trim point is at the beginning of the clip the first frame of the clip is shown at the end of the clip the last frame You can switch the selected trim point by clicking in the other preview window or by pressing Tab Trim Editor Right 00 01 16 00 00 01 20 00 The Trim Editor in a slip trim operation The left preview shows the currently selected trim point the right preview shows the second trim point Which frame is shown in the second preview window depends on which trim mode is being used In a slip or slide trim the second trim point of the operation is displayed surrounded by an orange Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 103 rectangle In other cases the second preview window shows the frame on the other side of the cut at the selected trim point Above each preview window the number of frames that have been trimmed is displayed If you think of the original cut point position as zero the number indicates how many frames the new position of the cut point has moved The Trim Editor is by default in solo mode The clip that has the trim point is shown without the tracks above it and without any transitions applied to it This preview mode is most suitable for determining the exact frame to trim The default display of adjacent frames are a complete composition of all the timeline tracks You can toggle the display behavior with the Solo button 7 in the lo
210. in three dimensions moving it horizontally and vertically within the frame and nearer to or further from the image Motion blur This effect simulates the blurring that results when a camera is moved rapidly during exposure Both the angle and the amount of blurring can be set Water drop This effect simulates the impact of a drop falling onto the surface of water producing expanding concentric ripples 168 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Water wave This effect adds distortion to simulate a series of ocean waves passing across the video frame as the clip progresses Parameters allow you to adjust the number spacing direction and depth of the waves Black and white This effect subtracts some or all of the color information from the source video with results ranging from partly desaturated the Faded preset to fully monochrome Black and white The Amount slider controls the strength of the effect Color correction The four sliders in the parameters panel for this effect control the coloration of the current clip in terms of Brightness The intensity of light Contrast The range of light and dark values e Hue The location of light on the spectrum Saturation The quantity of pure color from gray to fully saturated Color map This effect colorizes an image using a pair of blend ramps or color maps Stylize your footage with bold color treatments add duotone and tritone style colorization or create str
211. indow The timeline scrolls in parallel as you drag Since your timeline position does not change this may take the scrubber out of view Zoom To change the zoom level of the timeline either click and drag horizontally in the time ruler along the bottom of the timeline or drag the sides of the view window The first method has the advantage that it always leaves the screen position of the playhead undisturbed which may make it easier to orient yourself after the zoom To change the zoom of the Navigator itself use the plus and minus buttons immediately to its right Double clicking on the view window adjusts the zoom of both the Navigator and the timeline such that your entire movie fits within the Movie Editor window Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 73 The Storyboard Assembling a movie can involve juggling a large number of photos and video clips as well as deciding where to place titles Montages and the like In the Storyboard the clips on one track of your movie are presented as a sequence of icons so you can see at a glance what is included and where To choose which track to view in the Storyboard use the Storyboard link button in the track header g AN Track 2 Any of the photos video audio projects Montages and titles in the Library can be added to your movie by dragging and dropping them onto the Storyboard Once there they can be rearranged or removed altogether if you change your mind Different types
212. ing In many digital recording 54 Pinnacle Studio User Guide formats such as DV and HDV a discontinuity in the recorded timecode data occurs whenever the camera is restarted after being stopped These shooting breaks are treated as scene breaks under the option By content Under this option the scene detection tool analyzes the image content of the material frame by frame and establishes a new scene whenever there is an abrupt change in content However a quick pan or rapid movement across the frame may produce some unneeded breaks By time interval In this variant you define the length of the scenes to be created A small editing window opens for entering the desired value in hours minutes seconds and milliseconds The scene duration has a one second minimum Press Enter to confirm your input Show the scenes To show the catalog of scenes for a particular video file either select Show scenes from its context menu or select the clip then click the Scenes view button that appears at the bottom right of the Library Scene view is a temporary viewing mode The orange bar at the top of the Browser alerts you that scene view is active At the right hand end of the bar is an x button you can use to terminate the mode Clicking the Scenes view button again has the same effect Chapter 2 The Library 55 Pubhe Videos mo 7 We 5ky 5 the mit the Sky 5 the himit the sky she himit ja FE Ga Pa A y the sky 15 the umt
213. ins five templates All the templates in this particular theme use the same backdrop design an abstract scrolling pattern It is continuously visible except during full frame video segments The coloring of the pattern is set using a parameter control available for each of these templates in the Montage Editor Now let s look at each template in turn to see how it is constructed from the elements clips and captions that you supply in the Montage Editor Opening An Opening template usually starts with some sort of animation including titles and ends with full frame video Our 50s Modern example follows that pattern kd uf amp b The scrolling background animation runs through most of this sequence Within the animation two customizable captions are displayed They are represented in the diagram below by lines on the Animation bar Both captions are flown into and out of the frame dark line color with a one and a half second pause for stationary display light line color in between Chapter 6 Montage 187 Animation aul Schematic representation of the Opening template in the 50s Modern theme at its default length of about 14 seconds Just as the second caption is leaving the frame an animated panel containing the running video subclip is launched The video zooms to full frame by 11 18 in the template clip and remains so through to the end the white portion of the Video bar in the diagram
214. ion or music Select appropriate music Appropriate music adds a professional finishing touch to your movie and can do a lot to reinforce the message of a video The music selected however should always be appropriate to the message of the film This is sometimes a time consuming matter and a challenge but greatly appreciated by the viewer Title The title should be informative describe the contents of the movie and arouse interest If it s also a striking turn of phrase so much the better When it comes to presentation the Title Editor gives almost unlimited scope for creative visuals It s one place in your production where you re not tied to the reality of actual footage so you can let your fancy run free Of course the ultimate goal is to communicate so some basics almost always hold true For instance a concise title in a large legible font is likelier to get its message across than one that is over decorated or too long Title colors The following combinations of background and text are easy to read white with red yellow with black and white with green Exercise caution with very white titles on a very black background Some video Appendix B Videography 409 systems are unable to handle contrast ratios in excess of 1 40 and are unable to reproduce such titles in detail Time on screen As a rule of thumb a title should be displayed long enough to be read twice Allow about three seconds for a title with
215. isc menus and other resources are drawn and the Player where you can preview menus and other media and edit menu interactions Next below these is the timeline toolbar with all the controls from the Movie Editor plus the additional controls necessary for creating disc menus The area below the timeline toolbar is shared by three separate 268 Pinnacle Studio User Guide navigation tools the Menu List where the your project s menus are stored the Navigator and the Storyboard Only one of the Navigator the Storyboard and the Menu List can be visible or this area can be hidden altogether The Navigation tool selector near the left end of the timeline toolbar controls this area Under the navigation area is the timeline for the media that will be the primary content of your disc All use the full width of the window Disc menus The essential feature that makes disc authoring possible is the menu A particular disc may have one a few or many menus each consisting of a still image or a short video loop Areas within the menus called buttons can be selected by the viewer to activate other content on the disc Some buttons cause playback to resume from specified locations called chapters on the timeline of your production These chapter buttons often show a thumbnail frame or video loop as a clue to their content If a return marker is encountered during playback it will send the viewer back to the menu at that point Oth
216. ises to 4 GB Motherboard Intel Pentium or AMD Athlon 2 4 GHz or higher the higher the better AVCHD editing demands a more powerful CPU The minimum recommendation ranges up to 2 66 GHz for editing 1920 pixel AVCHD video A multi core system like Core i7 Core i5 or Core i3 is recommended Graphics card To run Studio your DirectX compatible graphics card needs e or typical use at least 128 MB of onboard memory 256 MB preferred For HD and AVCHD at least 256 MB 512 MB preferred The hard drive Your hard drive must be capable of sustained reading and writing at 4 MB sec Most drives are capable of this The first time you capture Studio will test your drive to make sure it is fast enough Video files are often quite large so you also need a good amount of available hard drive space For instance video in the DV format fills 3 6 MB of hard drive space per second of footage a gigabyte every four and a half minutes 438 Pinnacle Studio User Guide For capture from video tape we recommend using a separate hard drive to avoid competition between Pinnacle Studio and other software including Windows for use of the drive Video capture hardware Studio can capture video from a variety of digital and analog sources All types of auxiliary file based storage media including optical drives memory cards and USB sticks e iles from drives connected to the computer DV or HDV video cameras using an IEEE 1394
217. ist icon color of the menu to which the markers are assigned Markers can be repositioned on the timeline by dragging See Timeline editing of chapter and return markers on page 281 for details Dropping a menu onto an empty Menu List causes a chapter marker to be inserted at the start of your movie s first clip provided it has one as the target of the menu s Play Movie button A return marker marking an exit back to the menu Is placed at the end of the movie Authoring tools In the Disc Editor the timeline toolbar provides a number of authoring tools that you can use directly without switching windows or views Tools on the Disc Editor toolbar 278 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Create link This button links the currently selected chapter button in the Player to the location of the timeline scrubber Insert link This button facilitates work with multipage menus by MM moving all existing button links starting at the currently selected chapter button in the Player one position towards the end In a multipage menu the act of inserting a link may begin a chain reaction by forcing an existing link onto the next page a link from there onto the page following and so on to the final page which itself will be created if necessary Remove link Clicking on this button will remove the link that nm exists between the button on the menu and the chapter marker on the Chapter Track An unlinked chapter marker will remain on the
218. ith the first menu The link may be indirect involving one or more intermediate menus but until it exists the menu is an unreachable island Such a menu is indicated by the symbol IIl in the bottom right hand corner of its Menu List icon thumbnail 274 Pinnacle Studio User Guide A special indication is also given in the Player for menu buttons that have not yet been linked either to a timeline location a chapter or to another menu A linked button shows which chapter e g C1 or menu e g M1 it connects to An unlinked one shows a question mark icon instead If the button indicators are not visible click the show hide chapter numbers check box below the Player LP Previewing disc menus The Disc Editor like the Movie Editor includes a Player for previewing Library assets and timeline clips For a general introduction to the Player please see The Player on page 14 The special functions provided by the Player when viewing menus in the Menu List are described here Clicking a menu in the Menu List puts the Player into Menu input mode and previews the selected menu You can also switch to that mode directly while any menu is selected by clicking the Menu tab above the Player screen in the Disc Editor Special controls also appear at the bottom of the Disc Editor Player Menu Editor button Creating or modifying the design and layout of disc menus is the task of the Menu Editor Chapter 9 Disc projects 275
219. k Mark in mark out The mark in and mark out timecode fields above the ends of the transport bar indicate the planned starting point and ending point of a video capture Note DV and HDV sources are also suitable for snapshots see page 269 for details 324 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Recording video and audio The Importer supports two approaches to selecting a range of video to be imported In the manual approach you simply watch the preview playback and press Start Capture at the start of the desired footage When you reach the end of the segment press Stop Capture If you have continuous timecode on the source footage and have set Stop at tape end to Yes in the Mode panel you can walk away and leave the Importer to switch off when the input is exhausted The automatic method of capture is good for setting the endpoints of your capture the mark in and mark out points with single frame precision and for unattended importing that should halt before the end of the recorded material Sometimes you may want to use set the mark in time and leave mark out blank When you click Start Capture the Importer will locate your start time then capture until you tell it to stop or at tape end You can also set a mark out time and leave the mark in time blank When you click Start Capture import will begin immediately and end automatically at the mark out point Entering a duration and entering a mark out time are equivale
220. k button appears beneath the padlock button on all track headers when the Storyboard is open Click the button to select a given track as the one linked to the Storyboard display Track name To edit the name of a track click the name once to access the in place editor or select Edit track name from the track header context menu Confirm your edit with Enter or cancel it with Esc Video and audio monitoring The video and audio buttons in the track header control whether this track contributes its video and audio to the composite output of the project They support the many editing situations in which it is advantageous to block the output of one or more tracks in order to Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 87 simplify the preview The same buttons in the all tracks area toggle audio and video monitoring for the entire project Additional track functions The following functions are available in the track header context menu New track You can insert a new track either above or below the existing track Delete track Delete a track and all clips on it Move track Drag the track header up or down to a new layer position As you drag a bright horizontal line appears at valid placements Copy track Keeping the Ctrl key pressed while moving a track will copy the track instead of move it Track size The context menu contains four fixed track sizes Small Medium Large Very large For custom sizing drag the separator line betw
221. k of such layers The opaque parts of each layer obscure the layers below the bottommost layer can obscure only the background In addition to listing each layer by name the Layer List includes an animation timeline showing the time span during which each layer is active and the Motions that have been assigned to it These properties can be adjusted by dragging Pinnacle Studio User Guide The process of building up an image in layers is called compositing Because the information in each layer is maintained separately to be combined only when the image is output it is possible to return to the composition at any time and add new layers and to adjust reorder remove or replace existing ones PE a of Building up an image in layers starting with an empty frame top left The checkerboard pattern indicates transparency Although backgrounds can have transparent or translucent areas here we add an opaque background 0 for clarity followed by successive layers with some opaque content 1 2 3 In the final composition bottom right upper layers obscure those below Launching and leaving the Title Editor The Title Editor can be invoked in two ways by double clicking any title in the Library or on your project s timeline or by clicking the Title button on the toolbar of the timeline Chapter 7 The Title Editor 197 Keywords in title names Some of the provided titles in the Library have transparent areas th
222. kind of keyframe animation one or more parameters of the effect has a different value at the end of the clip than it did at the beginning On playback the parameters are updated after every frame to move smoothly from the start value to the end value 164 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Keyframing isn t limited to just the start and end frames of a clip Keyframes can be defined with particular values of effect parameters at any point in the clip to produce effect animations of arbitrary complexity If for example you would like an image to reduce to half size by the middle of the clip and return to full size by the end you would need to add at least a third keyframe Basic keyframing Here s an outline of how to use keyframing to program the changes in an effect parameter during the playback of a clip 1 Double click a clip on the timeline to load it into its media editor 2 Add an effect then activate keyframing by clicking the diamond icon on the effect header if it is not already highlighted 3 Akeyframe line appears below the time ruler Any keyframes that have been added to the clip for the current effect to date are displayed as gray diamonds A keyframe is added automatically at the beginning of the clip This keyframe cannot be moved or deleted If the effect and preset combination you chose is animated rather than static there will be a keyframe generated at the end as well You can delete or move the end keyframe if yo
223. l cameras See Import from digital cameras on page 330 Some sources in the Import From panel are chosen from a sub list of actual devices that appears when you click the main source entry In the illustration DVD Blu Ray has been clicked The user can now choose between the two DVD drives installed on this particular system Chapter 10 The Importer 295 Import from E Dazzle Vide DVD Drive F Single frame import Studio provides two special modes for importing single frames rather than continuous footage These modes are Stop motion Create an animated film by importing one frame at a time from a live video source See Stop motion on page 330 Snapshot Import individual images from tape or from a live source like a webcam See Snapshot on page 333 Adjusting analog audio and video levels Analog capture hardware may provide additional controls for modifying parameter levels of the audio and video signals Such a capability is useful for correcting exposure problems and the like in the source material and when you need to compensate for differences in video from multiple sources 296 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Import from Video SVideo To access the controls select the analog source then click the more button EJ beside the source name This opens the Analog Input Levels window Chapter 10 The Importer 297 Pinnacle Systems MovieBox Deluxe Device R The Analog Input Levels window lets
224. le Studio User Guide Depending on which capture device you are using automatic scene detection is carried out either in real time during capture or as a separate step immediately after capture is completed The four scene detection options are Automatic based on shooting time and date This option is available only when you are capturing from a DV source Studio monitors the time stamp data on the tape during capture and starts a new scene whenever a discontinuity is found Automatic based on video content Studio detects changes in the video content and creates a new scene wherever there is a large change in the images This feature might not work well if the lighting is not stable To take an extreme example a video shot in a nightclub with a strobe light would produce a scene each time the strobe flashed Create new scene every X seconds Studio creates new scenes at an interval you choose This can be useful for breaking up footage that contains long continuous shots Manually by pressing spacebar Select this option if you want to monitor the entire capture process and decide for yourself where scene breaks should occur Press the Space key each time you want to insert a scene break during capture The Metadata panel In the Metadata panel you can enter information that will be associated with the imported media file or project file in the Library This can make it easier to find and manage the clip when you are se
225. le types of files from multiple source folders Each selected file will be copied to the correct folder for its asset type as specified in the Import To panel Chapter 10 The Importer 313 The folder and file browser The left hand column of the browser is a hierarchical view of all folders on all file storage devices attached to your computer These devices include hard drives optical disc drives memory cards and USB sticks Navigation in this folder tree is similar to that in Windows Explorer and other programs Folders containing other folders are indicated by a plus sign to the left of the name when they are closed and by a minus sign when they are open Click the sign to open out expand or close down collapse a folder s list of subfolders Graphics People BM Disc images Bg Flotsam Only one entry in the folder tree can be highlighted at a time Any media files or project files contained in that folder are immediately listed in the larger right hand division of the browser You can preview files on the spot and earmark those you intend to import by checking the box at the top right of corner of each file icon 314 Pinnacle Studio User Guide AMP I Riris invertebrates arden eople I Family Friends Other Team Scenery E TEM Mountain village ro Cartoons Graphics B BB Disc images Bi Flotsam Here the folder Photos Winter is open revealing a set of
226. leaning the disc Inspect the install disc checking its surface for smudges and dirt If cleaning is necessary use a soft cloth not paper towels or any abrasive material Wipe from the center of the disc to the outer edge rather than a circular motion Once the disc is clean try installing again Another optical drive Many systems have two optical drives for instance a DVD burner and a separate DVD reader Put the disc that won t install into the other drive if available and retry Restart the computer In some cases the installation can crash if Windows Update is running If that happens it is best to restart the system as requested by Windows before trying again to install Studio Startup tasks programs If you are familiar with msconfig you can use this tool to disable any programs launched at start up that might be interfering with the Studio installer When all else fails If the disc is damaged with deep scratches or cracks so that it won t install please contact support Please have your Pinnacle Studio order number or proof of purchase receipt from the store available Hangs or crashes while launching Document ID 284223 If Pinnacle Studio previously launched successfully and now does not review any changes that have been made to the computer recently for 390 Pinnacle Studio User Guide possible clues If necessary undo the changes to see if the problem goes away Further troubleshooting steps 1 Restart
227. lections and creative elements that are available for you to use in your movie and disc projects The items are displayed either as a list of text records or as a grid of icons Visual asset types use thumbnail images for their icons other types use graphic symbols The Library would not be much help if the Browser displayed all its assets at once It therefore has several controls that help you screen out 32 Pinnacle Studio User Guide items that aren t relevant to your purpose See Choosing what to display below for details Controlling the Browser display A group of controls in the Library s footer bar provides general functions for managing the way assets are presented in the Browser The info button available in the main Library only toggles the display of a panel across the bottom of the Browser pane where details about the current asset are displayed such as its caption file name rating and any tags or comments associated with it The information may be edited and for some assets you can also open the corrections tools by clicking the gear icon on the top left corner of the pane The scenes view button applies to video assets only While this button is active items in the Browser represent the individual scenes in a particular video not the entire asset as usual See The Library preview on page 41 for more information In the main Library this and the next two buttons are grouped at right between the inf
228. lip s at scrubber position M Add Delete marker period Jump to next marker comma Jump to previous marker Ctrl period Open Marker list panel 430 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Movie interface Delete Delete selected clip s from timeline Double click on clip in timeline Open media editor for clip B Send preview clip to the primary track on the timeline at scrubber position H Swap Preview between timeline and source Ctrl4 5 Open Title Editor F5 Show Hide Audio Mixer F7 Create Song Numeric pad Zoom in the timeline Numeric pad Zoom out the timeline left bracket Zoom out on the timeline right bracket Zoom in on the timeline Ctrl Fit timeline to window Ctrl Show every frame zoom in Alt Provides the alternate behavior when editing on the timeline insert overwrite T Trim Mode On Off Right Trim 1 frame right with trim open Left Trim 1 frame left with trim open Shift Right Trim 10 frames right with trim open Shift Left Trim 10 frames left with trim open Ctrl Click on trim Add second trim point to the same track Appendix D Keyboard shortcuts 431 Movie interface Shift Click on trim Open similar trim point on all tracks Tab Cycle focus on open trim points Media editors Numbers 1 8 Choose a corrections or effects category Do
229. ll the folders from which you want to import files Use the file type lists just discussed to narrow the range of incoming file types if desired When selections have been made click the Scan and Import button at the bottom to begin the Import operation This will import all files of the selected types in the chosen directories Import from DV or HDV camera To prepare for importing digital video switch on your DV or HDV device in play mode and select it in the Import From panel of the Importer You will also need to make sure that your destination folder compression presets and other options are set up in the other panels the way you want them See Importer panels on page 294 Chapter 10 The Importer 321 Import from Previewing video The video currently playing on the source device should now be visible in the preview area at the central area of the display Along the right edge of the video preview is a scale showing the moment by moment audio level 322 Pinnacle Studio User Guide a00 04 41 18 When a DV or HDV source Is selected the central area of the mporter provides controls for previewing and importing the taped material Below the preview image is a row of controls for automating capture by setting mark in and mark out points For more information see Recording video and audio on page 325 Another row of controls the transport bar serves as your navigation console for the source dev
230. ls The timeline track header In the header area of the timeline are a number of controls affecting the arrangement and organization of the timeline tracks These are covered here while the audio functions controlled from the timeline header such as track volume are described in the topic Audio on the timeline on page 251 The all tracks area above the track headers offers controls similar to those found on each track header but with global effect they apply to all tracks simultaneously overruling the individual settings Default track The orange vertical line to the left of the track header together with a lighter background shade identifies the default track It provides a 86 Pinnacle Studio User Guide destination track for certain functions including send to and paste Newly created titles and ScoreFitter songs are also added on this track For more information see Sending to the timeline on page 94 Using the Clipboard on page 111 Chapter 7 The Title Editor on page 195 and ScoreFitter on page 261 To make another track the default track simply click anywhere within the track header other than on a button or other control Locking Click the padlock buttons to protect a track from unintended edits The same button in the all tracks area confers this protection on the whole project Storyboard link The Storyboard is an alternative representation of a timeline track A small storyboard lin
231. lt for stereoscopic 3D content throughout Pinnacle Studio See 3D viewing mode switcher for more information Please see Choosing what to display in the Library on page 46 for more information Left eye or Right eye The preview for stereoscopic content can be set to show only its left or right eye view Side By Side In Side By Side preview mode you can monitor the individual 2D images for both sides at the same time Differential Rather than the image content itself the differences between the left and right frames are displayed Identical areas show as neutral gray Checkerboard Right and left eye views alternate in adjacent cells of a 16x9 grid Anaglyph An Anaglyph stereoscopic preview is suitable for viewing with red cyan stereoscopic glasses 3D TV Side by Side This mode is to be used with a 3D capable second monitor or projector Chapter 12 Setup 369 3D Vision If your system is 3D Vision capable and stereoscopic 3D is turned on in your driver settings any stereoscopic content will be previewed in 3D Vision by default No stop when activating 3D Vision This setting is available when Studio is run on a PC with a 3D Vision capable system which has stereoscopic 3D turned on in the driver setting By default the No stop when activating 3D Vision setting is set to off When turned on playback will automatically stop wherever a 3D Vision preview is being activated or deactivated during playback Import The de
232. ly vacations 6 1 selected IMAG2401 jpg IMAG2390 jpg IMAG2383 jpg 1MAG2382 jpg A portion of the Movie Editor display with the compact view of the Library at upper left the Player at upper right partly visible and at bottom the timeline with the Navigator panel open in its upper region Disc editing If you plan ultimately to release your movie on DVD with interactive menus you will at some point need the special features of the Disc Editor It provides all the same timeline editing features as the Movie Editor but also lets you create and work on the disc menus with which users will navigate your production Pinnacle Studio lets you smoothly transition a movie to a disc project at any time during development so it s all right to start in the Movie Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 69 Editor even if you end up targeting DVD for output instead of or as well as the other options Please turn to Chapter 9 Disc projects for information about the special features provided for disc authoring The other aspects of timeline editing are covered in this and subsequent chapters Slideshow productions In addition to all types of video productions movies the Movie Editor and the Disc Editor can be used for authoring complex slideshows and presentations from still images The same editing techniques apply in both cases The Project Timeline The timeline is where you create your movie by adding video photo and audio a
233. me Simply select the desired Library assets then drag any one of them to the timeline The sequence in which the clips appear on the track corresponds to their ordering in the Library not the order in which you selected them Magnet mode By default magnet mode is switched on This makes it easier to insert clips so that their edges meet exactly The new clip snaps to certain positions like the ends of clips or the positions of Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 91 markers as if drawn by a magnet once the mouse pointer gets close to the potential target On the other hand don t worry about whether the first clip is right at the start of the timeline Not every movie starts with a hard cut to the first scene Live editing preview In order to eliminate the confusion created by complex editing situations Pinnacle Studio provides a full dynamic preview of the results of editing operations as you drag clips around on the timeline If things seem to jump around a bit more than you re used to during timeline editing this is the cause Don t worry you will quickly get used to and learn to take advantage of the extra information provided Take it slowly at first Watch the changes on the timeline as you hover the dragged item over various possible landing places and complete the drop when you see the result you want If it turns out that drag and drop isn t working the way you want either press Esc or move the mouse pointer out of the tim
234. menu command for any asset It is not necessarily the name of the underlying asset file which is shown in the tooltip khit i z morning mood jpg Daybreak Shortcut The presence of this indicator in the extreme upper left of a thumbnail shows that the asset is a shortcut rather than an independent media file Shortcuts which consist of a reference to an existing media item along with a package of Corrections settings can be created from the File menu of the media editor for any Library asset Thereafter they behave like ordinary assets and are available for use in your productions Tag indicator The bottommost of the three symbols at the right of the thumbnail is shown if the asset has any tags assigned to it Hover the mouse pointer over the indicator to bring up a menu on which the existing tags for the asset are shown As you pass the pointer over a tag name on this menu a remove button appears Click it to unset the tag Click remove all at the bottom of the menu to clear all tags from 38 Pinnacle Studio User Guide the asset The creation and application of tags is discussed in Tags on page 50 remove all Collection indicator Just above the tag indicator the presence of this symbol indicates that you have included the asset in one or more Collections To see which ones hover the mouse over the symbol As with the tag indicator menu a remove button is shown as you position the mouse on each Collection
235. mplate such as a fancy rolled title the animation always runs to completion The animation speed therefore depends on he clip duration Shortening the clip causes the animation to run aster but does not truncate the sequence Clips that include video in contrast can be trimmed in the usual way Many themes include a variable length video subclip When one of these is present the clip can be expanded as far as the length of the subclip will allow indefinitely if the subclip happens to be a still image Transitions and effects Transitions can be used at the beginning and end of Montage clips in the same way as with other clip types Video and audio effects can also be added to Montage clips as usual and apply to all the content the clip embodies However a few effects such as Speed are not available for use with Montage clips To add an effect to a Montage clip right click on the Montage clip on the timeline and choose Open Effects Editor from the context menu Alternatively drag an effect from the Library and drop it on the clip Effects are located in the Creative Elements section of the Library 186 Pinnacle Studio User Guide To edit copy or delete an effect on a Montage clip right click on the magenta line along the top of the clip and make the applicable choice on the Effect context submenu Anatomy of a template For examples of how themes work let s examine the included 50s Modern theme which conta
236. mputer s CD DVD or Blu ray recorder also called a burner or onto a flash memory card You can also direct the Exporter to create a copy or image of the disc on your hard drive without actually burning it See Output to disc or memory card on page 341 338 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Cloud output creates a file for uploading to a cloud based service provider where you can decide whether to limit your audience to a few close friends or share your project with the world See Output to cloud on page 357 Device output creates a file that can be viewed ECNEMMAUS E from your portable movie player mobile phone tablet computer or similar device See Output to a device on page 362 Configuring output Output can be configured quickly within each media type using the dropdown lists in the Settings panel If you need hands on control click the Advanced button to open a panel of options for the media type Settings Type AVCHD BluTay Preset Full size S3D Anaglyph Advanced When you have confirmed your settings click either Create Image or Burn Disc to output in disc format Start Publishing to send your movie to the Cloud or Start Export to begin saving as a file or to a portable device Create Image Bum Disc Bum Image Output buttons at the bottom of the Exporter window Chapter 11 The Exporter 339 Preparing your movie for output Before your movie is completely ready for out
237. n Your first launch of the Installation Manager begins by displaying an input form for activating and registering your product Although you are allowed to activate Pinnacle Studio validating your user license 434 Pinnacle Studio User Guide without registering the product registration is recommended In addition to making possible streamlined product support for problems like losing your serial number registration entitles you to such immediate benefits as 25 GB of complimentary additional storage on Box Supporting installations The application requires a number of Windows software components including the NET Framework to be present on your system The Installation Manager determines automatically if the components are available and installs them if necessary Such supporting installations require additional time but the main Pinnacle Studio installation will resume as soon as they have completed even if the system was restarted in the process The Welcome Screen The Welcome Screen lets you choose between two styles of installation H Pinnacle Studio fg Standard Installation L Locate installer files Click Install to automatically install the recommended components of your Studio version including Pinnacle Studio Application Standard Content Pack Hollywood FX Vol 1 3 Premium Pack Vol 1 2 Scorefitter Vol 1 2 Creative Pack Volume 1 Title Extreme NewBlue Effects The Standard Installation screen of
238. n frame within which all clips are selected Toggle selection of one clip Use Ctrl click to reverse the selection state of a single clip without affecting any of the others Select rest of track Press Ctrl Shift click to select all clips that start at or after the start position of the clicked clip This function is particularly useful if you quickly want to get the rest of your timeline out of the way for inserting new material or to manually ripple left to close timeline gaps Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 97 Grouping and ungrouping clips You can select and group multiple clips so that you can move the clips together To group or ungroup clips 1 In the timeline select two or more clips 2 Right click one of the selected clips and choose Group gt Group To ungroup the selection right click a group and choose Group gt Ungroup Adjusting As you move your mouse pointer slowly over the clips on your timeline you will notice that it changes to an arrow symbol while crossing the sides of each clip an indication that you can click and drag to adjust the clip boundary Adjusting changes the length of a single clip on the timeline in overwrite mode since insert mode would cause synchronization issues If you drag the start of a clip to the right a gap will be opened on the left side If there is a clip to the immediate left of the clip being adjusted dragging to the left overwrites it The adjustment pointer als
239. n in the middle to admit one more subclip into the sequence Chapter 6 Montage 189 Animation Segue C includes a bridging video subclip The final subclip is again expandable Ending The purpose of an Ending template mirrors that of an Opening template and in this example the internal structure is also mirrored almost exactly Full frame video recedes to a flying panel that gives way to animated captions exactly the opposite of the Opening sequence described above The one difference is that in this case the full frame video portion of the clip is not extendable Ac Animation The Ending template is almost a mirror image of the Opening one Montage editing Studio s main tool for customizing a Montage clip is the Montage Editor which allows you to interact with all the settings a Montage provides Using the editor you can add content from the Library change the background and edit any text in the Montage The editor can be invoked from a Montage clip on the timeline of a project by double clicking the clip or with Edit Montage on its context menu 190 Pinnacle Studio User Guide A useful trick lets you add timeline clips directly to a Montage clip via the Clipboard Copy the chosen clip using the Copy command on its context menu or Ctrl C Then right click the Montage clip to open its context menu Choose Paste to Drop Zone then choose from the graphical submenu of all the available slots in the Mo
240. n is relative to the start of the media For a timeline clip the play position within the project is given Setting the position numerically Click the right hand time code field for the position and enter a position in hh mm ss xxx format When you press Enter the playhead jumps to the specified location if that position is present on the clip Press Esc to undo the change and exit the input mode Asset trimming For Library assets the orange calipers at either end of the time ruler let you choose your own entry and exit points for playback Doing so establishes the clip endpoints when the asset is used in a project Ruler The time ruler displays a scale whose gradations depend on the current zoom factor If you click anywhere on this ruler the playhead see below jumps to this position Playhead This red line with its handle the scrubber is synchronized with the image currently displayed for video and also with the red line shown on the waveform display for audio You can position it Chapter 4 Corrections 147 arbitrarily by clicking and dragging the scrubber or by dragging within the waveform Scroll bar and zoom By dragging the double lines at the end of the scroll bar to the right and left you change the zoom level of the display When the bar becomes smaller the scroll bar can be moved back and forth as a whole enabling you to zoom into an audio clip s waveform or scrub with extra precision Double click the sc
241. n level until the best possible results for the source material have been achieved AutoAdapt While this option is active Noise reduction automatically and dynamically adapts to the type and amount of noise in the material The Fine tuning option is ignored while AutoAdapt is selected Fine tuning This controls the amount of correction Its effect is only significant when lower Level settings are used and it has no effect at all when AutoAdapt is active Remove wind Select this check box to activate a filter that reduces wind and similar background noises in the current audio Audio effects Audio effects like video effects are found in the Library under the Creative Elements branch One way to add an effect to your project is to drag it from the Library onto any audio clip including video clips with synchronous audio 248 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Effects Audio effects 2 MyFXC S L L Oa Equalizer Adding the Grungelizer audio effect to the current clip Usually though effects are added with the help of an Effects panel in the Audio Editor which lets you easily preview and customize them The panel is available whenever you are working on timeline clips with audio The panel is not available when you open the Audio Editor from the Library In contrast the tools on the Audio Editor s Corrections panel are always provided See The Audio Editor on page 237 and Audio on the timeline
242. n serial transmission but is not appropriate for long distance connections Parallel ports are often named LPTn where n is a number e g LPT1 See Serial port Pixel The smallest element of a monitor image The word is an abbreviation of picture element Port Electrical transfer point for the transmission of audio video control or other data between two devices See Serial port Parallel port Primary colors The colors that are the basis of the RGB color model red green and blue It is possible to create most other colors on a computer screen by varying the blend of these primaries QSIF Quarter Standard Image Format An MPEG 1 format specifying a resolution of 176 x 144 under PAL and 176 x 120 under NTSC See MPEG SIF Quantization One part of the JPEG image data compression strategy Relevant details are represented precisely while details that are less relevant for the human eye are represented with less precision Raster The area of a video display that is covered by sweeping the electron beam of the display in a series of horizontal lines from upper left to lower right from the viewer s perspective Redundancy This trait of images is exploited by compression algorithms Superfluous information can be eliminated during compression and restored without loss during decompression Resolution The number of pixels that can be displayed on the monitor horizontally and vertically The higher the resolution the m
243. n the central area of the Importer Each import source uses the central area somewhat differently Depending on the input source the central area shares the Importer interface with up to five auxiliary panels with standardized functions The Import From panel This is the top left panel of the Importer a position that reflects its vital role in setting up the import operation 294 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The photos music and video footage or projects you want to import may reside on a variety of device types and technologies The supported import sources include All types of auxiliary file based storage media including optical drives memory cards and USB sticks see Import from file on page 312 Click My computer in the Import From panel to select individual files for import from drives connected to the computer Click Scan For Assets to import all files of specific types from a set of one or more directories DV or HDV video cameras using an IEEE 1394 FireWire connection See Import from DV or HDV camera on page 321 Devices are listed by name in the Import From panel by their device names e g DV Device Select the applicable one Analog video cameras and recorders see Import from analog sources on page 327 Any analog capture hardware on your system is listed by name e g Pinnacle Systems 710 USB DVD and Blu ray discs See Import from DVD or Blu ray Disc on page 328 Digital stil
244. n the source material but leave its duration unchanged open one trim point at the start of a clip and another at the end of either the same clip or one later on its timeline track Drag either trim point horizontally or use the Player trim controls to reposition the clip within its source 108 Pinnacle Studio User Guide the sky is the fimit mpg 00 00 24 00 00 00 28 00 00 00 32 00 Slip trim With the in and out trim points of a clip selected dragging the clip changes its in and out points relative to the original material but doesn t affect its start time or duration on the timeline Slide trim A slide trim is an extended version of the trim both technique described above In this case you open trim points at the end of one clip and the beginning of another later on the timeline Instead of sliding a single clip boundary along the timeline as in trim both you are sliding two that move together All clips between the two trim points are repositioned earlier or later on the timeline Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 109 img 00866 mo mirame 00 00 24 00 Slide trim An out point has been opened for trimming on the first clip and an in point on the third Dragging either point moves the center clip or multiple clips if more are present along the track while other clips remain stationary Both slip trimming and slide trimming can be useful for synchronizing clip contents to material on other tracks
245. nacle Studio projects will be accessible as files on your own computer The Import To panel of the Importer lets you specify where those files will be stored Separate folders are available for projects video audio and picture items but the Import To panel only lists those that are relevant to the current import source as configured in the Import From panel As the number of media files and movie projects on your system grows it becomes increasingly useful to give some thought to how best to organize the material into folders and subfolders such that in the future you can most readily retrieve any desired item The controls on the Import To panel are designed to automate this process to whatever degree you choose Working with import folders Until you specify otherwise the Importer uses the standard document folders for video music and pictures within your Windows user account and a default folder for your Pinnacle Studio projects The illustration shows a typical setup in Windows To change an import Chapter 10 The Importer 299 folder click either the small folder button or the current folder path See Selecting an import folder on page 301 Import to Video lm The folders you choose for each asset type whether default or custom serve as base locations for your imported files In order to manage your file based assets effectively you can also specify either a custom subfolder name or a method of automatically g
246. name click it to remove the asset from the Collection The remove all command removes the asset from all Collections of which it is a member i ma AE Backgrounds Day in the life remove all Corrections indicator The Library allows you to apply image and audio correction filters non destructively on Library media assets meaning that the original file remains intact The types of corrections that have been applied to an asset and the parameters that were used to control them are stored in the Library database If corrections have been applied to an asset the corrections indicator appears just above the collection indicator Click the indicator to open the applicable media editor and update corrections settings See Correcting media files on page 19 for information about applying corrections to Library assets Chapter 2 The Library 39 Ratings The row of stars above the top left of the icon lets you set the asset rating If no stars are lit the asset is said to be unrated To set the rating of one asset or a selection of assets either click the corresponding star on the indicator click the first star twice to make the asset unrated again or choose the setting on the Apply rating context submenu The Ratings control appears at the left above the asset thumbnail At top right is the Info button The Corrections indicator is also at upper right just above the Collection Indicator 3D indicator Assets whose
247. nd Check button to test your voice input Click Disable voice recording s to disable voice over recording 4 Enable or disable System audio and adjust the slider to your preference 5 n Control Settings the following options are available Mouse click animation Enable to include mouse clicks in the screen capture Enable F10 F11 shortcut key Turns the keyboard shortcuts for screen capture on and off Note If the screen capture shortcut keys are in conflict with the program you want to capture it is recommended that you disable this feature to avoid accidental stops or pauses while recording Chapter 13 Screen capture 379 In Monitor Settings choose a display device Note The program automatically detects the number of display devices available on your system Primary monitor is selected by default To record your screen capture 1 380 Choose one of the following options Full screen lets you capture the entire screen When you launch the Screen Capture toolbar this option is enabled by default Custom lets you specify the area to capture The capture area dimensions are displayed accordingly You can also specify an application window to capture by choosing an option from the list of active programs Click Settings to access more options Note To include voice overs and system audio you must enable and configure the respective settings before you start recording Click Start Resume
248. nd areas as the primary one Edit title For titles only this opens the Title Editor See Chapter 7 The Title Editor on page 195 124 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Edit music This command is for editing ScoreFitter clips See ScoreFitter on page 261 Edit Montage Edit a Montage clip in the Montage Editor See Using the Montage Editor on page 191 Open effects editor Opens the media editor for the clip whatever its type with the Effects tab selected Montage title and container clips are treated in the same manner as ordinary video clips Speed This command opens the Speed Control dialog where you can apply fast and slow motion effects to selected clips This option is not available for containers See Speed on page 113 Scaling The first two options affect the treatment of clips that are not in conformance with the current timeline format when brought into the project See The timeline toolbar on page 77 Fit displays the image at its correct aspect ratio and scaled as large as possible without cropping Unused parts of the frame are treated as transparent Fill also maintains the aspect ratio of the image but scales it such that there are no unused parts of the screen Portions of the image will be cropped if the aspect ratios do not match To further fine tune the scaling behavior of a clip try pan and zoom Keep alpha Remove alpha Generate alpha These commands apply to content with an alph
249. nd underlying media files in textual form 126 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Chapter 4 Corrections Pinnacle Studio provides media editors for each of the three main media types video photos and other images and audio The usual way to access one of these editors is by double clicking either a media asset in the Library or a media clip on your project s timeline All three editors provide two main families of tools called Corrections and Effects These are presented as tabs at the top of the editor window The Photo Editor has a third tab for the Pan and zoom tool The Sky is the Limit Movie AXP the sky is the limit mpg Transition In Effects Transition Out Enha 2 MACS 3 SR ame 4 SL The four groups under the Corrections family in the Video Editor When an editor is invoked from the Library the Effects tab does not appear The tools in the Corrections family are designed to fix imperfections in the video photos and other media that you use in your projects The defects addressed by the tools are those most frequently encountered in recorded media You can straighten a photo with a tilted horizon improve the clarity of a muffled music track or correct the white balance of a video scene to name just a few possibilities The application of Corrections does not modify your media files themselves Instead the parameters you set are stored either in the Library database associated with a particular asset
250. ng tool like Pinnacle Studio can reveal instabilities that might not show up with ordinary applications One way to help determine if your Windows install is part of the problem is to run the Microsoft system information tool This tool keeps track of when Windows crashes To use the system information tool 1 In the Windows Run dialog box Windows key R type Msinfo32 in the search window Press Enter to bring up the System Information window 2 Expand the Software environment category on the left side of the window 3 Click on Windows error reporting If the Windows Error Reporting window has many entries it could be an indication that the OS is unstable or that the computer has a hardware issue Inspecting the entries may show what caused the crash If most of the crashes involve system software like Window 396 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Explorer then the OS has a problem Frequent random crashes are another common sign of a corrupt Windows installation Case 2 Studio crashes after a user action If Pinnacle Studio crashes or tends to crash when you click on some particular tab or button start by trying all of the steps in Case 1 above Such a problem usually means that Studio is not installed properly or has become corrupt so uninstalling Studio then reinstalling it and then patching the latest version should correct the situation To try to determine if the failure is specific to a particular project create a test
251. ng under a bridge Formal cuts Shots that vary in content can be strung together if they have something in common the same shapes colors or motions for example Examples A crystal ball and the earth a yellow raincoat and yellow flowers a falling skydiver and a falling feather Soundtrack production Soundtrack production is an art but it is an art one can learn Of course it is no easy task to create a superb narration but short informative comments are often very helpful for the viewer Whatever narration there is should sound natural expressive and spontaneous not wooden or stiff Keep comments brief A general rule applicable to all commentary is that less is more Pictures should speak for themselves and things that are evident to viewers from the pictures require no comment Preserve original sounds Spoken commentary should be mixed with both the original sounds and the music in such a way that the original sounds can still be heard Natural sound is part of your video footage and should not be cut away altogether if at all possible because video without natural sound can easily seem sterile and lacking in authenticity Frequently however 408 Pinnacle Studio User Guide the recording equipment captures noises from aircraft and cars that do not appear in the scene later Sounds such as these or loud wind noises which can be distracting or annoying should be masked filtered or replaced with appropriate narrat
252. non text layer would instead activate text edit mode See Text and text settings on page 216 for detailed information To resize a layer but retain its proportions click down on a corner point of the control frame and drag outwards or inwards until the desired size is achieved To resize a layer and modify its proportions click a side point of the control frame and drag By resizing with the center control point on Chapter 7 The Title Editor 215 two adjacent sides in succession you can produce any desired size and proportion To rotate a layer click down on its rotation handle and drag For finer control over the rotation move the mouse pointer away from the center of rotation while dragging The extra distance makes it possible to define smaller angles between one mouse position and the next To change the stacking position of a layer right click the layer and select from its context menu one of the commands on the Order submenu Send to Back Send Backward Bring to Front Bring Forward Convenient keyboard shortcuts are available for all four operations respectively Ctrl Minus Alt Minus Ctrl Plus and Alt 4 Plus Another approach to reordering layers which may be more convenient in titles where several layers overlap is to use the Layer List For more information see The Layer List on page 224 To delete a layer select the control frame or select it in the Layer List then press Delete Alternatively y
253. nt Whichever you specify the Importer calculates and displays the other one automatically Note Before starting the import operation verify that the settings on the Import To panel and other panels see Importer panels on page 294 have been configured correctly Chapter 10 The Importer 325 To capture manually with the Start Capture and Stop Capture buttons 1 Make sure that the mark in and mark out points are not set If needed use the button associated with the field to clear it with one click 2 Manually start playback of the source tape before the desired starting point of the capture 3 Click the Start Capture button when the starting point is reached The button caption changes to Stop Capture 4 Atthe end of the segment click the button again The captured material is stored in the Library 5 Manually halt playback unless automatic shutoff is in effect as noted above To capture automatically by setting mark in and mark out points 1 Use the time counter controls to set the mark in and mark out values the start and end points of the desired footage To set the mark in point either enter a value directly into the start field or navigate to the desired point and click the Start button A similar approach can be used to set the mark out point EUROS La 2 Click Start Capture Studio positions the source device to the mark in point and automatically begins recording 3 When the mark out point is re
254. nt distance between the text and the viewer If you save the title to a watchfolder its Library thumbnail will carry the 3D indicator 222 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Save this I U Times New Roma 1287 A 4 Looki Stereoscopic Text Depth A stereoscopic title that has been opened from the Library or a 3D timeline will provide a stereoscopic preview A stereoscopic title on a 2D timeline will preview in 2D only the timeline settings must be changed to 3D in order to get stereoscopic playback Text depth To change the depth of a text layer its apparent distance from the viewer select the layer and open the Stereoscopic Settings subpanel Make sure the Stereoscopic box has an orange checkmark displayed As you increase the value in the Text Depth slider the text recedes from view decreasing the value brings the text closer As you adjust the depth of the text you may have to adjust the font size as well Moving the text into the distance can decrease its apparent size to the point of unreadability while bringing the text closer can make it too large to fit in the title frame Chapter 7 The Title Editor 223 The Layer List The Layer List which occupies most of the bottom part of the Title Editor display has two columns one of layer headers and one of timeline tracks In each row the header contains the name of the layer and a visibility button To the right of the header the timeline track serves as a
255. nt folder To organize a collection e Drag and drop a collection in the Navigator with the mouse A dragged Collection becomes a subcollection when dropped upon another 28 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Displaying collected assets Clicking the name of a Collection causes it to be displayed in the Browser There is one important difference between the Browser view of Collections and those of all other categories the media assets in any subcollections are visually merged with those of the selected Collection but not subgrouped However a special feature of the Browser makes it easier to keep track of the assets when viewing Collections even if you re not a robotically systematic sort of person As your mouse pointer passes over any listed asset the Collections to which the asset belongs light up in the Navigator Operations on collected assets These operations can be performed from the context menu of any Collection item To act on a group of items first select them with the mouse using Ctrl click and Shift click for multiple selections as needed or by dragging out a frame around the items Then right click within the selection to access the context menu To add to a collection Choose a target Collection on the Add to collection submenu to add the selected item or items Tip Alternatively drag the selection onto the target Collection To remove items from a collection Click the Remove command to remove
256. ntage to select one as the destination Using the Montage Editor Each Montage template has its own set of slots for video and photo content represented by drop zones in the Montage Editor Most templates have at least one slot the most is six Some also provide text captions and other parameters to customize special features The Montage Editor is split into five parts On the left the compact version of the Library provides access to your videos and photos on the right is a customization panel including any text fields or other controls required by template parameters The Player shows you the results of your changes Below the Preview are the drop zones for your video and images Interior trimming of Montage clips When a Montage template begins or ends with a user settable amount of full frame video as many do the Montage Editor timeline provides handles for adjusting the lead in and lead out times the durations of the full frame portions Click a handle and drag left or right to adjust either duration separately The duration of the center part of the clip the animated part will shorten or lengthen accordingly If you want to balance the lead in and lead out without affecting the duration of the center portion click between the handles and drag Chapter 6 Montage 191 Part of the Montage Editor with the timeline bottom and drop zones for video or images middle The lower portions of the Library and the Playe
257. ny particular one but recommend you try a couple to see which one works best for you Appendix A Troublehooting 391 Alternatively you can also use the Microsoft System Configuration Utility msconfig which is part of Windows to disable start up programs Whichever route you take we recommend disabling all programs and then re enabling them one at a time until the conflicting program is located 7 Reinstall If all of the above fail you may want to try uninstalling Pinnacle Studio from the Control Panel Programs and Features list Once it is uninstalled reinstall Pinnacle Studio and try launching again Troubleshooting software crashes Document ID 384231 If Studio is crashing repeatedly the cause of the problem is most likely a configuration issue or a problem with a project file Many customers fix this type of issue by Optimizing their computer e Rebuilding a corrupt project e Recapturing a corrupt clip etc Uninstalling and reinstalling Pinnacle Studio For further troubleshooting determine which of the failure modes below best matches your problem then read on to review the suggested troubleshooting steps for that case Case 1 Pinnacle Studio crashes randomly There doesn t seem to be any one thing that will cause the crash but it seems to crash frequently Case 2 Pinnacle Studio crashes after a user action such as a click on a certain tab or button The crash is predictable and consistent
258. o appears when the mouse hovers at the ends of a gap an empty space on a timeline track with at least one clip to its right It turns out that adjusting gaps in overwrite mode as we do for clips is not especially helpful However gaps do come in handy when you re editing in smart mode if you want to ripple an individual track left or right ignoring any resulting synchronization issues Adjusting gaps therefore occurs in insert mode Even if no gap is available incidentally you can get the same result by holding Alt while adjusting the sides of a clip 98 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Over trimming Over trimming occurs when you try to extend the duration of a clip beyond the limits of its source material a situation you typically want to avoid Notice that if you have over trimmed your clip the invalid parts are shown in pink Overtrimmed clip The first and last frames will be frozen in the over trimmed sections Over trimming is not a crisis situation You do not need to take action immediately Pinnacle Studio will simply extend the clip as specified by freezing the first and last frames of the clip into the over trimmed areas Depending on the duration of the over trim and the context this simple approach may be all you need A brief freeze frame can even be visually effective in its own right The freeze frame method will probably not give satisfactory results if it happens during a sequence involving rapid
259. o button and the zoom slider In the compact Library the three buttons are placed at left thumbnails rather than as text lines A pop up checklist associated with the button lets you select the readouts and controls that will appear beside thumbnails in the Browser EH The thumbnails view button switches to viewing assets as mode in which each asset appears as a text listing The pop up checklist with this button selects the text fields to be displayed El The details view button switches to the alternative viewing Chapter 2 The Library 33 The zoom slider lets you magnify the thumbnails to get a closer look or pull back for a wider view This slider is always found at the right hand end of the footer bar o e rys Thumbnails and details Each asset is displayed in the Library Browser in one of two formats depending on the view selected Because the icons of thumbnails view and the text records of details view represent the same assets they have certain features in common For instance the context menu for assets is the same regardless of which representation is used Similarly standard media assets video photo and audio along with Sound effects in the Creative Elements branch open an appropriate media editor for corrections when double clicked in either view The corrections tools are also available when a media editor is invoked from the timeline but when applied to a Library asset the corrections are carried
260. o capture hardware However some older devices are not supported Supported hardware The following capture devices will work with all versions of Pinnacle Studio USB based e 710 USB e 510 USB e 700 USB e 500 USB e MovieBox Deluxe e DVC 90 e DVC 100 e DVC 101 e DVC 103 e DVC 107 e DVC 130 no 64 bit drivers available e DVC 170 no 64 bit drivers available PCI based e 700 PCI Pinnacle Studio Deluxe 2 e 500 PCI Pinnacle AV DV Any 1394 card Appendix A Troublehooting 387 Unsupported hardware The following list of hardware came with older versions of Studio and is no longer in warranty or supported DC10 e DC10 Plus ovieBox DV e Dazzle DVC 80 85 e Linx P10 S400 Serial number information Document ID 384215 This FAQ will give you information on the location of your Pinnacle Studio serial numbers and how to use your serial number from a previous version to activate an upgrade to Pinnacle Studio Finding your serial number For a product that you downloaded the serial number is shown on the confirmation page at the end of the ordering process and in the confirmation email sent at that time If you own a physical copy of the product the serial number is shown on either the inside or the outside of the DVD case if one is included and on the outside of the paper sleeve otherwise If you have lost your serial number please check the knowledge base for document 232809 Ho
261. o frame shown in the Player when it is in Timeline mode The current position is indicated by a vertical red line at the bottom of which is a draggable scrubber handle Another vertical line marks the same position in the Navigator Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 71 00 00 20 00 The toolbar Above the tracks the timeline toolbar provides several clusters of editing related tools In the Disc Editor the toolbar also includes tools specifically for disc authoring The Navigator The Navigator is an auxiliary navigation panel that can be revealed or hidden by clicking its icon on the Navigation tool selector near the left end of the timeline toolbar The full width strip appears just below the toolbar It gives a bird s eye view of your whole project at a reduced scale In the Navigator the bars representing clips have the same colors as they do on the timeline except that the bar representing the selected clip is drawn in orange Clicking in the Navigator allows you to speedily access any timeline location 72 Pinnacle Studio User Guide A portion of the Navigator strip showing the current position vertical line left and the translucent draggable view window The gray rectangle that encloses a portion of the Navigator display the view window indicates the section of your movie currently visible on the timeline tracks To change which part of the movie is in view click and drag horizontally within the view w
262. o rename click the Rename icon type in the new name and press Enter Click the Trashcan icon to delete the tag To delete all tags at once use the Delete all tags button at the bottom of the panel If you are deleting a tag that is in use you will be given a chance to back out of the operation Sorting tags In the middle of the tags panel is the Sort by dropdown offering just two choices Abc in which the tags are sorted alphabetically or Relevance which sorts them in descending order of their popularity in the set of assets currently on display Under the second choice you will see the tags being resorted each time one is checked or unchecked Filtering with tags Beside each tag name listed in the panel is a Filter icon that you can use to narrow the set of items displayed in the Browser As you check and uncheck the tags the view updates automatically The exact effect of your selections depends on another control the Match dropdown just above the tags The list provides three options None displays only assets that have none of your checkmarked tags In a tagged set of animal photos checking both the dog and cat tags then selecting None should hide most of the pet pictures 52 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Partial selects assets with any of your tags which happens to be exactly those hidden by No match If you leave dog and cat checked but switch to Partial all the
263. o three classes based on the portion of the layer s lifespan they affect enter emphasis and exit 202 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Anenter Motion controls the arrival of the layer its first appearance within the running title e Anemphasis Motion maintains audience focus on the content of a layer by giving it an attention getting action during its time on screen e An exit Motion takes the layer off stage again completing its life cycle Each layer is allowed to have one Motion of each type All Motions are optional however and it s also quite possible to have a title with no Motions at all The Motions collection In each of the three types of Motion most of the animations can be grouped into several standard classes based on their mode of action Letter based Motions operate at the level of individual letters in a text caption other kinds of layer are treated as consisting of a single letter For instance in the enter Motion Letters turn the letters in the text layer are first seen edge on then rotate in place one by one until all are in their normal orientation Word based Motions work similarly but with words as the smallest unit of animation In the enter Motion Words from bottom the words in the layer float up into position one by one from below the frame Line based Motions are meant for layers with multiple lines of text each of which is processed in turn In the enter Motion Line
264. ocking positions on either side of the window For information about opening the Video Editor to access the correction tools along with general functions of the media editors please see Media editing overview on page 130 For details on the controls available when the Audio tab is selected please see The Audio Editor on page 237 Video audio switch If an audio track is present a tab is provided at the top left of the screen for switching to the Audio Editor Waveform display This floating panel shows a section of the audio volume graph over the span of the video The region of the waveform that is shown is centered on the current playback position Waveform When you switch to the Audio Editor you will see a video preview panel at the same screen location Chapter 4 Corrections 145 Video tools These tools are located on the toolbar below the Video Editor preview Just below the tools is a time ruler with a scrubber for moving through the video At the left are the marker controls For more information see Markers on page 148 The remaining controls are devoted to previewing and trimming the media Many of the controls are also to be found in the Audio Editor Unless otherwise noted the descriptions here apply to both Please see The Audio Editor on page 237 for further information Stereoscopic 3D The icon and dropdown arrow to the left of the loop play button let you choose amongs
265. of clips are represented in the Storyboard with different colors For example photos and videos have a blue frame and projects have a gray frame As in the timeline clips that have had effects applied appear with a magenta line on the top and clips with corrections have a green line A colored band connects the Storyboard icon with the position of its clip on the timeline a gap in the timeline is reflected in a gap in the Storyboard Once you become familiar with the color coding it will help you quickly visualize the structure of your movie 74 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Ba Zar Ote The Storyboard displays a sequence of icons representing the contents of one track Effects magenta and corrections green are indicated on the top edge of the icon the length of the clip is shown on the bottom The space just below the toolbar where the Storyboard appears is also used by the Navigator and in the Disc Editor by the Menu List Which tools is visible if any is controlled by the Navigation tool selector near the left end of the timeline toolbar Navigating in the Storyboard To scroll to a part of the Storyboard that is not in view hover with the mouse over the Storyboard until a hand cursor appears Now click the left button and drag the Storyboard If you drag the mouse quickly and release the mouse button the Storyboard will briefly continue scrolling thus creating a swiping behavior Alternatively you can hover over
266. of their viewing hardware The size of the output file depends on both the file format and the compression parameters set within the format Although compression settings can easily be adjusted to produce small files heavy compression comes at the expense of quality The detailed settings for most formats can be adjusted by choosing the Custom preset and clicking the Advanced button Other presets load settings designed for typical situations If you are exporting a stereoscopic 3D project an S3D menu will appear offering various 3D formats or the option of exporting your project in 2D Settings Type MOV Video Preset Full size best quality Anaglyph Anaglyph Anaglyph Crossed Eyed Side by side 50 Top and Bottom 50 None 2D When your output options are in place click the Create file button A file browser opens to let you specify a name and location for the video file you are creating 346 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Preset details Destination MPEG 4 640 x 480 3800 Video _Bit s 29 97 Framesisec Ba C Users User Videos Image sequence Audio AAC 16 Bit Stereo 44 1 kHz Estimated file size 50 95 MB Description Use this preset to create a very good quality full size MPEG 4 file for playback on your computer When you are exporting a movie to a file these panels on the Exporter display your export settings As a convenience after output has completed the Exporter provides shortcuts
267. on to themselves This is where the transition from one scene to the next is important Even if the action in neighboring scenes is separated in time or space your editorial choices can make the juxtaposition so smooth that the viewer bridges the gap without conscious attention The secret to a successful transition is establishing an easily felt connection between the two scenes In a plot related transition the connection is that of successive events in an unfolding story For example a shot of a new car might be used to introduce a documentary about its design and production A neutral transition doesn t in itself imply a story development or a change of time or place but can be used to smoothly connect different excerpts from a scene For example cutting away to an interested audience member during a podium discussion lets you then cut back unobtrusively to a later point in the same discussion omitting the part between External transitions show something apart from the action For example during a shot inside the marriage registry you might cut to the exterior of the marriage registry where a surprise is already being set up Transitions should underscore the message of the film and must always fit the respective situation in order to avoid confusing viewers or distracting from the actual story line Logical sequence of action The shots strung together during editing must interact appropriately in relation to the action
268. onal indicators and controls 0 0 0 2 0 00 ee eee ee 38 The Library preview 0 ee ete I 41 Choosing what to display in the Library 0 46 TagSs c To deep Rt e testet x Ata es d RS 50 correcting Medias s sana crue cc aen eO Re RR d 54 Video scene detection o n nauau elis 54 SmattMOVIe 7 2t a e e n sU ED eet hoes oU A 57 StmartIVIOVIe a eo potat ute du na edible NR E fur ed 60 Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 2000000 65 The compact Library isse 65 Previewing in the project editors 2 2 ee ee eee 67 The Project Timeline kistasi dort Y e trf t M een 70 The timeline toolbat x tret nee deter n 77 The timeline track header liliis sels 86 Editing MOVIES Le dr arpa nige eque ee c S 88 Title Editor ScoreFitter voice over ls esses 95 Deleting clips cutest SE GRE UR EE S 96 Clip operation Senia uxo ERI Ue e eT teet n ses 97 Using the Clipboard isi RS eee es 11 SD6eds esee dE dak Pa ROT MEAS Feu CRI Hee 13 Movies within movies l i 15 TARSIUS Es serere utr eu ERE xS Ne Rees dens 16 Glip ettects s ie Et beue ERN Er 23 CP Context MENUS uter ek et avons Ret Rp de 24 Chapter 4 Corrections 2 liliis eren 127 Media editing overview i i eese 30 Photo editing tools 2 2 eese 36 Correcting photos lisse eee 138 Red 8ye duce ese AE Ar CM Ms 44 Pinnacle Studio Correcting Video iners SEAS rud x edt AG t ER RS 145 Video tools dace Bai UE wh
269. ons 151 Registered User My Documents My Pictures Images Clear and Cancel Clear sets the selection frame back to its original setting whole image while Cancel exits snapshot editing without creating any new media Stabilize Similar to the electronic stabilization in digital camcorders this tool minimizes shake and jitter caused by inadvertent camera movement When using this effect the outer areas of the image are removed and a varying portion of the image is enlarged up to 20 percent in order to fill the frame After Stabilize has been applied the video must be rendered to preview accurately Instead of using the Play control on the toolbar click the Render amp Play button on the Stabilize panel to preview Correcting audio The Audio Editor can be used both for audio only media such as wav files and for video with an included original or synchronous audio track For information about opening the Audio Editor to access the correction tools along with general functions of the media editors please see Media editing overview on page 130 For an overview of audio related information please see Chapter 8 Sound and music on page 235 For coverage of the Audio Editor see The Audio Editor on page 237 Please see Audio corrections on page 243 for descriptions of the individual correction tools 152 Pinnacle Studio User Guide t NA B Chapter 5 Effects Pinnacle Studio ha
270. ons just for navigation between menus The behavior of these buttons is built in A pair of next and previous buttons lets the Chapter 9 Disc projects 273 view move between pages within the same menu while a home button causes a transfer to the project s first menu Tip To display the main menus side by side with their matching multi page menus in the Library right click in the gray area next to a menu and choose Sort by gt Name Menu buttons The number of chapter buttons per page varies from one menu design to another so one criterion for selecting a menu is the number of clips you want it to handle But if you want a different number of buttons on a particular menu you can add or delete buttons in the Menu Editor which is launched by clicking the Edit button on the Player See The Menu Editor on page 285 for details Menus with fewer buttons usually have more space for captions those with many buttons will have to settle for abbreviated captions or none at all Whether you need captions and if so whether they should be simple Chapter 1 or descriptive Cutting the Cake is a matter of your authoring style and the content of your movie Unlinked menus and buttons Only the first menu in the Menu List is automatically available to the user and then only if there is any content on the timeline to serve as the initial chapter Menus added later do not become part of your production s menuing system until you link them w
271. ook up a soundtrack on the spot with the ScoreFitter tool That might be all it takes though you can work on the project further with manual editing if you wish Once you have a final product you like it takes only a few clicks to burn it onto a disc or save it as a file for other uses such as upload to the web The SmartMovie panel that slides up into the window from below contains three subpanels The leftmost of these presents information about SmartMovie and advice on how many files to include The center subpanel is a storage area with bins for photos and other images top and audio The right subpanel contains controls for customizing the show Chapter 2 The Library 57 Adding media To add media to the production drag them from the Browser into the upper bin in the storage area Drag thumbnails within the storage area to get the order you want Continue adding further images until you are satisfied To add music drag one or more sound files to the lower bin in the storage area Alternatively you can click the clef button ka in the bottom left corner of the audio bin to create a music soundtrack in ScoreFitter Preview edit and export Once your media are in place click the Preview button on the footer bar below the tool The project is created and presented in a preview window If necessary you can return to the settings to modify your media selections When you click the Preview button the media you have chosen are
272. or in a project Chapter 4 Corrections 127 associated with a particular clip Correcting Library assets Just one tool family tab Corrections is available for use when you bring Library assets into a media editor The Effects tab and Pan and zoom for photos appear only when the editor was opened to work on a timeline clip Using corrected assets When you apply Corrections to a Library asset the correction settings ride along with the asset when you add it to a project All future projects get the benefit of the correction You can make further corrections on the timeline if you want but they will have no effect on the Library asset Save alternative corrections Corrected Library assets can optionally be saved with File gt Make new shortcut as separate assets This lets you have two or more variations of a particular asset under different captions each incorporating a different set of corrections 128 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Working with the Enhance group of corrections in the Video Editor Removing corrections The context menu for Library assets that have corrections includes a Revert to original command for restoring the uncorrected state Corrections under direct export If you choose to export Library media directly rather than build a project on the movie or disc timelines the correction settings are applied to the output Correcting timeline clips When a clip from the Movie Editor or the
273. or the show The video settings button on the settings panel below provides access to these Chapter 2 The Library 61 When the presentation is the way you want it click Export to burn a disc or create a file for upload The storage area The visual assets in the upper bin are displayed as icons while the music and sound files in the lower bin appear as text lines giving the file name and duration of each asset Both bins support multiple selection drag and drop reordering and a short context menu Delete selected The selected media are removed from the SmartMovie production They remain available in the Library for other uses Shortcut Delete Open editor This command opens the Corrections tool of the Video Editor the Photo Editor or the Audio Editor Any modifications you make to the media apply only within this SmartMovie production Shortcut double click SmartMovie settings The settings on this subpanel customize the SmartMovie production Settings Title Clip Lengths Pan amp Zoom Video Track Volume 50 Photo Video Mix Selecting the medium Clip Length setting on the SmartMovie settings panel At the bottom are buttons for adjusting video settings for the generated project and for starting over 62 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The settings entered will be used the next time the movie is generated The video settings button lets you set up the timeline options that will apply if you take the
274. ore details can be displayed See Pixel 422 Pinnacle Studio User Guide RGB Red Green and Blue the primary colors in additive color mixing RGB designates the method used in computer technology of encoding image information in pixels each containing some combination of the three primaries ROM Read Only Memory Memory storage that having been programmed once retains its data without requiring electrical power See EPROM Run Length Encoding RLE A technique used in many image compression methods including JPEG Repeating values are not stored separately but with a counter to indicate how many times the value occurs in succession the length of the run Scaling Adaptation of an image to a desired size SCSI Small Computers System Interface SCSI was long preferred as the hard drive interface for some high performance PCs because of its high data rate Up to eight SCSI devices can be connected to a computer at the same time SECAM S quentiel Couleur M moire a color TV transmission system used in France and Eastern Europe Like PAL SECAM video has 625 lines per frame and 50 image fields per second See V75C PAL Serial port Data transmitted via a serial port is processed one bit at a time that is serially one after another The transmission rate is much slower than that of a parallel port where parallel data lines allow multiple bits to be sent simultaneously Serial ports are named COMn wher
275. orld Together Last Duraton 00 03 56 29 Preview Add to Movie Save As The ScoreFitter window Select a Category Song and Version then click the Add To Movie button To create music for a particular set of clips select those clips before clicking the Create song button to open ScoreFitter To select your whole movie use Edit gt Select All or press Ctrl A The total length of the selected clips will determine the initial setting for the music duration but you can modify the value at any time by trimming the clip on the timeline or by editing the Duration counter in the tool In ScoreFitter choose a category song and version from the lists provided Each category offers its own selection of songs and each song its own selection of versions Use the Preview button to audition the song while the tool is open Enter a name for the clip in the Name field and adjust its duration with the Duration counter if desired The music clip you create will be adjusted to fit exactly the duration you select 262 Pinnacle Studio User Guide When you have made your choice click the Add to Movie button Studio creates the new clip on the active track beginning at the current time index as shown by the timeline scrubber and the preview frame in the Player Expanding your song collection ScoreFitter songs come in collections called libraries The Standard library which is included with Studio includes more than 40 songs in style
276. otograph although at the risk of losing definition in areas that are already very bright or very dark Temperature The color temperature control changes the color composition of an image to make it seem warmer or cooler Indoor lighting such as a tungsten bulb or candlelight is perceived as warm while daylight especially shade is perceived as cold Using the temperature control primarily changes the yellow and blue values in an image with little effect on green and magenta Saturation This control regulates the color intensity of an image Increasing the value pumps up the colors making them more vivid or even lurid Decreasing the value drains the image of color until at zero only shades of gray remain For finer control of saturation use Selective Chapter 4 Corrections 139 Saturation instead A related adjustment is Vibrance which is often preferred in portraits because it preserves skin tones Clarity Increasing Clarity boosts contrast in the midtones tending to sharpen edges in an image A small increase in Clarity often improves a picture s overall appearance Haze Increasing Haze lightens the image by compressing its dynamic range upwards What was originally black becomes gray lighter tones are also brightened but to a diminishing degree This produces a simultaneous lightening and softening effect The opposite result darkening and detailing is achieved by setting negative values of Haze This drops
277. ou can use the context menu command Delete Layer If the layer is a text layer in text edit mode the Delete command and the Delete key apply to the layer s text only not the layer itself Text and text settings For all the graphical sophistication of the Title Editor in many instances the primary reason for using titles is the text they contain The editor therefore provides several specialized options to help you ensure that you can get your text looking exactly the way you want The text operations we will look at below include Editing the text 216 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Changing fonts font sizes and styles Setting text justification and flow Copying and pasting text properties The areas of the Title Editor of most interest in text work are the Edit Window and the Text Settings panel For styling a text layer the Looks section of the Presets Selector and the Look settings panel also come into play See Preset Looks on page 201 and Look settings on page 209 Text edit mode As described elsewhere when dragging a text layer you have to be careful to click at the edge of the control frame rather than anywhere within it to avoid accidentally putting the layer into text edit mode For the operations described here however text edit mode is exactly what we want In a newly created text layer text edit mode is already enabled you can begin to type immediately and the default text will be replaced
278. ou do not own a license to distribute them freely This status is indicated by the lock indicator Wedding sub 16x Even though locked the content can still be handled as usual You can edit it in the Library and add it to a timeline A project containing locked content can be saved put on a disc and exported 36 Pinnacle Studio User Guide However a translucent watermark logo will appear on the locked content The locked content watermark To purchase and unlock the content use one of the following options e In the Library click the lock symbol on the icon During export of a project with locked content a dialog will appear prompting you to click the lock symbol When editing effects in one of the media editors click the lock symbol on the Settings panel For more information see The Settings panel on page 178 STAIR MOV S3D Eye Selector Te Select nreset Default Click to unlock this content appa Send to Right Eye Chapter 2 The Library 37 Optional indicators and controls The optional indicators and buttons on an asset icon in the Library Browser let you access and in some cases modify information about the asset without having to burrow deeper Use the pop up checklist on the thumbnails view button to determine which indicators and buttons are displayed Caption The caption below the icon is the Library alias for the asset which you can set with the Edit caption context
279. play back successfully when DVD player software like PowerDVD and WinDVD are used DVD playback in Windows Media Player may work depending on your version of Windows If you have problems playing the disc DVD even on your computer s DVD drive read document 221479 Playing DVDs on your computer 4 Try playing the DVD on other set top players Some equipment may not play a certain brand of DVD or a certain DVD media format R R RW or RW If you are uncertain whether the DVD player supports a given media type check the manufacturer s website for information If the disc type is not supported by the player you will need to recreate the disc in another format If the disc plays in one DVD player but not another it may be that the second player is on the verge of device failure or that it cannot reliably read writable media In this situation experiment with DVD brands and types until you find a combination that works dependably on your equipment 5 Confirm that the project you created is set for the playback format used in your region e g NTSC for North America PAL for Europe If the project and hence the disc are in the wrong format some DVD players will not be able to play the disc Appendix A Troublehooting 399 To check the project video format click the gear icon at the top left of the timeline in the Disc Editor Opening the timeline settings dialog On the Timeline Settings dialog make sure that the Size drop
280. posite signals Video CD CD ROM standard that uses MPEG compressed videos Video decoder Converts digital information into analog video signals Video encoder Converts analog video signals into digital information Video for Windows A Microsoft Windows system extension that can record digital video sequences to files on a hard drive and subsequently play them back Appendix C Glossary 425 Video scan rate Frequency with which the video signal is scanned onto an image display The higher the video scan rate the higher the image quality and the less noticeable the flicker WAV File extension for a popular file format for digitized audio signals White balance In an electronic camera this is the adjustment of the amplifiers for the three color channels red green and blue so that white areas of the scene do not show a color cast Y C Y C is a color signal with two components brightness information Y and color information C YUV The color model of a video signal where Y delivers the brightness information and U and V the color information 426 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The tables below display the default hotkey assignments in Pinnacle Studio Keys can be individually remapped in Setup The defaults can also be restored there either individually or for all the shortcuts at once For more information see Keyboard on page 372 The terms Left Right Up and Down in the tables refer to the arrow cursor
281. production into the Movie Editor The clear project button removes all media from the project and returns to default settings Title Enter a caption to be used as the main title of the movie Clip lengths The visual tempo of your movie increases as the clip length is shortened Maximum uses the original length of the asset Pan and zoom Checking this option enlivens your presentation with simulated camera moves Fit image Check this option to enlarge material that is too small for the frame format of your project Video volume Set the volume of the original audio in the video segments For a soundtrack of background music only set to zero Media order Set the order of slides from As defined you set the sequence Chronological by file date and Random Chapter 2 The Library 63 64 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Chapter 3 The Movie Editor The Movie Editor is Pinnacle Studio s main editing screen for digital movie creation The editor brings together three main components The Library in its compact view provides the assets available to your project The Timeline lets you organize the assets as clips within a schematic representation of your production The Player lets you preview Library assets before adding them to your project It also lets you view on a frame by frame basis if you like how any part of the production will actually appear to your audience when you export it
282. project and add a few scenes to the timeline from the sample video Then click on the tab or button that seems to cause the failure If this test project does not crash it may mean that the problem is with the actual project you are working on rather than with Studio or your system If the test project does fail please contact support and provide us with the details on the exact failure mode We will try to recreate the problem Case 3 Studio crashes repeatably If Studio crashes when you performing some specific procedure or combination of steps start by trying the troubleshooting steps given above for Case 1 since this is just a more complicated version of Case 2 It is often very difficult to pin down the exact sequence of steps that results in a failure A simple test project using the sample video as noted above will be a big help first in your own investigations and second to help achieve a fast resolution if support is required Appendix A Troublehooting 397 Export problems If errors are reported or the application freezes or performs incorrectly while exporting a file or disc please check our knowledge base for articles regarding the specific failure scenario you are experiencing Disc playback problems Document ID 384235 If you have a problem with DVDs created by Studio not playing back or appearing to be blank the steps below should help to resolve it Other kinds of playback problems may be addressed elsewhere in
283. put some preprocessing will usually be required In general Pinnacle Studio will need to render generate video frames in the output format any transitions titles disc menus and video effects you ve added to your movie Any files generated during the rendering process are stored in the auxiliary files folder whose location you can set in the application settings window Create between markers For output to file or to the Cloud you have the option of exporting only a selected portion of your movie Adjust the trim calipers in the Player or the Timeline to indicate which part of the movie you want to export Set the Mark In and Mark Out calipers to export a segment of the timeline 340 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Output to disc or memory card Studio can output movies directly onto DVD and Blu ray discs if the requisite disc burning hardware is available on your system Whether or not you have a disc burner Studio can also create a disc image a set of files containing the same information as would be stored onto the disc in a directory on your hard drive The image can subsequently be burned onto a disc or transferred to a flash memory card Note Blu ray authoring is not activated by default To activate it choose Help gt Enable Blu ray authoring DVD and Blu ray If your system has a DVD burner Studio can create two types of DVD disc standard for DVD players and AVCHD format for Blu ray players
284. py of the project inside the container clip not the original The length of the container clip on the timeline of the main project is not tied to the length of the sub movie on its own timeline Extending or shortening the sub movie in the nested editor does not alter the length of the container clip in the parent movie You need to manually trim the container clip if you want it to match the duration of the sub movie Transitions A transition is a specialized animated effect for easing or emphasizing the passage from one clip to the next Fades wipes and dissolves are common types of transition Others are more exotic and many employ sophisticated 3D geometry to calculate the animated sequences 116 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Creating a default fade in transition by folding back a clip s upper left corner Two transitions can be assigned to any clip one at each end A clip newly created on the timeline has neither When a new clip starts it does so with a hard cut to the first frame When it ends it switches to the next clip or black with equal abruptness Pinnacle Studio offers a wide variety of transitions for softening dressing up or dramatizing the change from one clip to another Creating a transition The most straightforward method of creating a transition is to click in the top left corner of the clip on the timeline and fold back the corner This creates a dissolve from the previous clip
285. r Volume 2 Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio ScoreFitter Volume 3 Supported Title Extreme Supported Included in Pinnacle Studio Third party Ultimate Ultimate Support Collection content discs Studio 11 Stagetools Moving Not supported Picture Studio 11 BIAS SoundSoap V1 PE Supported Paid upgrade required Studio 11 ProDAD VitaScene Supported Paid upgrade required Studio 12 ProDAD VitaScene Supported Paid upgrade required Studio 12 Red Giant Magic Bullet Supported Looks Studio 14 Red Giant Knoll Light Supported Factory Studio 14 Red Giant Toonlt Supported Studio 14 Red Giant Trapcode 3D Supported Stroke 384 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Studio 14 Red Giant Trapcode Particular Supported Studio 14 Red Giant Shine Supported Third party eStore content Support BIAS SoundSoap V2 PE Supported Studio 17 Red Giant Magic Bullet Supported Looks Indie Pack Studio 17 RedGiant Particular Supported Studio Preset Pack Studio 17 RedGiant Shine Studio Supported Preset Pack Studio 17 RedGiant Toonlt Studio Supported Preset Pack Studio 17 RedGiant Knoll Studio Supported Preset Pack Studio 17 Red Giant Trapcode Supported Starglow Studio 17 Red Giant Warp Supported ProDad Vitascene Supported ProDad Adorage Supported ProDad Adorage FX Pack 10 Supported Pro
286. r again you can use the mouse or arrow keys as just described or give the standard shortcut Ctrl A 218 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The Text Settings panel The topmost Settings subpanel is this group of controls for editing and styling the content of the current text layer Using the text field In cases where text in the Edit Window is difficult or impossible to access for editing the text field in the panel provides another convenient way to select and edit your text This is the approach to take if the text is off screen at the scrubber position which can happen when Motions are involved The text field expands to provide up to three lines as you type then adds a scroll bar if further lines are entered Styling highlighted text Most of the Title Editor text controls are probably quite familiar to you from using similar controls in other applications Those that apply to the highlighted text only are these Font styling To set or unset the bold italic or underline properties of the selected text use the toggle buttons in the header bar or the standard keyboard shortcuts Ctrl B Ctrl I and Ctrl U The buttons light up when their respective style options are active Chapter 7 The Title Editor 219 Font name Your titles are the perfect place to experiment with fancy display fonts so you ll likely be accessing this dropdown list quite often If you have many fonts on your system the list can be quite long For eas
287. r are also visible Click and drag on the timeline to adjust the timing of the Montage For a detailed explanation of the template structure see Anatomy of a template on page 187 Working with drop zones Clearing drop zones To delete a subclip from its drop zone right click the zone and select Remove Media from the context menu Muting subclip audio Some drop zones are marked with an audio symbol indicating that the audio portion of any video in that zone will be included in the Montage clip s audio If you don t want the audio to be used click the symbol to mute the subclip Choosing the start of your subclip Video in a drop zone can be adjusted to start from an offset in the subclip Click and drag the start of clip slider located under the drop zone to adjust the start frame The keyboard left and right arrow keys are handy for making fine adjustments 192 Pinnacle Studio User Guide If the drop zone you are working with is active at that time index the preview will reflect any changes to the start frame When you are fine tuning the start frame of a subclip it s a good idea to set the scrubber position to the location where the Player preview will be of the greatest assistance Using the start of clip slider changes neither the position of the subclip within the template nor its duration but only which excerpt of the subclip is used If you set the start of the subclip so late that the video runs out while it
288. r media item In smart mode the replace operation will succeed only if the Library clip is long enough to cover the full length of the clip being replaced In other modes a Library clip of insufficient length will be extended using over trimming The direction and amount of the extension is based on your mouse position as you drag For information on over trimming please see Over trimming on page 99 If the Library asset is longer than needed it will be truncated to the same length as the clip being replaced Sending to the timeline In addition to dragging a clip to the timeline you can send it to the default track at the position of the playhead The operation is equivalent to drag and drop so smart mode is applied accordingly when deciding how other clips will be affected The Send to timeline 94 Pinnacle Studio User Guide command is found on the context menu of an individual asset or multiple selection in the compact view of the Library Sending from the Player There is also a second send method that provides greater control If you click on a Library asset when working in the Movie Editor the Player switches to Source mode for previewing For trimmable media video and audio the Player also provides trim calipers for cutting out a starting or ending portion of the asset m 00 00 40 00 Clicking the Send To Timeline button in the Player after trimming a Library video asset After previewing the as
289. r projects explicitly rather than relying on inheriting the format from the first clip added open the Project settings page of the application settings See Project settings on page 374 Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 79 Navigation tool selector The space just under the toolbar can be occupied by the Navigator or the Storyboard or by neither In the Disc Editor there is a third possibility the Menu List The Navigation tool selector includes a dropdown that lets you select which tool you want displayed in that area Clicking on the selector icon toggles the visibility of the area itself See The Navigator on page 72 and The Storyboard on page 74 for more about these navigation tools Audio mixer This button opens the enhanced audio control area with volume adjustment tools and access to the Panner a surround panning control ScoreFitter ScoreFitter is the integrated music generator of Pinnacle Studio providing you with custom composed royalty free music exactly adjusted to the duration required for your movie See ScoreFitter on page 261 80 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Title The Title button opens the Title Editor If none of the many T supplied titles answers your need why not author one of your own See Chapter 7 The Title Editor on page 195 Voice over The voice over tool lets you record commentary or other audio content live while viewing your movie See The Voice over tool on page 2
290. rashcan button Look settings The Settings panel provides access to the Look Settings where you can examine modify add or delete the individual detail layers that are overlaid to generate a particular Look Your Text Here BIu Sonic XBd BT Blue Bevel Click the Look Settings arrow on the Settings panel to open a subpanel where the Look of a layer can be edited Under the name of the currently selected preset Blue Bevel are three buttons for creating new detail layers The edit panel for the Face detall s open Chapter 7 The Title Editor 209 There are three types of detail layer face surface edge and shadow The three types differ not in the settings they support but in the default position at which they will be inserted in the layer stack Unless explicitly dragged out of position face details always appear at the top of the stack followed by edges and finally shadows After a detail has been created however it can be dragged up or down in the layer stack as desired Face Edge and Shadow A new face detail lett top is added above the uppermost existing face layer new edge and shadow details are added below the bottommost layer of their respective types The properties of individual detail layers can be modified by means of controls on collapsible panels in the Looks Editor The following detail properties are available e Offset X Offset Y These sliders set the position of the det
291. rd drive space when dealing with files that can be very large the project file does not include the media items in your movie For these only their location in the Library is stored The axp project file is the default file format for the File gt Open File gt Save and File gt Save As menu commands It may be the only one you need Sometimes however it is convenient to have all the resources recruited for a project gathered into a single manageable unit for hassle free archiving file transfer or upload This is the purpose of an alternative file format the axx Studio Project Package which contains in a single file all the materials your project uses including media items Of necessity files in this format are considerably larger than standard project files Although it is not possible to directly edit a project in the package format Pinnacle Studio lets you open a project package with File Open by selecting axx in the file extension box Studio seamlessly unpacks the project creates a new Library entry for the unpacked version and opens it for editing Chapter 1 Using Pinnacle Studio 15 Pinnacle Studio User Guide my E 2g l nacie 7 pinnacie Chapter 2 The Library The Pinnacle Studio Library displayed when you click the Organize tab is a cataloguing and management tool for all the file based resources you can draw on when authoring Its purpose is to let you choose and use the video segments photos soun
292. re open and spacious Audio on the timeline The audio levels and stereo or surround positioning of individual clips can be adjusted directly on the timeline using audio keyframing The same operations can also be accomplished with the Audio Mixer panel which pops out to the right of the timeline header when you click its access button Both methods have their own advantages Making the adjustments on the timeline gives a good sense of time versus volume or balance whereas the Audio Mixer in combination with the Panner facilitates mixing separately adjusting the volume and balance of each audio containing track Surround sound The Panner tool is fully surround capable For maximum flexibility you can position any clip s audio as desired in a two dimensional listening field from front to rear as well as left to right If you mixthe audio for every clip as though for surround playback you can still output a movie file with a stereo soundtrack using just the left right balance information If you further decide to output your project on DVD the 5 1 surround sound production will already be complete Timeline audio functions Along with the track management functions the header area of the timeline is also home to a number of audio controls Chapter 8 Sound and music 251 Master playback level Above the timeline track headers is a master playback level indicator As you preview your project it shows the total output
293. rently selected or the Layer List A member layer can even be added to a temporary group with other layers inside or outside the permanent one Multiple selection of layers The first step in making a group is to select the multiple objects that will comprise it In the Edit Window this can be accomplished in two ways e By clicking and dragging with the mouse to mark out a selection rectangle a marquee that intersects all the objects you want to group e By clicking the first object you want to group then Ctrl clicking each of the others 232 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Another approach to multiple selection uses the Layer List For more information see Working with the Layer List on page 225 Edit Window operations on the group Both temporary and permanent groups can be repositioned resized and rotated To reposition any group drag it to the new position as though it were an individual layer To rotate a permanent group drag the rotation handle of the shared control frame All members of the group revolve about their common center like planets revolving around the Sun To rotate a temporary group drag the rotation handle of any member All members of the group rotate about their own centers like planets rotating on their axes To resize a permanent group drag any control point of the shared frame The size of the whole group changes as though you were stretching a rubber sheet with all the layers paint
294. roll bar to return it to the full width of the clip You can also zoom in and out by dragging left and right on the ruler area Markers Markers are visual reference points that can be set on the time ruler to identify changes of scene or other editing cues Marker Pane Shake all hands j Position 00 00 46 81 Marker Cor CIC E The boss walks in 00 00 06 03 Massive promotion 00 00 17 91 Shake af hands JO 00 46 81 Hugs kisses 00 00 59 45 E Phoning home 00 01 26 95 April Fool 00 01 36 32 The Marker Panel Setting and moving markers Position the playhead at the location where the marker should be set Click the toggle marker button at the left of the toolbar or press M Only one marker may be set per frame To move a marker Ctrl click and drag left or right 148 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Deleting the marker Click the marker to move the playhead to that position then either press M or click the toggle marker button You can also delete markers using the list on the Marker Panel which opens when you double click a marker on the ruler or click the down arrow next to the toggle marker button The Marker Panel shows the markers that have been set within the media currently on view in ascending order with color code name and position Most of the available commands apply to the currently selected marker The exception is the Delete all markers button at the bottom of the panel Clicking a marker in the list
295. rom the timeline the Effects tab will be preselected in the Photo Editor Switch to the Pan and zoom tab Pan and Zoom Static 2 In this illustration the Pan and zoom tab has been selected and remains set to the default Static mode The selection frame which we see is being resized with the mouse defines a region of the image that will be magnified to fill the entire frame as shown in the floating preview panel bottom right Pan and zoom has two alternative operating modes which are selected with buttons just above the preview In the Static mode a single unchanging image region is shown throughout duration of the Chapter 5 Effects 175 clip In the Animated mode separate regions are defined for the first and last frame of the clip on playback a smooth camera move from one to the other is shown Animated mode also allows keyframing in which any number of additional defined regions can be added to the pan and zoom camera path Static mode In Static mode a gray selection frame with round control points is displayed over the image You can enlarge reduce and move this frame but you cannot change its proportions aspect ratio A small floating preview window displays the currently defined selection The zoom and position can also be controlled numerically using sliders in the Attributes panel Double click the sliders to reset the values or single click to enter a numeric value Attributes Select preset
296. rough which the content of underlying tracks will be visible The names of these titles all contain the keyword overlay Full screen titles have no transparent areas they fully occupy the video frame Their names contain the keyword fullscreen In the Library you can easily view only the titles of one or the other type by searching on the appropriate keyword Tip Other search keywords to try out with titles in the Library are roll crawl name and title Saving the title Use Save Title as in the File menu in the Title Editor to store titles to your computer s file system From there titles can be exported to other computers and shared with other Pinnacle Studio users If you save to a watchfolder the edited title will appear in your Library automatically Closing the Title Editor To close the Title Editor use any of the following methods Click the OK button at the bottom of the Title Editor If you opened the title from the Library you will be prompted to save any changes to the title under a new name If you opened the title from a timeline your new or updated title becomes part of the current project Click on the Cancel button at the bottom of the Title Editor Any changes you have made are discarded 198 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Click the Cancel button X at the top right of the window This is equivalent to clicking Cancel except that if you have made changes you w
297. rter The Pinnacle Studio Exporter helps you over that last hurdle with tools for taking your movie to its viewers whoever and wherever they might be Create a digital movie file in the format of your choice burn a DVD or upload directly to destinations in the Cloud like YouTube and Vimeo or to your personal Cloud based storage area in Box Like the Importer the Exporter opens in a separate window and returns to the main window after its work is done See Chapter 11 The Exporter on page 337 to learn more The central tabs The three central tabs Library Movie and Disc are where most of your work in Pinnacle Studio takes place The first of these opens the main view of the Library where you can curate your media collections Chapter 1 Using Pinnacle Studio 7 The other tabs open the two project editors one for digital movies and the other for disc projects which are digital movies enhanced with interactivity in the form of DVD menus The Library The Library is a cataloging and management tool for all the file based resources or assets that you can draw on when authoring Almost all of the materials of your movie video footage music and audio files and many specialized resources such as transitions and effects originate as assets in the Library Many Library assets are supplied with Pinnacle Studio and are available for royalty free use These include professionally designed titles DVD menus so
298. rting a screen capture project 0 000000 0 00 e ee 377 Recording your Screen 6 eee 378 Appendix A Troublehooting 00 2000 381 Contacting SUpport ig sie steer et Nee ls 382 FORUMS 522 Lice RE De eel ede ads oe Divos 382 TOp SUPPOMt ISSUES ene eS ae ee A ae ee nets 382 Capture hardware compatibility llis 387 Serial number information iiie 388 Error or crash while installing lesse 389 Hangs or crashes while launching siis 390 Troubleshooting software crashes nanana auaa aaau 392 Case 1 Studio crashes randomly 0 00005 393 Case 2 Studio crashes after a user action 397 Case 3 Studio crashes repeatably 002005 397 Export problems i1 bacs t dba ua m pos d cet tedio gal 398 Disc playback problems 1 0 0 0 000 cece EE 398 Appendix B Videography 00 00 eee eae 401 Creating a shooting plan ic adt eben 401 EIN Gis PET 402 Rules of thumb for video editing 0 0 00 0 cece eee 406 Soundtrack Productio Mie xo aree e had rta eot d nes 408 Title as chat hate s oa oe t MISERE PER eec tres 409 Appendix C Glossary llis 411 Appendix D Keyboard shortcuts 04 427 General shortcuts LL aba EE et SR td ace 427 lor 428 vi Pinnacle Studio Playing and transport 0 00 00 cee eee eee 429 Itnporter civ vespere ROI Re RE de NG dee Pe 430 Movie interface sies 430 Media editors
299. rtunities for putting your creative stamp on the production Every aspect of a disc menu the details of its visual appearance the linking of its on screen buttons the precise timing of its chapters can be edited in Pinnacle Studio For the visual aspects you will turn to the Menu Editor but the linking of buttons and the timing of chapters are both controlled within the Disc Editor itself For an overview of the Disc Editor interface please see Chapter 9 Disc projects on page 267 Timeline menu markers The chapter buttons on a disc menu can be individually linked to any point on your movie s timeline In the Disc Editor those points are indicated on the timeline by chapter markers on the Chapter Track which is a specialized timeline track that materializes above the other tracks when a first menu is added to your movie The track is removed again if all menus are deleted The caption of a chapter marker consists of the letter C followed by the chapter s sequence number in its menu Chapter 9 Disc projects 277 Return markers which mark automatic exit points from the timeline back to a disc menu are also shown in the Chapter Track The caption of a return marker is the letter M with the sequence number of the target menu Regardless of the length of your production you are limited to a combined total of 99 chapter buttons and return markers The color of chapter and return markers matches the Menu L
300. rves and angled shapes Anti aliasing A method of smoothing out jagged edges in bitmap images This is usually accomplished by shading the edges with pixels Appendix C Glossary 411 intermediate in color between the edge and the background making the transition less apparent Another method of anti aliasing involves using higher resolution output devices Aspect ratio The ratio of width to height in an image or graphic Keeping the aspect ratio fixed means that any change to one value is immediately reflected in the other AVI Audio Video Interleaved a standard format for digital video and Video for Windows Batch capture An automated process that uses an Fait decision list EDL to locate and recapture specific clips from a videotape usually at a higher data rate than the clip was originally captured BIOS Acronym for Basic Input Output System which refers to basic input and output commands saved in a ROM PROM or EPROM The essential task of the BIOS is the control of input and output When the system is started the ROM BIOS carries out some tests See Parallel port IRQ VO Bit Abbreviation of Binary digiT the smallest element of a computer s memory Among other things bits are used to store the color values of pixels in an image The more bits used for each Pixel the greater the number of available colors For example e 1 bit each pixel is either black or white e 4 bit allows 16 colors or gray shade
301. s To correct the file time or date Use the more button E on the selection status indicator to opena window that offers two options for adjusting the timestamps Correct time zone This slider changes the file system timestamp of any media files you import by up to 12 hours in either direction You can use this adjustment to compensate for the time difference when you bring home video from your travels Setdate and time These fields lets you enter an arbitrary date and time The timestamp of any media files you import will be set to this Scan for assets When you select Scan For Assets in the Import From panel a hierarchical folder view is displayed much like the one shown for My computer Expanding and collapsing folders works as usual including the use of the Plus and Minus keys as shortcuts Since you are selecting folders rather than files to be scanned the media files and project files contained in the folders are not shown A 320 Pinnacle Studio User Guide checkbox appears next to each name in the folder tree and four pop up lists are offered on the toolbar at bottom These lists offer a menu of file types to import in each category Video Photo Audio and Projects By default the file extensions on each menu are all checked meaning that all the appearing file types will be included in the import operation Uncheck the file extensions for any types that you do not wish to import To start importing mark a
302. s e 8 bit allows 256 colors or gray shades e 16 bit allows 65 536 colors e 24 bit allows about 16 7 million colors Bitmap An image format made up of a collection of dots or pixels arranged in rows See Pixel 412 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Blacking The process of preparing a videotape for insert editing by recording video black and continuous control track on the entire tape If the recording deck supports timecode continuous timecode will be recorded simultaneously also called striping Brightness Also luminance Indicates the brightness of video Byte One byte corresponds to eight bits With one byte exactly one alphanumeric character can be displayed i e a letter number CD ROM Mass storage media for digital data such as digital video CD ROMs can be read from but not written recorded onto ROM is an acronym for Read Only Memory Channel Classifications of information within a data file to isolate a particular aspect of the file For example color images use different channels to classify the color components in the image Stereo audio files use channels to identify the sounds intended for the left and right speakers Video files use combinations of the channels used for image and audio files Clip In Pinnacle Studio any media element used on the timeline of a movie or disc project Clip media include videos audio files photos titles and Montage Clipboard A temporary storage area s
303. s you to produce certain effects but even enables you to convey messages that cannot or should not be shown in pictures There are basically six methods of conveying messages through cuts Let s look at each in turn Associative cuts Shots are strung together in a certain order to trigger associations in the mind of the viewer but the actual message is not shown Example A man bets on a horse race and in very next scene we see him shopping for an expensive new car at a car dealership Parallel cuts Two actions are shown in parallel The film jumps back and forth between the two actions making the shots shorter and shorter until the end This is a way of building suspense until it peaks Example Two different cars drive from different directions at high speed toward the same intersection Contrast cuts The film purposely cuts unexpectedly from one shot to another very different shot in order to point up the contrast to the viewer Example A tourist lying on the beach the next shot shows starving children Substitutionary cut Events that cannot or should not be shown are replaced by other events a child is born but instead of childbirth the blossoming of a flower bud is shown Appendix B Videography 407 Cause and effect cuts Shots are related by virtue of cause and effect without the first shot the second would be incomprehensible Example A man fights with his wife and in the very next shot is seen sleepi
304. s 216 Titles and stereoscopic 3D iilis sees 222 The Layer List amp zm dx tes as REPE Sek RE exped 224 Working with the Layer List 0 0 0 0 sees 225 Working with layer groups lisse 230 Chapter 8 Sound and music 2000000 235 The Audi Edito spe s encre EM Ex nA t EM SEE 237 A dio cOrtectiOnss x o e ee CI c recs 243 Audio effects 20 0s 248 Audio on the timeline llle 251 Timeline audio functions i i 251 Audio creation tools ss sot b eb e SPP bcd e 260 SCOIGFIEIG zu nc d awk ped Fuga e d qr oe e EG ut 261 The Voiceover TOG uc xx artes gem st Pede tei 263 Chapter 9 Disc projects 2 0 illl else 267 DISC Tes um d dede dhe ge d de plot dax NT d 269 Adding discmefus i bug b ete Pt ebd a 273 Previewing dis menus ssa eet aud ye uen RA Red ERES 275 Menu editing on the timeline llis esses 277 Timeline menu markers llle 277 Au thoring tools ox PER Debra rRNA 278 The Chapter Wizard ciei ea sese 281 The Menu Editors dos on Sr ee e tete 285 Menu DUNS cx v ius SIRE ee RU REEL ERE dien 285 THE DISC SIMULA urhe FA we ahs ew ee 288 Chapter 10 The Importer 0000 2c eee 291 Using the Importer sz 9x Sata gas Ae ae RE RES 292 Import r panels seda Pte EEWE eR t DE Gem dais 294 iv Pinnacle Studio The Import To panel 2 0 2 cee 299 The Mod panel y sedet su LEER eee ee ele es 303 The Compression Options window sss 307 Th
305. s are intended for use with Normal buttons which may be linked to any chapter marker on your timeline Navigation Buttons These designs are meant for Next Previous and Root buttons with hard wired navigation Thumbnail Buttons These include a thumbnail area where a timeline clip can be previewed Button settings The Button Settings panel is to the right of the Menu Editor preview Chapter 9 Disc projects 287 Normal Underine Selected A Set As Default Still Thumbnail The Button Settings panel is part of the Menu Editor The Disc Simulator To preview your project after setting up its menus click the play button at the bottom of the Player This activates the Disc Simulator window 288 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Source Timeline i Sb Your Text Here gt A ct D When the Disc Editor Player is previewing a menu in your project s Menu List a button bottom center is provided for testing your project in the Disc Simulator Provided the project is built correctly the simulator should open at the main menu with Play Movie and Scene Selection links ready for the viewer to use To move from link to link within the preview use the DVD navigation buttons on the bottom right or click the links directly in the preview Take the time to verify all the chapter and menu links your production includes Every desired user interaction should be checked slip ups are frustrating for the vi
306. s from behind each line of text is brought onto the screen along a perspective track as though it originated from behind the viewer s own position Chapter 7 The Title Editor 203 Page based Motions affect the entire layer simultaneously One example is the enter Motion Barrel roll which rolls the layer into position from above as though it were painted on the side of an invisible rolling barrel Matching the enter and exit Motions Most enter Motions have a corresponding exit Motion with which they can be paired if visual consistency is desired For example a layer that enters with the Words from infinity Motion could be configured to exit with Words to infinity However this kind of consistency is only an option not a requirement and you can mix and match Motions of the three types in any way you choose Looks Emphasis Exit Wo Movie Trailer Complete Complete l ulse 00 Roll Up 01 Rubberb 02 City Lights 03 Movie Tr 04 Movie Tr 05 Line Pulse The Presets Selector offers Enter Emphasis and Exit Motions Each layer in a title can use one Motion of each type Previewing Motions To preview a particular Motion on a particular layer first select the layer then open the Motions tab of the Presets Selector and hover your mouse over the thumbnail of interest As you hover a looping preview of the title animation will begin to run in the Edit Window so that you can immediately see
307. s good tags by making it easier to find assets that fulfill particular structural or creative requirements Correcting media You can apply the media correction tools in the Video Photo and Audio editors directly to Library assets This kind of editing does not change the underlying files Instead the editing parameters are stored in the Library database and are reapplied whenever the asset is recalled See Chapter 4 Corrections on page 127 for details An important purpose of the media correction tools is to allow you to make adjustments on material that is not correctly identified automatically With video footage for example the Adjustments group of tools allows you to override the Library assigned aspect ratio interlace mode and stereoscopic 3D format Video scene detection Using the Library s automatic scene detection function video footage can be split into multiple scenes either automatically or manually Dividing raw files into scene length portions can make some editing tasks much less cumbersome than they would be otherwise The time required for scene detection varies depending on the length of the clip and the detection method selected A progress bar keeps you informed of the status To initiate scene detection select one of the methods on the Detect scenes context menu command for video assets By date and time This option often results in logical scene boundaries that reflect your intention while shoot
308. s maintained If the Alt key is held down when deleting any gaps produced will be left unclosed In insert mode gaps on the tracks from which clips are deleted will also be closed but other tracks will be unaffected No effort is made to preserve synchronization to the right of the deletion With regard to synchronization the safest editing mode for deletion is overwrite which will simply remove the clips and leave everything else unchanged 96 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Clip operations The timeline of your project provides comprehensive support for selecting adjusting trimming moving and copying clips Selecting Select clips in preparation for performing editing operations upon them A selected clip receives an orange frame in the timeline and in the Storyboard and is displayed as solid orange in the Navigator To select one clip click it with the mouse Any previous selections are removed For a fast multiple selection click in an open timeline area then drag out a selection frame that intersects the clips of interest To select all clips with one command press Ctrl A To clear a selection click into any gap area of the timeline Multiple selection with keyboard and mouse To create more complex multiple selections left click while pressing Shift Ctrl or both together To select a series of clips Click on the first and Shift click on the last The two clips together define a bounding rectangle or selectio
309. s position Aspect ratio The Aspect ratio dropdown on the control bar can be use to ensure that the crop rectangle maintains a desired standard 142 Pinnacle Studio User Guide proportion while being resized Standard 4 3 and wide 16 9 frame aspect ratios are supported Preview This function displays the cropped image without the surrounding material Press Esc or click the image to return to the editing view Clear Cancel and Apply Clear returns the bounding box to its original dimensions Cancel closes without saving any edits made Apply saves the changed image without exiting the editor Straighten This correction enables you to straighten an image in which elements that should be exactly horizontal or vertical are visibly tilted Unless you have cropped the image it dynamically resizes as you rotate to keep the corners from being visibly cut off With a cropped image no resizing takes place as long as there is sufficient excess material to fill in the empty corners Ready to straighten an image with crosshairs Chapter 4 Corrections 143 Several functions pertaining to Straighten are provided on the toolbar below the preview Guide line options The two buttons at the far left of the toolbar set the mode for the lines that are superimposed on the preview as a guide to straightening Selecting either button deselects the other The Crosshairs leftmost button adds a pair of crossed lines that can be drag
310. s ranging from Folk to Electronica Additional libraries may be purchased from within Studio as they become available by clicking the Get More button The Voice over tool telephone call Just open the Voice over tool click Record EJ Recording a voice over in Studio is as easy as making a and speak into a microphone attached to your computer You can narrate as you watch the movie play so that your words match the action on the screen You can also use the tool as a quick way of capturing ambient music or home made sound effects via your microphone Before you can record audio using the Voice over tool you will need to connect a microphone to the input jack of your PC sound board Review the video scenes in your movie and decide where you want the voice over to begin and end When you are ready open the Voice over tool Select your starting point on the timeline of your project You can do this by selecting a clip playing the movie and stopping it at the desired point or by dragging the timeline scrubber Chapter 8 Sound and music 263 Position the microphone for use and try speaking a test phrase to check your recording level see Voice over level below When you are satisfied click the Rec button which toggles to a Stop button during recording A three second countdown is displayed then your movie begins to run in the Player Perform your narration and click the Stop button when done Now you will be asked if yo
311. s slightly dog eared when the mouse hovers over it The corner can now be dragged further into the clip creating a fade The wider you make the folded over area the longer will be the duration of the fade Fade durations can be edited with the mouse as shown here You can also click on the folded over area to open a small dialog box for editing the duration numerically Edit an existing fade by positioning the mouse over the vertical line descending from the inward corner of the fold Make sure the bidirectional arrow pointer is displayed then drag the edge as desired The context menu for control points on the volume contour provides the commands Add keyframe Delete keyframe and Delete all keyframes Either the first or the second of these commands will be grayed since only one of them can apply at a time The Panner This tool lets you regulate the apparent location of the sound source in relation to a listener within a surround listening field Like the clip volume tool it works with keyframes assigned to the clip and so is active only when the timeline scrubber is positioned on an audio clip or a video clip with synchronous audio The contour line for panning changes is drawn in blue 256 Pinnacle Studio User Guide K AN Track 1 In the Audio Mixer the third icon in each track gives access to the Panner where you can control the positioning of the track s audio output in a two dimensional surround
312. s three media editors one each for video photos and audio Their general operation is described in Media editing overview on page 130 One of the main functions of the three media editors is to provide applicable add on tools in three families Transitions Corrections and Effects along with the specialized Pan and zoom function in the Photo Editor only Working with visual effects in the Photo Editor At top several groups of effects are listed In the center a preview shows the image with effects applied parameters to customize them are available at right At bottom transport controls and a timeline support animating the effects with keyframing Chapter 5 Effects 153 Only the Corrections family is provided when the media editors are opened from the Library When they are opened from the timeline of a movie or disc project however the full range of tools becomes available This chapter provides a general introduction to effects editing then focuses on the visual effects in the Photo and Video editors as well as Pan and zoom Audio corrections and effects are described in Chapter 8 Sound and music on page 235 Corrections vs effects The tools in the Corrections family are meant primarily for remedying the imperfections that are often encountered in actual media files poor white balance in photos wind noise in soundtracks and so on Unlike effects the correction tools can be applied to Library assets not
313. s treated as an ordinary self contained video clip To customize the clip by filling in the template s blanks you will double click the Montage clip to open the Montage Editor For more information see Using the Montage Editor on page 191 Each template defines a video or graphic sequence with blanks to be filled in by you The available customizations can take several forms For instance most templates provide one or more slots or drop zones for video or image clips Many let you supply text captions for titles and some have additional parameters for other special properties If you want to use other clips from the timeline to customize the Montage they can be added using the Paste to Drop Zone command from the Montage clip s context menu without opening the Montage Editor The Montage section of the Library Montage templates are stored in their own section of the Library To find it click the down arrow on any Library tab and select Montage which is listed in the Creative Elements section The play button on any Montage icon loads the template into the Player where it can be previewed with standard transport controls Chapter 6 Montage 181 50s Modem Click the Play button on the icon to preview the template To use a template in your project drag the icon from the Compact Library in the Movie Editor or the Disc Editor to the project s timeline Using montage templates Montage templates are s
314. s you want them For more information see Importer panels on page 294 Now start your camera or roll your tape and start monitoring the embedded preview display in the central area of the Importer window Click the full screen button at the right hand end of the transport bar to preview on the full monitor screen Chapter 10 The Importer 333 Import from Dazzle Video Capture When you want to capture an image as it goes by click the Capture Frame button A thumbnail of the grabbed frame is added to the Image Tray at the bottom of the window 334 Pinnacle Studio User Guide L4 84 B4 ae 84 gi DA Capturing snapshots in the Importer While previewing live or taped video in the central area of the window use the Capture Frame button to grab still images Grabbed frames accumulate in the Image Tray at the bottom of the window until you click the Start Import button to transfer them to the Library Capture as many additional frames as are required The Importer adds each one in turn to the collection growing in the Image Tray In the course of capturing you can change tapes re aim your camera and so on as you see fit The source video doesn t need to be uninterrupted as long as there is signal present when you actually click the Capture Frame button Using the Image Tray For on the spot review of a frame you have already grabbed click the thumbnail of any but the most recent frame in the Image Tray This switch
315. s zone is still active the subclip s last frame will be frozen to fill the allocated time Adding effects within drop zones It is possible to apply video or audio effects directly to a Montage subclip by dragging the effect to the drop zone As usual a magenta stripe on the top of the clip signals that effects have been applied Removing effects within drop zones Look under Effects the zone s context menu for the Delete all command or for the Delete submenu on which you can select the effect to be deleted Note If you remove or replace the media in a drop zone all the effects applied to that media are removed too Chapter 6 Montage 193 194 Pinnacle Studio User Guide mers a Chapter 7 The Title Editor Pinnacle Studio s Title Editor is a powerful tool for creating and editing animated titles and graphics Its extensive suite of text and image effects and tools provides innumerable possibilities for the visual design of your movie Areas of the Title Editor 1 Presets Selector 2 Library 3 Edit Window 4 Settings Panel 5 Toolbar 6 Layer List These are the main areas of the Title Editor display numbered as in the illustration above 1 The Presets Selector provides tabs for Look and Motion presets with the presets organized by style within each tab A Look is a visual styling of a text or shape layer in your title a Motion is an animation routine that can be assigned to any layer but is most Chap
316. selects it for editing At the same time the playhead jumps to the marker position Edit name The name field lets you enter a distinctive name for the currently selected marker if desired The left and right arrows beside the name provide another way of moving through the marker list Position Edit the position of a marker directly here as time code Marker color Set the color of the current marker and markers subsequently created by clicking one of the available color buttons Trashcan The trashcan icon on each row of the marker list lets you delete individual markers Video corrections The correction tools within the Video Editor are Enhance Adjustments Snapshot and Stabilize Chapter 4 Corrections 149 Enhance videos The Enhance corrections for video are the same as those for photos and other images See Enhance photos on page 138 Adjustments During import Studio automatically detects certain parameters but a variety of factors can lead to the occasional incorrect identification Adjustments allows any of these basic image properties to be changed if needed Alpha If your video has an Alpha channel and you wish to remove it choose the Ignore Alpha option Aspect ratio If the aspect ratio of a video asset was not recognized correctly on import or if the frame proportions must be manually changed for another reason use this dropdown menu to select the desired setting The adjustment does no
317. set and trimming it if required use the send to timeline button at the bottom left of the Player As usual the asset is added to the project on the default track and at the playhead A useful variation is to click anywhere within the Player screen and drag the asset onto any desired timeline track The asset is added at the drop point rather than at the playhead Title Editor ScoreFitter voice over These three functions add new clips to the project s timeline clips that are not underpinned by any Library asset Instead they are created from settings and other actions you take during editing Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 95 Once your editing is complete both titles and ScoreFitter clips will be sent to the default track on the timeline using the Send to timeline function while voice over clips will go to the special voice over track instead For details please see Chapter 7 The Title Editor on page 195 ScoreFitter on page 261 and The Voice over tool on page 263 Deleting clips To delete one or more clips first select them then press Delete Alternatively click the trashcan icon on the timeline toolbar or choose Delete from the selection s context menu In smart mode if the deletion produces a gap that spans all tracks it is closed by shifting material to the right of the gap leftwards This lets you avoid accidentally creating empty sections in your movie while still ensuring that synchronization between tracks i
318. sets you can use in Pinnacle Studio including video photographic and audio media and Pinnacle Studio projects themselves must be imported from a source such as a local hard drive into the Library before they can be used In most cases importing is handled automatically using watchfolders However the Importer can also be used to import assets from local folders that are not set up as watchfolders Chapter 10 The Importer 291 The next step After Studio has finished importing your assets you will be able to access the imported files for use in your productions For more information see Chapter 2 The Library on page 17 Using the Importer The very first step in importing is to open the Studio Importer by clicking the Import button at the top left of the screen The Importer consists of a large central area surrounded by a number of smaller panels One of these the Import From panel at the top left of the display has a pivotal role It provides a list of device types that can serve as the source of your import operation Your choice of input source in turn determines the rest of the Importer display Above all the set of controls and views offered in the central area for preview browsing and selecting material depends on the chosen import type 292 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Here the Importer is configured for importing material from DVD For disc sources the central area lists the chapters av
319. sitions use insert mode during adjustment whereas fade in is done in overwrite mode Hold down Alt while adjusting to invert this behavior You can adjust a transition so that its duration is zero effectively deleting it Alternatively use Transition gt Remove on the transition s context menu Once again ripple mode is used for fade out and overwrite for fade in with the Alt key available to reverse the default To set the duration of a transition numerically click the duration field that appears when the mouse pointer is above the transition rectangle Zoom the timeline in to enlarge the screen width of the transition fold if the field does not appear Clicking the field activates in place editing allowing you to enter a duration via the keyboard Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 121 Transition context menu Find in Library This command opens the Library Browser at the folder containing the transition Edit This command invokes a pop up window the basic transition editor where the transition duration can be set If the transition is one that offers a custom editor for configuring special properties the Edit button in the basic transition editor provides access A Reverse check box is available with some transitions for reversing the transition animation Basic transition editor Copy This command puts the transition on the Clipboard together with its type fade in fade out and its duration These properties
320. ssets from the Library by editing and trimming these core media and by enlivening them with transitions effects and other enhancements Timeline fundamentals The timeline consists of multiple tracks as many as you require in a vertical stack Tracks nearer the top of the stack are positioned towards the front when viewed their opaque parts obscuring the tracks below The basic action of movie authoring is to drag an asset from the Library to a timeline track where it is called a clip With a little practice you can lay out a rough edit of a movie very quickly just by adding its main media assets at their approximate timeline positions 70 Pinnacle Studio User Guide At the left end of the timeline are track headers with several controls per track a lock button the track name and monitoring buttons for the track s video and audio Here the current default track is Main The track header To the left of each track is a header area that provides access to functions such as disabling video or audio monitoring for the track The default track One track is highlighted with lighter background color and is also marked with an orange bar to the left of the track header This is the default track It has a special role in certain editing procedures for instance it is the target track for pastes To make another track the default track click in its header Your current position on the timeline corresponds to the vide
321. ssful editing of AVCHD files requires more computing power than other formats supported by Pinnacle Studio DV This term refers to DV and Digital8 camcorders VCRs and tapes Before you start 1 HDV A high definition video format that allows video in frame sizes of 1280x720 or 1440x1080 to be recorded in MPEG 2 format on DV media 1394 The term 1394 applies to OHCI compliant IEEE 1394 FireWire DV or i LINK interfaces ports and cables Analog The term analog applies to 8mm Hi8 VHS SVHS VHS C or SVHS C camcorders VCRs and tapes and to Composite RCA and S Video cables and connectors Buttons menus dialog boxes and windows Names of buttons menus and related user interface items are written in bold to distinguish them from the surrounding text Choosing menu commands The right arrowhead symbol gt denotes the path for hierarchical menu items For example Select File gt Burn Disc Image Context menus A context menu is a pop up list of commands that appears when you click with the right mouse button on certain areas of the application interface Depending where you click a context menu may pertain either to an editable object like a clip on an editing timeline to a window or to a zone such as a control panel Once open context menus behave just like the ones on the main menu bar Context menus are available in most parts of the Pinnacle Studio interface Our documentation generally t
322. ssible ways to adjust or enhance your clips Please see Audio effects on page 248 for details Channel mixer The channel mixer allows you to make level adjustments and redirect audio signals from their original channel assignments to new ones For instance you can use the mixer to condense separate stereo channels to a left or right mono channel The mixer panel originally opens in the left hand column of controls but can be dragged to a new docking position at either side of the window Other panels will reposition themselves as needed while you drag Chapter 8 Sound and music 239 If you need functions the channel mixer does not provide consider applying the Channel Tool effect to the clip See Audio effects on page 248 for information about the Channel Tool Level adjustment Click on the slider under the level meters to set the playback level of the clip The level you set will be used whenever this clip is played or used in a timeline The red area on the meters represents overmodulation of the sound and should be avoided if possible To determine the maximum level you can safely use click the normalize button Channel routing This dropdown list contains all options for redirecting audio signals such as a channel exchange left interchanges with right for example or combining a two channel stereo signal onto one mono channel The 1 1 routing option routes the audio signal without changes Channel Mixer Default
323. start and end frames completes your session For a more complex animation however position the scrubber where a change of camera motion should occur To create a new keyframe simply set the white selection frame to the desired size and position The new keyframe is represented by a lozenge shaped gray icon in the keyframe line below the clip timeline Add as many keyframes as necessary When you are finished click OK to return to the timeline of your project Chapter 5 Effects 177 Manually adding a keyframe To add an explicit keyframe at the playhead position without altering the current animation path click the toggle keyframe button on the far left of the transport toolbar Moving a keyframe You can drag a keyframe along the timeline to reposition it in time Jumping to a keyframe To jump to a keyframe in order to modify or delete it use the arrow buttons to the left and right of the keyframe button or click directly on the keyframe in the keyframe line When the playhead is directly over a keyframe the keyframe will highlight Deleting a keyframe To delete a keyframe click its icon on the keyframe line to navigate to the right frame then click the Delete keyframe button on the far left of the transport toolbar The Settings panel The Settings panel provides a number of controls for configuring the pan and zoom tool Smooth provides gentle braking when approaching a direction change in the keyframe animation path
324. store a Library asset on a disc select Burn Disc on the context menu You can burn just the file or a disc image if you have made one If you select multiple assets and then select Burn Disc all of the assets will appear on the Burn files to disc dialog More assets can be added by Chapter 2 The Library 31 clicking the File icon and browsing You can also delete files from the list before burning Removing items from the Library To remove an item from the Library or a selection containing multiple items choose Delete selected from the context menu or press the Delete key A confirmation dialog lets you approve the list of media files to be removed from the Library database By default the files themselves will not be affected but the Remove from library and delete option lets you delete the files too if desired Be careful as this command works on all kinds of Library assets including your Pinnacle Studio projects if any of those are selected When all the files in a folder are removed the Library hides the folder as well You may also remove a folder and all the assets it contains from the Library when removing the folder from the watchfolders list However this is not automatic and you will be asked if you want to keep your current assets listed in the Library but still stop monitoring the location The Browser This is the area in which the Library displays its media assets the videos photos audio projects col
325. t independently Link chapters to menu buttons When this option is selected as many pages will be added to the menu as are needed to accommodate buttons for all of the created chapters Without this option the chapter markers are created on the timeline in the unlinked state and no menu pages are created If you want to link an unlinked marker to a menu button drag it to the button while previewing the menu in the Player Even if you leave it unlinked the chapter marker will still serve as an available resumption point when the viewer is skipping through the disc with the jump button on the remote control Return after every chapter Checking this option will add a return marker at the end of each chapter By default the markers are placed so that each chapter will play up to the start of the chapter following then return to the originating menu To change the menu that a return marker is linked to drag the marker to the menu icon in the Menu List Remember however that the return marker will only be active when playback was launched from the menu to which the marker is linked 284 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The Menu Editor The Menu Editor shares most of its controls and usage with the Title Editor see Chapter 7 The Title Editor on page 195 The present section focuses on features particular to the Menu Editor Starting the editor To open a menu in the Menu Editor either click the Edit button on the Player
326. t a button Normal Thumbnail Previous Next Root Normal This type of button lets your text image or shape serve as a link to any chapter marker on your disc project timeline or to a menu in your Menu List Thumbnail This variation on the Normal button type allows a thumbnail from your timeline to be displayed on the button Previous and Next These button types automatically handle navigation between the pages of multipage menus in the Menu List During playback the buttons are hidden automatically when their targets do not exist on the first and last pages of the multipage set Because their behavior is fixed it is not possible to link these buttons to chapter markers Root A button of this type links to the first menu in the Menu List Its behavior cannot be changed 286 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Buttons for multipage menus If you add both a Next and a Previous button to any menu it can serve as a multipage menu If either button type is absent the menu cannot be used in the multi page mode Button presets Click the Buttons tab at the top of the Menu Editor to view the available categories of premade menu buttons Select a button and it will appear in the middle of the preview area where it can be dragged to the desired position The three categories reflect the button types discussed above The Navigation category includes all buttons of the Previous Next and Root types General Buttons These image
327. t change the amount of the image on display Instead visible area is stretched or shrunk independently in width and height to make it fit the desired frame boundaries Interlacing If the Interlacing options on the image were misidentified on import use this dropdown to impose the correct setting Stereoscopic 3D If the format of a 3D image file was wrongly identified on import set the correct stereoscopic layout with this dropdown list 150 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Snapshot The snapshot tool enables you to acquire a single frame from a video crop it and save it as a photo Its controls are similar to those for the Crop correction for photos Selection Frame and Aspect Ratio The frame for selecting an image cutout can be resized by grabbing its sides and corners or dragged within the preview by grabbing it in the center Correcting the stereoscopic 3D properties of a Library asset Preview Preview shows the selected cropped image without the snapshot tools Press Esc or click once on the image to view the tools again Apply This command exports the cropped image as a JPEG file and switches off the snapshot editing mode in the preview Snapshots are stored in the library under My Pictures gt Images Locate the new item by returning to the Library and clicking the special find added item button that is displayed temporarily on the Library footer bar The new media file itself is created in Chapter 4 Correcti
328. t frames jerky playback if the number and complexity of effects outstrips the available processing capacity of the system Render while play When the Automatic setting is used the application decides on the basis of system information whether real time rendering can be done during playback If the Off setting is used rendering is disabled during playback but resumes when playback is stopped Hardware Acceleration When activated this feature shifts part of the processing load from the CPU to auxiliary hardware such as the GPU Graphics Processing Unit of your graphics card The level of support for hardware acceleration depends on the type of CPU and graphics card on your computer Most NVidia cards support the CUDA architecture When this is accessible the GPU is used to assist with H 264 decoding Machines equipped with a recent Intel CPU having the Intel Quick Sync Video feature can use it for rapid decoding and encoding of H 264 and H 264 MVC material To choose Hardware Acceleration type 1 Choose Setup gt Control Panel gt Export and Preview 2 In the Hardware Acceleration area choose an option from the Type dropdown 368 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Watchfolders Preview Audio Device Event Log Balanced Main Monitor Import Keyboard Project Settings Storage Locations None None Playback Optimization Hardware Acceleration options Default 3D Viewing Mode This setting selects the defau
329. t several modes for viewing 3D material The icon has a different appearance for each mode If your video is in 3D but the dropdown arrow does not appear go to Adjustments to choose the correct 3D setting See Adjustments on page 141 for more information LA Left Eye Right Eye Side By Side Differential Checkerboard 3D TV Side By Side Anaglyph x ow Cae c a E3 oO Shuttle The shuttle wheel provides smooth bidirectional control over a range of speeds when browsing video or audio Both media types can be viewed at a reduced speed Shortcuts J reverse K pause L forward and each of these in combination with the Shift key for slow play allow easy scrubbing and shuttling from the keyboard also 146 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Transport controls The oval arrow icon activates looping playback The remaining controls are from left to right Jump backward Frame backward Play Frame forward Jump forward Audio monitor The loudspeaker icon sets the system playback volume but does not affect the recorded audio level Click once on the loudspeaker to mute or click on the slider to the right of the icon to adjust monitoring volume To set the playback level of the clip itself use the channel mixer See Channel mixer on page 239 Time code displays The left field indicates the duration of the media as trimmed The right field displays the current play position For a Library asset the play positio
330. tal frames based on DCT Kbyte also KB One Kbyte kilobyte contains 1024 bytes The K here stands for the number 1024 210 and not 1000 as in the metric prefix Key color A color whose display is suppressed so that a background image can show through Most commonly used when overlaying one video sequence on top of another allowing the underlying video to display wherever the key color appears Keyframe A video frame for which the value of a particular parameter of a video or audio effect is specified During playback the animation of effects is accomplished by adjusting parameters smoothly from one key framed value to the next Animating effects by means of keyframes is often called keyframing LPT See Parallel port Luminance See Brightness M1V File extension for an MPEG file that contains video data only Mbyte also MB One Mbyte megabyte corresponds to 1024 Kbytes 1024 x 1024 bytes Mark In Mark Out In video editing the mark in and mark out times refer to the starting and ending timecodes that identify the portions of clips to be included in the project MCI Media Control Interface Programming interface developed by Microsoft recording and playing back audio and video data It is also used to connect a computer to an external video source such as a VCR or laser disc 420 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Modulation The encoding of information upon an empty carrier signal Motion JPEG M JPEG A
331. ter 7 The Title Editor 195 often applied to text See Preset Looks on page 201 and Preset Motions on page 202 for further information Hover your mouse over any preset to see how it will affect your title A single click applies the preset to the current layer After being applied Looks can be customized using the Settings Panel The Library provides resources for building your titles The tabs across the top provide access to all available media and content This compact version of the Library is functionally identical to the full Library as described in Chapter 2 The Edit Window is your main work area when authoring or editing a title It provides a scrubbable preview of your title with hands on editing See The Edit window on page 213 for details The Settings Panel has separate collapsible subpanels for each of three settings categories Text settings governing the style and size of text captions Look settings for the configuration of faces edges and shadows and Background settings which pertain to the title s background layer The Toolbar has four control groups From left to right the add text and add shape tools a set of layer manipulation controls a full set of transport controls including a loop button and a pair of counter readouts showing the duration of the title and the current playback position The Layer List Each graphical or textual element constitutes a layer in the title which is a stac
332. ter or click outside the edit field to finish Reordering layers As we saw in the topic Layer operations in the Edit Window on page 214 the position of a layer in the layer stack can be altered by means of commands on the Layer context submenu or by keyboard shortcuts such as Ctrl Plus Layer gt Bring to Front The Layer List offers a more direct approach simply drag the layer header to a new position in the list This is particularly handy in situations where overlapping layers make mouse selection difficult As you drag the layer an insertion line shows where the layer will appear in the list when dropped Using multiple selection see Selecting layers on page 225 you can drag several layers at once to a new position 226 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Hiding and locking layers A complex title can get crowded very quickly as you add layers to the composition and Motions to the layers The visibility button at the right hand end of the layer header is handy for simplifying such situations Click the eye shaped visibility button to temporarily remove a layer from the Edit Window The layer s information and settings are preserved but you will be able to work on other layers for the time being without the hidden layer obscuring either your view or your mouse actions Click again to restore the layer to visibility The toolbar The controls and readouts on this header bar are in groups From left to right The
333. th the compact Library and the timeline together in the same window adding assets to your movie becomes a breeze just drag the items you want from the Library Browser onto the timeline 66 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Previewing in the project editors You can operate the Player either in single or dual preview mode Click the Preview Mode button E in the upper right corner of the Player to toggle between them Timeline New Movie Movie AXP 00 02 05 07 TC 00 00 51 20 C7 mm 00 00 30 00 4 4 00 C1 00 00 IP E EE E SI The Player in single mode You can choose to view either Source Library or timeline material Single mode conserves screen space by providing only one Player preview The Source and Timeline tabs above the Player indicate whether Library or timeline material is being viewed and allow you to switch from one to the other Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 67 The player in dual mode The side by side previews let you browse the Library while keeping your current movie frame in view In dual mode Source Library material is shown in the left hand preview and timeline material in the right hand preview each with its own set of transport controls The dual view makes it easier to locate Library assets that fit well with your movie by making both the existing and the prospective material visible simultaneously 68 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Organize Author bx MAG2382 jr Source hawaii 2014 d fami
334. the Installation Manager shows you which add ons will be included Switch to a Appendix E The installation manager 435 customized installation if you need to change the selection tems with a green checkmark are already installed Standard Installation installs the application and all available plug ins It is recommended for most users The Customized Installation option lets you choose to install only a subset of the add ons available 2 Pinnacle Studio 8 Customized Installation Choose the component you want to install Ba Locate installer files Pinnacle Studio Pinnacle Studio Application 1 26 GB Installed Standard Content Pack 654 94 MB Bonus Content Hollywood FX Vol 1 3 163 75 MB The Customized Installation screen lets you choose which add ons to install Green checkmarks indicate already installed items orange checkmarks denote available items Common controls Some controls are available under either installation method The Change installer location button lets you specify the folder that contains the installation files you want the Installation Manager to handle You will only need to use it if you have moved the installation files after first use The button opens a folder browser that lets you point the Installation Manager to the new location 436 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The links provided under Learn while installing give access to information on just about any Studio relate
335. the brightness floor of the image sharpening the highlights and midtones by a downward expansion of the dynamic range White balance If the white or gray areas of an image bear a slight tint or color cast the controls in this group can help restore a natural appearance Gray scale picker Activate the picker then click in a nominally white or gray area of the image where no coloration ought to be present The image white balance will be automatically adjusted so as to remove the unwanted tint Color circle Browse the color field by moving the control point away from the center until a natural image appearance is achieved Selective brightness To enable you to edit particular brightness zones in an image without impacting others five separate brightness controls are provided Blacks This slider affects only the darkest areas in the image For best results leave editing both Blacks and Whites until last 140 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Fill light Increasing this slider may produce better detail in shadowy but not black areas of a full contrast photograph MidRange The zone impacted by this slider includes the entire medium range of illumination Highlights This slider affects the bright locations in the image It can be used to mute areas overexposed due to flashes reflections or brilliant sunshine Whites This slider impacts the parts of the image that are considered white Edit Whites and Blacks last Sele
336. the computer Unstable software behavior of undetermined cause can often be fixed by resetting the system This is almost always a good place to start when troubleshooting 2 Wait a few minutes If Pinnacle Studio still won t launch wait a few minutes to let it finish launching On some computers it may take a little while for the launch to complete 3 Update Studio When troubleshooting any problem it is always best to use the latest version of the software if possible 4 Disconnect capture hardware If possible unplug any capture hardware and try launching Pinnacle Studio again If you can t launch with your webcam plugged in try it unplugged and vice versa You may have to set the webcam up in the same way every time you launch Studio 5 Download and reinstall hardware drivers During the Studio software launch process we do check that you have a DirectX compatible graphics and sound card Download and reinstall the latest version of the driver for the graphics card that is on your system If you need assistance with this step please contact the graphics card manufacturer 6 End background tasks There are a couple ways to accomplish this One is to use start up management software to assist in eliminating unnecessary programs that launch on Windows start up Many shareware and freeware programs of this type have been created Use an Internet search engine such as Google or Yahoo to search for startup managers We don t endorse a
337. the effect 204 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Adding Motions To add a particular Motion to a particular layer first select the layer then do one of the following Click the Motion s thumbnail in the Presets Selector Drag the Motion s thumbnail from the Presets Selector to an accessible layer one not masked by other layers in the Edit Window Drag the Motion s thumbnail from the Presets Selector onto any of the layers or grouped layers in the Layer List header Upon using any of these methods the Motion will be added to the layer replacing the existing Motion of the same type on that layer if any See The Layer List on page 224 for details on working with Motions in the Layer List Creating and editing titles A title in Pinnacle Studio s Title Editor is built from elements of four types The background layer By default the background is fully transparent For overlay titles this is normally what you want For special purposes or for full screen titles you can choose a color a gradient an image or video for the background For additional flexibility the Background Settings also include an opacity control See Background settings on page 207 Video and image layers The resources that make up these layers originate in the Videos Photos and Movie Projects sections of the Library The layers support the same operations as text and shape layers except for the application of Looks Chapter 7 The
338. the left panel Ensure that all installed hardware is functioning normally with the latest drivers and that nothing has been flagged in Device Manager with the yellow exclamation mark icon indicating an error condition In the case of a driver problem that you cannot resolve yourself contact the device manufacturer or your computer vendor for assistance Appendix A Troublehooting 381 Contacting support Learn about all of your support options on our website www pinnaclesys com support Most common issues are already documented in our Knowledgebase and we encourage you to use these options first To search the support Knowledgebase effectively please include the name of the product in your query Forums Please visit our discussion forums to join the conversation on Pinnacle Studio Scroll down the forum list to find the forum in your language go pinnaclesys com forums Top support issues The remainder of this chapter draws on some of the knowledge base articles most consulted by users The text presented here may be less detailed or current than that provided on line For the full text available under each document ID please refer to the on line knowledge base Compatibility with past content Document ID 384211 Much but not all of the additional creative content from previous versions Pinnacle Studio can be used directly in the current version of Pinnacle Studio as can many content offerings from third party providers
339. the pop up menu The available choices include circle square ellipse rectangle horizontal and vertical pill shapes and triangle Upon selection a new layer of the given shape and a default size appears in the center of the Edit Window ABC w 206 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Editing layers The remainder of this chapter provides details on editing the background and layers in the Title Editor To learn about customizing the Background layer see Background settings on page 207 For information on moving resizing rotating and rearranging all types of foreground layers see The Edit window on page 213 and The Layer List on page 224 To learn about editing text and setting text properties see Text and text settings on page 216 For working with stereoscopic titles see Titles and stereoscopic 3D on page 222 Multiple selection and grouping is covered under Working with layer groups on page 230 Finally to learn about Motion editing in the Layer List timeline refer to The Layer List on page 224 Background settings Unlike the foreground layers in a title the special background layer does not appear in the Layer List and is not modifiable in the Edit Window Instead the background is controlled from the Background Settings panel Chapter 7 The Title Editor 207 Text Settings Look Settings Background Settings Opacity 1 Keep Aspect h Stretch The Background Settin
340. the source disc in its drive and select it in the Import From panel of the Importer If you have more than one optical drive choose the correct device among those listed Import from o Apple iPad DVD Drive J Avid My computer amp Cloud Note Copy protected media cannot be imported Before starting the capture make sure that your destination folder and file name are set up in the other panels the way you want them see Importer panels on page 294 Because large files can be involved when importing from optical discs selecting the correct import directory is important In particular ensure that the designated storage location has sufficient space available see The Import To panel on page 299 Chapter 10 The Importer 329 Previewing the disc files The media on optical discs are accessed through the computer s file system For this reason the previewing controls in the central area the methods for selecting files and the procedure for importing are the same as for ordinary file based assets except that the unneeded folder view starts in the closed position Please see Import from file on page 312 Import from digital cameras Like optical disc drives the media on digital cameras is accessed through the computer s file system The camera may appear on the source list as a removable disk drive Previewing selecting and importing are the same as for ordinary file based assets except that th
341. tings located at the left end of the timeline toolbar Default durations Set the default durations of titles images and transitions when they are first brought to the timeline Once there of course the clip length can be trimmed as required Ruler zooming When this option is checked dragging horizontally on the time ruler zooms the timeline in and out In this mode you will need to drag directly on the scrubber handle to scrub or to reposition the playhead When ruler zooming is turned off you can click anywhere on the ruler to move the playhead In either case zooming may also be performed by using any of The Plus and Minus keys on the numeric keypad The Navigator at the top of the timeline The scrollbars under the previews Activate trim mode by clicking near cuts Turn this on to launch trim mode by clicking If this setting is off trim mode can be activated with the Trim Mode button on the timeline toolbar 374 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Storage locations This page allows you to set where to save media and projects you create with Pinnacle Studio You can separately specify locations for each of the following file types Studio Movie Projects Studio Disc Projects Titles Menus Restore Project This folder is used both for project packages that have been unpacked for further work and for projects imported from Studio for iPad Render Files This folder is for the temporary files produced whil
342. tion Smart mode is designed to maintain synchronization between timeline tracks as far as possible In a multitrack editing situation clips typically have vertical as well as horizontal relationships When you have carefully placed your cuts to coincide with the beats of a music track for example you don t want to disrupt everything when you make additional edits 84 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Insert mode is always non destructive it moves other clips on the track out of the way before inserting new material It will also automatically close gaps created by removing material Only the target track is affected Any prior synchronization with other tracks from the edit point rightwards is lost Insert is most useful in the early stages of a project when you are collecting and arranging clips on the timeline It ensures that no material will be lost and makes it very easy to reorder clips and sequences of clips In the later stages when the structure of your project is approaching its final state and you have started carefully synchronizing material on different tracks insert mode is less helpful The very properties that favor its use for the early stages the ripple behavior count against it when finalizing This is where overwrite comes into play Overwrite directly affects only the clips you select Changing the length or position of a clip in overwrite mode will overwrite neighboring clips if you lengthen or leave g
343. to audio clips in your project Unlike effects discussed next these tools can also be applied to audio assets in the Library When you later use the asset in a project the corrections will come with it you can modify them further from the timeline if you choose Corrections are non destructive meaning that the corrected audio file is not modified in any way The effects in the Audio Editor provide a number of ways of enhancing transforming or having fun with sound clips on the timeline Unlike the correction tools just discussed effects can t be applied directly to Library assets but only within a project The effects come with preset parameter combinations that you can further edit according to your needs The Audio Editor The Audio Editor provides tools for previewing analyzing and manipulating digital audio from wav mp3 and other file types It includes special features for the original or synchronous audio track created during video recording For the general interface of the Audio Editor and the other media editors please see Media editing overview Chapter 8 Sound and music 237 Trimming and editing the stereo soundtrack of a Library video asset At left is a video monitor panel and the channel mixer The darkened portion of the wavetorm center represents material removed trom this stereo sound by trimming on the timeline at bottom The Compressor correction filter has been applied right The Audio Editor prov
344. tomatically updated You can create as many watchfolders as you wish and optionally set them up to watch for only one media type video image or audio instead of all three the default To designate a folder on your system as a watchfolder click the Add folder button below the watchfolders list and navigate to the folder you wish to add To cancel watchfolder behavior select the folder in the list and click the Remove folder button Apply Changes directs the Library to update its catalog in light of the watchfolder changes Audio device This setup page provides the parameters available for recording devices such as microphones that are connected to the computer Click the device name to access the Windows settings dialog for the device Event logging Messages are logged in this window during certain operations such as importing a number of files You can check here for details about any problems that may have occurred during these operations Export and Preview These settings affect the representation display of video 366 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Quality These options control the quality of video previewing throughout the application Best Quality Provides previewing at full resolution the resolution at which the project will ultimately be exported Under this option there may be dropped frames during playback on slower systems Balanced At this setting the recommended one for ordinary use some quali
345. tored in the Montage section of the Library where they are grouped by theme To use a template simply drag its thumbnail to the timeline of your project from the Compact Library in the Movie Editor or the Disc Editor 182 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Water Wave Adva Water Wave Adva 50s Modern 30 1 Opening 2 Segue A Aerodynamic Album Album 2 Antique Joumal gt od ai AN Tracki lt gt 4 x AN Track 2 To use a template drag its thumbnail onto the timeline The numbers on the clip indicate that five subclips are available for customization Montage clips on the timeline can be trimmed and edited much like ordinary video You can add transitions and effects adjust their audio and so on You can even fill the slots in the Montage with timeline clips For fully customizing the clip with your own content however a special editing tool is needed This is the Montage Editor which opens when a Montage clip is double clicked on the timeline It can also be accessed with the clip context menu command Edit Montage The Montage Editor allows the user to customize a Montage clip by adjusting its built in settings or specifying video and audio clips for it to use Chapter 6 Montage 183 The Montage Editor lets you specify template elements such as video or image clips property settings and text captions Clips are added by dragging them from the editor s Compact Library to drop zones below the
346. transition uses the Send to timeline context menu command for assets in the Movie Editor s compact Library view or the Send to timeline button in the Player when in Source mode The transition is added to the clip on the default track at the cut nearest the playhead Transitions can be added at the start or end of any clip The context menu of a clip on the timeline lets you add a transition by choosing either In transition gt Add or Out transition gt Add 118 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Finally transitions can also be created in the applicable media editor which opens when you double click the timeline clip The media editor provides editing controls similar to those for other types of special effect Please see Working with transitions on page 172 for full information A fade out transition is applied in ripple or insert mode which creates an overlap by shifting the right hand clip and all its neighbors somewhat to the left This behavior saves the left hand clip from having to be extended rightwards to create the transition which might produce over trimming However shifting the rightward clips causes a break in the synchronization with other tracks that may have to be worked around A fade in transition is added in overwrite fashion No synchronization issue will result but over trimming may be produced in the left hand clip To invert the fade in and fade out behaviors press the Alt key during dragging and
347. tup on page 365 for more information Importing If you need to import a large amount or variety of media or to import from analog media such as VHS tape click the Import button near the 30 Pinnacle Studio User Guide top of the application window to open the Importer See Chapter 10 The Importer on page 291 for full information Quick import The Quick Import button at the top left of the Library opens a Windows file dialog for fast import of files from a hard drive or other local storage New folders in the corresponding media categories photos video audio and projects are created for the files specified In addition the imported items are included in the Last Import Collection Navigation k 4 Media a E Photos Direct import via drag and drop To select and import items in one step use drag and drop from Windows Explorer or the desktop into the Browser The new items are immediately displayed in the Collection Latest Import which is created for the occasion if necessary Exporting directly from the Library Any photo video audio file or project in the Main Library can be directly exported as is using the context menu commands described below to either a Cloud based storage service or a disc For other exporting options use the Exporter instead by selecting the asset and clicking the Export tab at the top of the window See Chapter 11 The Exporter on page 337 for full information To
348. ty optimizations are omitted for the sake of a faster preview In most cases the difference is barely noticeable Fastest Playback The preview is optimized in favor of processing efficiency which may be helpful on a slower system Show full screen preview on Select the computer monitor if more than one is available on which you want the full screen preview to be displayed Show external preview on Select from a list of available devices and signal outputs if any External preview standard Select the TV standard of the connected video monitor Playback Optimization Optimization threshold The optimization threshold determines how much rendering is done when you preview your project It can be set anywhere from Off 0 to Aggressive 100 Whether a particular timeline slice will be rendered depends on the amount of computation needed to prepare the effects and transitions that are used and on the value of the optimization threshold If this value is set all the way to Aggressive Pinnacle Studio will pre render all transitions titles disc menus and effects even when the output would have been previewable this can considerably delay playback Chapter 12 Setup 367 If optimization threshold is set to Off zero on the other hand the yellow and green markings that indicate rendering progress are not displayed instead all effects are played back in real time However this can result in reduced playback quality los
349. u can add others at will using the watchfolder system Grouping by folder is shown in the Main Library illustration above When you use another grouping by rating by date or by file type exactly the same asset files are listed within each subsection as with the by folder grouping However instead of classifying them by the file system folders in which they are stored the Asset Tree groups them into virtual folders according to the chosen property Grouping by rating for example divides each subsection into six virtual folders Five of them display media files to which you have given star ratings the sixth is for those you haven t rated yet See The Browser on page 32 for more information about file ratings and their uses Under group by date the folders represent the year of the file s creation within these the files are further grouped by month 26 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The Main Library with grouping By Date selected in the All Media branch of the Navigator The bottom level folders in the Navigator are displayed in the Browser right These virtual folders each represent all the photos whose file date falls within a particular month Grouping in other subsections The Projects and Creative Elements branches of the Navigator also provide a group by menu so it is possible for branches to be in different grouping modes The menu commands are the same as described above for the All Media branch except that the
350. u do so all parameter values are sustained from the last remaining keyframe to the end of the clip 4 Setthe playhead to the position in the clip at which you want to establish a change of some effect parameter such as size position or transparency 5 Modify the parameter using the Settings panel If keyframe editing is turned on a new keyframe will be automatically added at the playhead position If a keyframe already exists the parameter data it represents will be modified Chapter 5 Effects 165 Keyframe operations For each effect only one keyframe can be attached to any frame of the clip The keyframe defines the instantaneous value of every clip parameter for the frame where it is set Add or delete a keyframe To add a keyframe at the playhead position without adjusting any parameters or to delete an existing keyframe at the position click the toggle keyframe button on the far left of the transport toolbar Move a keyframe To move a keyframe along the keyframe line and thus along the timeline click it and drag Jump to a keyframe Use the arrow buttons to the left and right of the keyframe button or click directly on the keyframe in the keyframe line to move the playhead to that position The keyframe should highlight indicating that it is now the target keyframe for deletion or parameter editing Keyframing multiple parameters Sometimes it is desired to keyframe multiple parameters of the same effect on sep
351. u want to keep the recording If you answer in the affirmative the voice over clip will be added to your Library and will also be placed automatically on the voice over track on the timeline 9 O Mute all audio The Voice over tool ready to go Just click the Rec button count to three along with the software then start talking Additional controls Voice over level As you record watch the peak level meter display to make sure that your microphone is generating a strong signal but not overmodulating Watch this meter to make sure your recording levels get neither too high nor too low The indicator changes color from green 0 70 modulation through yellow to red 264 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Filename With this text field you can preset the file name used for voice over audio files The first file is given the name you specify if you leave it unchanged later files are given a numeric suffix e g Voice over 1 that increases with each take Location Clicking on the folder icon lets you navigate to a new file system folder for storing voice over clips Adjust the recording level slider as necessary to stay in the right range The slider is located immediately below the peak meter Generally you should try to keep your audio peaking in the yellow 71 9096 and out of the red 91 100 Mute all audio The existing sounds on your movie soundtrack are sometimes distracting when you are trying to record a vo
352. uble click slider Return slider to default Ctrl L Rotate Photo Left Ctrl R Rotate Photo Right Alt Enter Play using full screen Esc Exit full screen viewing Title Editor Shift Left Expand character selection left Shift Right Expand character selection right Shift Ctrl Left Same as Shift Left expand by word Shift Ctrl Right Same as Shift Right expand by word Ctrl B Toggle bold Ctrl I Toggle italic Ctrl U Toggle underline Ctrl A Select all Ctrl D Deselect all Spacebar With timeline area selected Start and stop playback 432 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Appendix E The installation manager The Pinnacle Studio Installation Manager looks after the job of installing Pinnacle Studio and any additional content included in your purchase of the application Before you begin For a trouble free installation of Pinnacle Studio we recommend a number of preparatory steps Begin by confirming that your computer meets the minimum system requirements for the product Note that some operations such as AVCHD encoding have more stringent requirements For more information see System requirements on page 437 Next ensure that your Studio serial number is available For a downloaded copy of the application you will find this information in your order confirmation mail you can also retrieve it from your customer account If you obtained yo
353. und effects and more The Library uses watchfolders for keeping up automatically with the changing population of media files on your system On the watchfolders page of the Pinnacle Studio Setup control panel enter the names of your media directories especially those that you update frequently Thereafter the Library will scan those directories regularly for changes and update accordingly For more information see Watchfolders on page 366 Main view When you click the Library tab the Library takes over the main window This main view gives you spacious access to a number of cataloging and search tools including those for categorizing assets by means of ratings and tags and those for creating user defined asset collections Compact view The compact view of the Library squeezes virtually the whole functionality of the main view into a panel embedded within certain other windows such as the Movie Editor and the Disc Editor The 8 Pinnacle Studio User Guide primary purpose of the compact view is to allow assets to be brought into a movie or disc project from the Library by drag and drop 1MAG2401 jpg SND pg e wes 1MAG2353 jpg IMAG2382 jpg The main view of the Library consists of navigation controls for exploring the catalog structure left and a browser for examining and selecting assets right Player The tools available from within the Library include the Player a viewer that works for all m
354. ur copy of Pinnacle Studio on disc the serial number will be found on the DVD sleeve We recommend that you keep a record of your serial number in a safe place On some systems it may be advisable to disable antivirus protection before installing Pinnacle Studio Note Pinnacle Studio can be installed on a system containing a previous Studio installation both versions will coexist Appendix E The installation manager 433 Upgrade Installation If a qualifying previous version of the software is currently installed on the computer the Installation Manager will automatically recognize its presence and permit the upgrade Qualifying versions include Pinnacle Studio 9 to 16 e Avid Studio Avid Liquid 6 to 7 If none of these is currently installed on the machine you will be prompted to provide instead the serial number of the previous product Launching the Installation Manager If you bought Studio from an Internet store as a downloadable file the Installation Manager will start when you run the executable program you downloaded Even before you do so consider making a copy of the downloaded files to a back up location like a DVD or an external hard drive If you bought Studio on a DVD disc the Installation Manager will autostart on most systems when that disc is inserted If it does not launch automatically on your computer please locate and run the file Welcome exe in the root directory of the DVD Registratio
355. usly Video settings Compression Codec Use this dropdown list to select the codec you want to use Framesize This line shows the dimensions of the captured video Quality Data rate Some codecs present quality options in terms of a compression percentage Quality and others in terms of the required data transfer rate in KB sec Data rate Presets DV MPEG Video Settings Audio Settings Compression Codec Compression Codec MJPEG v PCM M Framesize 720x480 px Record Audio Quality Compression Options for digital and analog video import Chapter 10 The Importer 307 Audio settings Compression This dropdown shows the codec that will be used to compress the incoming audio data Record audio Clear this checkbox if you are not planning to use the captured audio in your production The Scene Detection Options window The options provided in the Mode panel for both DV HDV and analog import include access to this window for configuring scene detection preferences Automatic scene detection is a key feature of Studio when working with DV and HDV sources As video capture proceeds Studio detects natural breaks in the video and divides it up into scenes Scenes can be independently viewed and managed in the Scenes view in the Library Scene detection date The Scene Detection Options window for DV or HDV import When importing from analog sources only the last two options are supported 308 Pinnac
356. ve When multiple assets are brought in as part of a single import operation this may entail creating or updating multiple subfolders Current month This is the same as the Today option but without the day portion e g 2012 10 After making your choice click the x button at the top right of the dialog window to return to the Importer The Mode panel The Mode panel of the Importer provides a place to adjust the options offered by several import sources DV HDV import options The options for DV and HDV import are in three groups on the Mode panel Chapter 10 The Importer 303 Mode Presets k MPEG Custom Scene detection OFF Stop at tape end OFF Presets The Presets group offers two standard configurations for video and audio compression and a custom setting that lets you fine tune compression parameters in the Compression Options window which opens when the upper more button is clicked For more information see The Compression Options window on page 307 The fixed presets are DV This provides full quality DV capture using about 200 MB of disk space per minute of video MPEG MPEG compression produces smaller files than does DV but requires more computational horsepower to encode and decode This could result in slower performance on older computers Scene detection When the scene detection feature is enabled your footage is divided up on import into scenes that can
357. view O MM EL Cini EG 13 When you have finished editing your project open the Exporter by pressing the Export button at the top of the screen With a few clicks you can tell the Exporter everything it needs to know to output your movie or asset in the format that best fits your requirements Note To export directly from the Library without using the Exporter please see Exporting directly from the Library on page 31 The Exporter will ensure that your project is complete before it is exported If there is any missing media your project cannot be exported until the media is either relinked or deleted from the project For more information see Missing media on page 22 Chapter 11 The Exporter 337 Export type The Exporter The buttons at upper left set the export destination to File Disc Cloud the Internet or portable Device Other controls let you set output options as needed for the chosen output type The name of the project appears above the Player while the panel below it shows the currently selected output format Begin by selecting one of the File Disc Cloud and Device buttons to set the media type of your finished project File from just about anywhere your hard drive your website your portable movie player even your mobile phone See Output to file on page 345 E File output creates movie files that can be viewed Disc output lets you copy a movie onto a BiSa recordable disc in your co
358. w do turn off background programs that are interfering with system performance and software installation for detailed instructions about how to proceed Defragment your hard drive See knowledge base document 232457 Windows hard disk defragmenting information for instructions and advice on this step Update video and audio drivers Make sure that you have the latest sound and video card drivers loaded from their manufacturer s websites You can determine what sound and video card you have by checking in the Device Manager list in Windows under Sound video and game controllers and Display adapters To determine the manufacturer and date of its driver double click the card name Now click the Driver tab to see all the driver information including Driver Provider and Driver Date Driver updates are often released through the websites of the hardware manufacturers Update Windows Make sure you have all available Windows updates for your computer 394 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Optimize computer performance Windows provides a built in tool for this purpose 1 Right click Computer or My PC and select Properties 2 Click the Advanced System Settings link This will bring up the System Properties window 3 Click the Settings button in the Advanced section 4 Select Adjust for best performance and click OK Free space on boot drive Make sure you have 10 GB or more on your boot drive for paging If you do not have
359. w image can be dragged with the mouse anywhere within the working area This is useful for scanning the image while it is zoomed in The wave visualization in the Audio Editor is not draggable however Info and captions The Info button at the bottom left of any media editor opens a window with information about the current file a Firewood in snow jpg The Caption field which is available only when you invoke the media editor from the Library allows you to rename the current asset The settings panel When you select an effect or tool that has adjustable settings a panel appears in the upper right section of the window Named presets are 134 Pinnacle Studio User Guide available in the Select preset dropdown menu near the top of the panel these provide prepared combinations of settings that you can adapt or use directly Setting numeric values Numeric settings fields have a gray slider bar within a darker gray field Click once within this field to put it into numeric input mode where you can type the desired value for the parameter Alternatively drag the slider bar to the left or right using the mouse Double clicking restores the default value Comparing parameter sets A highlighted orange dot appears to the right of the field when the value of a setting is changed from the default Thereafter clicking the dot toggles between the default and the most recent non default values The dot to the right of the effect or corr
360. w to replace a lost Pinnacle Studio serial number 388 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Looking up your customer information 1 Start by logging in at www pinnaclesys com 2 Browse to Your Product 3 Choose your products again from the products section 4 Your serial number is listed in the Your products window that comes up Using a serial number when upgrading To upgrade Pinnacle Studio you will need the serial number from the old version For information about finding your serial number see Serial number information on page 388 After you have found your old serial number start the install A window will appear asking for both the new and old numbers Put them in the correct windows and click Next Error or crash while installing Document ID 284219 Here are some tips for troubleshooting errors or crashes that could occur while installing Pinnacle Studio Specific Errors Error 1402 If you are getting a 1402 error during installation please follow the instructions in document 364555 in the knowledge base Error 1402 on installation Error on install Setup will now abort installation If this error occurs during installation please follow the instructions in knowledge base document 363187 Error on install Setup will now abort installation Appendix A Troublehooting 389 General troubleshooting Here are some further avenues to explore if you are having trouble getting the application to install Try c
361. wer right corner of the Trim Editor When solo mode is deactivated the preview shows trim points in their timeline context Timeline TC 00 01 18 04 The Trim Editor in single preview mode 104 Pinnacle Studio User Guide The Trim Editor opens in dual preview mode To switch to single preview click the preview mode button BH in the upper right corner of the preview area Closing trim mode Trim mode can be closed by clicking the trim mode button g Editing modes The current editing mode smart overwrite or insert determines how trimming will affect other clips on the timeline Select the mode from the dropdown list at the far right of the timeline toolbar Insert mode Clips to the right of a trimmed clip and on the same track will shift left or right to accommodate the new length of the clip Synchronization with other tracks may be lost but no clips are overwritten Overwrite mode Only the clips you are trimming and any neighboring clips they happen to overwrite are altered in this mode Synchronization across tracks is not affected Smart mode For trimming smart mode is equivalent to insert mode Trimming the beginning of a clip Prepare to trim the beginning of a clip the mark in point by clicking at the left hand edge of the clip while the trim pointer is visible With Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 105 a trim point thus established you can add or remove frames from the beginning of the
362. wever you just want it and any clips to its right to move rightwards far enough to make room for the new material Here again smart editing provides a painless answer Simply drag the new material to the start of the clip that is in the way rather than into a gap The clip moves aside exactly as far as necessary Inserting with split If you drop an item onto the middle of an existing clip rather than at a cut the clip will be split The new material is inserted at the point you specified and is followed immediately by the displaced portion of the original clip Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 93 In smart mode synchronization of the target track with all other tracks is maintained by inserting in each of them a gap of length equal to the new clip To avoid affecting the other tracks in this way use insert instead of smart mode Alternatively pressing Alt as you drop the new material will cause it to overwrite a portion of the existing clip A third approach is to lock any track that should not be modified although this will affect the synchronization of clips on locked tracks with those on unlocked tracks Replacing a clip To replace a clip drag a single Library asset onto the clip you want to replace while holding down Shift The replacement clip will inherit any effects and transitions that were applied to the original clip Corrections are not inherited however since they are usually meant to address the issues of a particula
363. whether you save it as a file burn it to a disc transfer it to a device or upload it to the Internet Along with the Library the timeline of your project and the Player the Movie Editor window provides a variety of tools and panels for creating and editing titles adding effects and other purposes The compact Library The compact view of the Library which uses the top left of the Movie Editor screen is a core feature of the editing environment If you switch back and forth between the Library and the Movie Editor you will see that the same location tab is selected in both views and that the same Library assets are on display Chapter 3 The Movie Editor 65 To make navigation easier in the compact view of the Library the location tabs across the top bear icons that indicate the type of content that will appear in the Browser when the tab is clicked To display a different part of the Library click the expand collapse triangle beside the icon This opens the folder tree through which you can access any Library asset Organize 4 Media acations 4 R Photos IMAG2AUT jpg gt Public Pictures c sutro baths 2007 d PEL Video gt Public Videos c 4 videos d 3d gt Ji Audio IMAG2388 jpg 4 Projects tudio Movie Projects tudio Disc Projects 4 Collections 3D clips Latest Import 4 Content gt fx Effects a Finding Library assets using the expandable Navigator in the compact Library Wi
364. while previewing the menu or double click it in the Menu List As with the Title Editor when the Menu Editor opens one line of text is already highlighted To edit it just start typing To start editing a different line click inside its text box and highlight the characters you want to change To stop editing text click on an empty area of the window The button cycle One feature that differs between the Menu Editor and the Title Editor is the button cycle a control also present in the Disc Editor In both cases it is located on the right side of the toolbar just above the timeline Click the left and right arrows on the control to step through the active buttons in the menu and make one available for editing Note If you only want to edit text for the buttons on your menu you do not need to enter the Menu Editor at all instead edit the button name directly in the button cycle control of the Disc Editor Menu buttons Any visual element of your disc menu can be used as a button that links to other content in your movie Elements designated Not a button on the other hand have no linking behavior Chapter 9 Disc projects 285 Button types A menu button s type is the only factor that determines its behavior Its text and appearance should almost always be consistent with that behavior in a well authored disc production but they don t affect it Five button types are available vy Button Se Thumbnail No
365. ws of the Library are found in Pinnacle Studio The Main view takes over the application window when you click the Organize tab It uses the full available space to provide as much information as possible 18 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Organize hawas 2014 To open the Main Library view click the Organize tab at the top of the Pinnacle Studio application window The Compact view of the Library is a panel either docked as in the Movie and Disc project editors or floating as in the Title Editor The Compact view retains the full functionality of the Library Its primary purpose is to allow you to bring Library assets into a movie or disc project with drag and drop The current set of Library tabs and the contents of the Browser are common to all views of the Library For instance if you are browsing in a particular folder of disc menus in the Main view that same folder will be open in the Compact view if you now switch to the Movie Editor Correcting media files With regard to technical quality media files are not all created equal Occasionally you do come across the perfect photo clip or sound effect More often though the photo needs cropping the video is shaky or the sound starts with an annoying hiss Pinnacle Studio s media correction tools let you fix these and similar issues by applying correction filters to a problem clip after you have placed it on the timeline of your project Often however an even bett
366. y Double click the item to pop up a standard File Open dialog with which you can point the way to the file s new location 22 Pinnacle Studio User Guide Tree in snow jpg Incidentally to check if there are missing media anywhere in the Library look in the special subsection All media gt Missing media of the Asset Tree Location tabs Editing a video project involves coordinating the various media and other assets at your disposal As you proceed it s likely that you ll find yourself browsing repeatedly in various parts of the Library that are relevant to the project No doubt you will also change your viewing and filtering options from time to time depending on the material you re reviewing Like a web browser that uses a row of tabs to allow flipping effortlessly amongst multiple open web sites the Library lets you create and configure location tabs as you work The tabs provide direct access to each of the various locations in which you are currently working Chapter 2 The Library 23 hawai 2014 IMAG2421 jpg G242 IMAG2417 jpg Here three tabs give access to media required by different parts of a disc project The mouse pointer is poised to create a new tab To close a tab click the x icon to the right of the tab caption To set the location of the current tab click a name in the Asset Tree Changes you make to viewing and filtering options while the tab is active are retained between accesses T
367. y checking that the magnet button on the timeline toolbar is turned on This ensures that when you drop one clip very near the start or end of another it will automatically be positioned so that the clips adjoin exactly Also set the editing mode button to insert so that existing material moves rightward to make space when you drop the clip rather than any portion of it being overwritten Replacing an existing Montage template To replace an existing Montage template on the timeline hold down the Shift key on the keyboard then drop the new template onto the old one The new clip takes over not just the location but any existing customizations of the old clip The placement lines drawn in blue show the boundaries of the clip to be replaced regardless of its designed default length the new clip will inherit these boundaries Overwriting clips with a Montage template If you want to drop a Montage template onto a timeline track and have it simply overwrite other clips on the track without making any changes to the remainder of the timeline you may do so by setting the editing mode button to Chapter 6 Montage 185 overwrite The length of the Montage clip will determine how much of the track is overwritten Trimming Montage clips Although trimming operations on the timeline are the same for ontage clips as for video clips the actual result produced by trimming may vary depending on the nature of the template n an all animated te
368. you can directly compare the original against the corrected version The three available views can be accessed by the arrow at the right of the button Split image The lower half of the preview displays the corrections You can adjust the vertical position of the dividing line by dragging the center portion of the line up or down with the mouse You can also divide the image diagonally by grabbing the line on either side and rotating Full image side by side The right image shows the corrections Chapter 4 Corrections 137 Full image above and below The lower image shows the corrections Correcting photos The five corrections available within the Photo Editor are Enhance Adjustments Crop Straighten and Red Eye The first two are controlled by means of panels that open in the upper right corner of the Photo Editor the other three are controlled interactively on the image preview Enhance photos This correction opens the Image Correction CPU panel of tools for fixing problems to do with color and illumination The tools can also be used creatively to achieve custom looks or stylistic effects that extend not just repair the original material They are presented in the groups described below Automatics The two special tools in this group adjust the image automatically after analyzing its brightness spectrum You can change the tool settings further by hand to customize the adjustment if required White Balance When you
369. z pinnacle Pinnacle Studio 18 User Guide Pinnacle Studio 18 User Guide Including Pinnacle Studio Plus and Pinnacle Studio Ultimate Contents Before you startere sotah e nee eee 1 Abbreviations and conventions sasas assas aeaaaee 1 Buttons menus dialog boxes and windows o an assas aasan 2 Help nd FooltiDs 6r aceon ides Hoo are AM o eite 3 Finding your version information 0 000 cece e eee ee 4 Upgrading x34 euro ee oe erbe i eet ks 4 Chapter 1 Using Pinnacle Studio 00 5 The Inmporters 32 trot Ice a aussi or etn 5 ThesEXpOFtet s trenit eet dte et nter Ene dts ge tds 6 The ceritral tabs sisri mata em heu beet Nadie Re renta 7 The LBTI s a uus rans ce rer Per Toe do better rob ei 8 The next Step uie e en etu eem opas i eene Rech a bes 10 The Movie Editor and the Disc Editor 0005 11 The media editors llle 12 The Players ce satire CERNERET Re REEL ENSE 14 Pinnacle Studio Projects lille 14 Chapter 2 The Library liliis 17 Adding assets to a project 0 0 0 esee 18 Correcting media Tiles nier Ero Ye E o eia 19 Instant gratification SmartMovie illii 20 Understanding the Library liiis 20 The Navigator ise lec VERENA eet SERE Cei 24 Collections zi rues m aee pe UE ops ev eese ie 28 Managing Library assets lille 30 The BIOWSGOE 56er tee xn biu Sep acta giai 32 Contents Thumbnails and details l i 34 Opti

Pinnacle Studio 18 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents